DSPIC30F3012A-30I/PG - Microchip Technology

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A

dsPIC30F2011, dsPIC30F2012,

dsPIC30F3012, dsPIC30F3013

Data Sheet

High-Performance

Digital Signal Controllers

DS70139A-page ii Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Information contained in this publication regarding device

applications and the like is intended through suggestion only

and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to

ensure that your application meets with your specifications.

No representation or warranty is given and no liability is

assumed by Microchip Technology Incorporated with respect

to the accuracy or use of such information, or infringement of

patents or other intellectual property rights arising from such

use or otherwise. Use of Microchip’s products as critical

components in life support systems is not authorized except

with express written approval by Microchip. No licenses are

conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any intellectual

property rights.

Trademarks

The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron,

dsPIC, KEELOQ, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART,

PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC, and SmartShunt are

registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated

in the U.S.A. and other countries.

AmpLab, FilterLab, MXDEV, MXLAB, PICMASTER, SEEVAL,

SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company

are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology

Incorporated in the U.S.A.

Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, dsPICDEM,

dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR,

FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial

Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Migratable Memory, MPASM,

MPLIB, MPLINK, MPSIM, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net,

PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate,

PowerTool, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select Mode, Smart Serial,

SmartTel and Total Endurance are trademarks of Microchip

Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries.

SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated

in the U.S.A.

All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their

respective companies.

Printed on recycled paper.

Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:

• Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.

• Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the

intended manner and under normal conditions.

• There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our

knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data

Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.

• Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.

• Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not

mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”

Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our

products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts

allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.

Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 quality system certification for

its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in

Chandler and Tempe, Arizona and Mountain View, California in

October 2003. The Company’s quality system processes and

procedures are for its PICmicro® 8-bit MCUs, KEELOQ® code hopping

devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and

analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design

and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 1

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

High Performance Modified RISC CPU:

• Modified Harvard architecture

• C compiler optimized instruction set architecture

• Flexible addressing modes

• 84 base instructions

• 24-bit wide instructions, 16-bit wide data path

• Up to 24 Kbytes on-chip Flash program space

• Up to 2 Kbytes of on-chip data RAM

• Up to 1 Kbytes of non-volatile data EEPROM

• 16 x 16-bit working register array

• Up to 30 MIPs operation:

- DC to 40 MHz external clock input

- 4 MHz-10 MHz oscillator input with

PLL active (4x, 8x, 16x)

• Up to 21 interrupt sources:

- 8 user selectable priority levels

- 3 external interrupt sources

- 4 processor trap sources

DSP Features:

• Dual data fetch

• Modulo and Bit-reversed modes

• Two 40-bit wide accumulators with optional

saturation logic

• 17-bit x 17-bit single cycle hardware fractional/

integer multiplier

• All DSP instructins are single cycle

- Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) operation

• Single cycle ±16 shift

Peripheral Features:

• High current sink/source I/O pins: 25 mA/25 mA

• Three 16-bit timers/counters; optionally pair up

16-bit timers into 32-bit timer modules

• 16-bit Capture input functions

• 16-bit Compare/PWM output functions:

• 3-wire SPI™ modules (supports four Frame

modes)

•I

2C™ module supports Multi-Master/Slave mode

and 7-bit/10-bit addressing

• Up to two addressable UART modules with FIFO

buffers

Analog Features:

• 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) with:

- 100 Ksps conversion rate

- Up to 10 input channels

- Conversion available during Sleep and Idle

• Programmable Low Voltage Detection (PLVD)

• Programmable Brown-out Detection and Reset

generation

Special Microcontroller Features:

• Enhanced Flash program memory:

- 10,000 erase/write cycle (min.) for

industrial temperature range, 100K (typical)

• Data EEPROM memory:

- 100,000 erase/write cycle (min.) for

industrial temperature range, 1M (typical)

• Self-reprogrammable under software control

• Power-on Reset (POR), Power-up Timer (PWRT)

and Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)

• Flexible Watchdog Timer (WDT) with on-chip low

power RC oscillator for reliable operation

• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor operation:

- Detects clock failure and switches to on-chip

low power RC oscillator

• Programmable code protection

• In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™)

• Selectable Power Management modes:

- Sleep, Idle and Alternate Clock modes

CMOS Technology:

• Low power, high speed Flash technology

• Wide operating voltage range (2.5V to 5.5V)

• Industrial and Extended temperature ranges

• Low power consumption

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013 High Performance

Digital Signal Controllers

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 2 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013 Sensor Family

Pin Diagrams

Device Pins

Program Memory SRAM

Bytes

EEPROM

Bytes

Timer

16-bit

Input

Cap

Output

Comp/Std

PWM

A/D 12-bit

100 Ksps

UART

SPI™

I2C™

Bytes Instructions

dsPIC30F2011 18 12K 4K 1024 – 3 2 2 8 ch 1 1 1

dsPIC30F3012 18 24K 8K 2048 1024 3 2 2 8 ch 1 1 1

dsPIC30F2012 28 12K 4K 1024 – 3 2 2 10 ch 1 1 1

dsPIC30F3013 28 24K 8K 2048 1024 3 2 2 10 ch 2 1 1

Note: For descriptions of individual pins, see Section 1.0.

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

OSC1/CLKI

VDD

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

PGD/EMUD/AN4/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/CN6/RB4

AVDD

PGC/EMUC/AN5/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/CN7/RB5

EMUD2/AN7/OC2/IC2/RB7

AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0

VSS

AN6/SCK1/INT0/OCFA/RB6

AVSS

AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1

AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

10 EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0

18-Pin PDIP and SOIC

dsPIC30F2011

dsPIC30F3012

AN3/CN5/RB3

MCLR

28-Pin PDIP and SOIC

MCLR

VSS

VDD

EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0

EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1

AVDD

AVSS

AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

IC2/INT2/RD9 EMUC2/IC1/INT1/RD8

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

VSS

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

OSC1/CLKI VDD

SCK1/INT0/RF6

PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2

PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3

AN5/CN7/RB5

AN4/CN6/RB4

AN3/CN5/RB3

AN6/OCFA/RB6

EMUD2/AN7/RB7

AN8/OC1/RB8

AN9/OC2/RB9

CN17/RF4

CN18/RF5

dsPIC30F2012

MCLR

VSS

VDD

EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0

EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1

AVDD

AVSS

AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

IC2/INT2/RD9 EMUC2/IC1/INT1/RD8

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

VSS

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

OSC1/CLKI VDD

SCK1/INT0/RF6

PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2

PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3

AN5/CN7/RB5

AN4/CN6/RB4

AN3/CN5/RB3

AN6/OCFA/RB6

EMUD2/AN7/RB7

AN8/OC1/RB8

AN9/OC2/RB9

U2RX/CN17/RF4

U2TX/CN18/RF5

dsPIC30F3013

28-Pin SPDIP and SOIC

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 3

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

Pin Diagrams

Note: For descriptions of individual pins, see Section 1.0.

44-Pin QFN

AN8/OC1/RB8

AN9/OC2/RB9

U2RX/CN17/RF4

U2TX/CN18/RF5

VDD

VSS

PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2

EMUC3/AN1/VREF-/CN3/RB1

EMUD3/AN0/VREF+/CN2/RB0

MCLR

AVDD

AN6/OCFA/RB6

EMUD2/AN7/RB7

AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

AN3/CN5/RB3

AN4/CN6/RB4

AN5/CN7/RB5

VSS

OSC1/CLKI

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3

SCK1/INT0/RF6

EMUC2/IC1/INT1/RD8

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

IC2/INT2/RD9

VDD

AVSS

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

VSS

dsPIC30F3013

2 32

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 4 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table of Contents

1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.0 CPU Architecture Overview........................................................................................................................................................ 13

3.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 23

4.0 Address Generator Units............................................................................................................................................................ 37

5.0 Flash Program Memory.............................................................................................................................................................. 43

6.0 Data EEPROM Memory ............................................................................................................................................................. 49

7.0 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 53

8.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 59

9.0 Timer1 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................... 67

10.0 Timer2/3 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................ 71

11.0 Input Capture Module ................................................................................................................................................................. 77

12.0 Output Compare Module ............................................................................................................................................................ 81

13.0 SPI Module ................................................................................................................................................................................. 85

14.0 I2C Module ................................................................................................................................................................................. 89

15.0 Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART) Module ................................................................................................ 97

16.0 12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) Module ...................................................................................................................... 105

17.0 System Integration ................................................................................................................................................................... 113

18.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 127

19.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 135

20.0 Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................................... 141

21.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 181

Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 187

On-Line Support................................................................................................................................................................................. 193

Systems Information and Upgrade Hot Line ...................................................................................................................................... 193

Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 194

Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................. 195

TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS

It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip

products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and

enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced.

If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via

E-mail at docerrors@mail.microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150.

We welcome your feedback.

Most Current Data Sheet

To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at:

http://www.microchip.com

You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page.

The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000).

Errata

An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current

devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision

of silicon and revision of document to which it applies.

To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following:

• Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com

• Your local Microchip sales office (see last page)

• The Microchip Corporate Literature Center; U.S. FAX: (480) 792-7277

When contacting a sales office or the literature center, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include

literature number) you are using.

Customer Notification System

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 5

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW This data sheet contains information specific to the

dsPIC30F2011, dsPIC30F2012, dsPIC30F3012 and

dsPIC30f3013 Digital Signal Controllers. These

devices contain extensive Digital Signal Processor

(DSP) functionality within a high performance 16-bit

microcontroller (MCU) architecture.

The following block diagrams depict the architecture for

these devices:

• Figure 1-1 illustrates the dsPIC30F2011

• Figure 1-2 illustrates the dsPIC30F2012

• Figure 1-3 illustrates the dsPIC30F3012

• Figure 1-4 illustrates the dsPIC30F3013

Following the block diagrams, Table 1-1 relates the I/O

functions to pinout information.

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 6 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 1-1: dsPIC30F2011 BLOCK DIAGRAM

Power-up

Timer

Oscillator

Start-up Timer

POR/BOR

Reset

Watchdog

Timer

Instruction

Decode &

Control

OSC1/CLKI

MCLR

, V

PGD/EMUD/AN4/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/CN6/RB4

Low Voltage

Detect

UART1

Timing

Generation

PGC/EMUC/AN5/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/CN7/R

PCH PCL

Program Counter

ALU<16>

X Data Bus

C™

AN6/SCK1/INT0/OCFA/RB6

EMUD2/AN7/OC2/IC2/RB7

PCU

12-bit ADC

Timers

Input

Capture

Module

Output

Compare

Module

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

PORTB

PORTD

16 16

16 x 16

W Reg Array

Divide

Unit

Engine

DSP

Decode

ROM Latch

Y Data Bus

Effective Address

X RAGU

X WAGU

Y AGU

AN0/V

REF

+/CN2/RB0

AN1/V

REF

-/CN3/RB1

AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

AN3/CN5/RB3

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

, AV

PORTC

Interrupt

Controller

PSV & Table

Data Access

Control Block

Stack

Control

Logic

Loop

Control

Logic

Data LatchData Latch

Y Data

(512 bytes)

RAM

X Data

(512 bytes)

RAM

Address

Latch

Address

Latch

EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0

SPI1

Address Latch

Program Memory

(12 Kbytes)

Data Latch

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 7

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 1-2: dsPIC30F2012 BLOCK DIAGRAM

AN8/OC1/RB8

AN9/OC2/RB9

Power-up

Timer

Oscillator

Start-up Timer

POR/BOR

Reset

Watchdog

Timer

Instruction

Decode &

Control

OSC1/CLKI

MCLR

, V

AN4/CN6/RB4

Low Voltage

Detect

UART1

Timing

Generation

AN5/CN7/RB5

PCH PCL

Program Counter

ALU<16>

X Data Bus

C™

AN6/OCFA/RB6

EMUD2/AN7/RB7

PCU

12-bit ADC

Timers

CN18/RF5

SCK1/INT0/RF6

Input

Capture

Module

Output

Compare

Module

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

EMUD3/AN0/V

REF

+/CN2/RB0

PORTB

PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2

PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3

PORTD

16 16

16 x 16

W Reg Array

Divide

Unit

Engine

DSP

Decode

ROM Latch

Y Data Bus

Effective Address

X RAGU

X WAGU

Y AGU AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

AN3/CN5/RB3

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

CN17/RF4

, AV

PORTC

PORTF

Interrupt

Controller

PSV & Table

Data Access

Control Block

Stack

Control

Logic

Loop

Control

Logic

Data LatchData Latch

Y Data

(512 bytes)

RAM

X Data

RAM

Address

Latch

Address

Latch

EMUC2/IC1/INT1/RD8

IC2/INT2/RD9

EMUC3/AN1/V

REF

-/CN3/RB1

SPI1

Address Latch

Program Memory

(12 Kbytes)

Data Latch

(512 bytes)

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 8 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 1-3: dsPIC30F3012 BLOCK DIAGRAM

Power-up

Timer

Oscillator

Start-up Timer

POR/BOR

Reset

Watchdog

Timer

Instruction

Decode &

Control

OSC1/CLKI

MCLR

, V

PGD/EMUD/AN4/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/CN6/RB4

Low Voltage

Detect

UART1

Timing

Generation

PGC/EMUC/AN5/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/CN7/R

PCH PCL

Program Counter

ALU<16>

X Data Bus

C™

AN6/SCK1/INT0/OCFA/RB6

EMUD2/AN7PC2/IC2/RB7

PCU

12-bit ADC

Timers

Input

Capture

Module

Output

Compare

Module

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

PORTB

PORTD

16 16

16 x 16

W Reg Array

Divide

Unit

Engine

DSP

Decode

ROM Latch

Y Data Bus

Effective Address

X RAGU

X WAGU

Y AGU

AN0/V

REF

+/CN2/RB0

AN1/V

REF

-/CN3/RB1

AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

AN3/CN5/RB3

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

, AV

PORTC

Interrupt

Controller

PSV & Table

Data Access

Control Block

Stack

Control

Logic

Loop

Control

Logic

Data LatchData Latch

Y Data

(1 Kbytes)

RAM

X Data

(1 Kbytes)

RAM

Address

Latch

Address

Latch

EMUC2/OC1/IC1/INT1/RD0

SPI1

Address Latch

Program Memory

(24 Kbytes)

Data Latch

Data EEPROM

(1 Kbytes)

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 9

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 1-4: dsPIC30F3013 BLOCK DIAGRAM

AN8/OC1/RB8

AN9/OC2/RB9

Power-up

Timer

Oscillator

Start-up Timer

POR/BOR

Reset

Watchdog

Timer

Instruction

Decode &

Control

OSC1/CLKI

MCLR

, V

AN4/CN6/RB4

Low Voltage

Detect

UART1,

Timing

Generation

AN5/CN7/RB5

PCH PCL

Program Counter

ALU<16>

X Data Bus

AN6/OCFA/RB6

EMUD2/AN7/RB7

PCU

12-bit ADC

Timers

UT2X/CN18/RF5

SCK1/INT0/RF6

Input

Capture

Module

Output

Compare

Module

EMUC1/SOSCO/T1CK/U1ARX/CN0/RC14

EMUD1/SOSCI/T2CK/U1ATX/CN1/RC13

EMUD3/AN0/V

REF

+/CN2/RB0

PORTB

PGC/EMUC/U1RX/SDI1/SDA/RF2

PGD/EMUD/U1TX/SDO1/SCL/RF3

PORTD

16 16

16 x 16

W Reg Array

Divide

Unit

Engine

DSP

Decode

ROM Latch

Y Data Bus

Effective Address

X RAGU

X WAGU

Y AGU AN2/SS1/LVDIN/CN4/RB2

AN3/CN5/RB3

OSC2/CLKO/RC15

U2RX/CN17/RF4

, AV

UART2

PORTC

PORTF

Interrupt

Controller

PSV & Table

Data Access

Control Block

Stack

Control

Logic

Loop

Control

Logic

Data LatchData Latch

Y Data

(1 Kbytes)

RAM

X Data

RAM

Address

Latch

Address

Latch

EMUC2/IC1/INT1/RD8

IC2/INT2/RD9

EMUC3/AN1/V

REF

-/CN3/RB1

SPI1

(1 Kbytes)

Address Latch

Program Memory

(24 Kbytes)

Data Latch

Data EEPROM

(1 Kbytes)

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 10 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 1-1 provides a brief description of device I/O

pinouts and the functions that may be multiplexed to a

port pin. Multiple functions may exist on one port pin.

When multiplexing occurs, the peripheral module’s

functional requirements may force an override of the

data direction of the port pin.

TABLE 1-1: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS

Pin Name Pin

Type

Buffer

Type Description

AN0-AN9 I Analog Analog input channels.

AVDD P P Positive supply for analog module.

AVSS P P Ground reference for analog module.

CLKI

CLKO

ST/CMOS

—

External clock source input. Always associated with OSC1 pin

function.

Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in

Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC

and EC modes. Always associated with OSC2 pin function.

CN0-CN7 I ST Input change notification inputs.

Can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all

inputs.

EMUD

EMUC

EMUD1

EMUC1

EMUD2

EMUC2

EMUD3

EMUC3

I/O

ICD Primary Communication Channel data input/output pin.

ICD Primary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.

ICD Secondary Communication Channel data input/output pin.

ICD Secondary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.

ICD Tertiary Communication Channel data input/output pin.

ICD Tertiary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.

ICD Quaternary Communication Channel data input/output pin.

ICD Quaternary Communication Channel clock input/output pin.

IC1-IC2 I ST Capture inputs 1 through 2.

INT0

INT1

INT2

External interrupt 0.

External interrupt 1.

External interrupt 2.

LVDIN I Analog Low Voltage Detect Reference Voltage input pin.

MCLR I/P ST Master Clear (Reset) input or programming voltage input. This

pin is an active low Reset to the device.

OC1-OC2

OCFA

—

Compare outputs 1 through 2.

Compare Fault A input.

OSC1

OSC2

I/O

ST/CMOS

—

Oscillator crystal input. ST buffer when configured in RC mode;

CMOS otherwise.

Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in

Crystal Oscillator mode. Optionally functions as CLKO in RC

and EC modes.

PGD

PGC

I/O

In-Circuit Serial Programming data input/output pin.

In-Circuit Serial Programming clock input pin.

RB0-RB9 I/O ST PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port.

RC13-RC15 I/O ST PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port.

RD0, RD8-RD9 I/O ST PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port.

RF2-RF5 I/O ST PORTF is a bidirectional I/O port.

SCK1

SDI1

SDO1

SS1

I/O

—

Synchronous serial clock input/output for SPI1.

SPI1 Data In.

SPI1 Data Out.

SPI1 Slave Synchronization.

Legend: CMOS =CMOS compatible input or output Analog= Analog input

ST =Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levelsO= Output

I =Input P = Power

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 11

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

SCL

SDA

I/O

Synchronous serial clock input/output for I2C.

Synchronous serial data input/output for I2C.

SOSCO

SOSCI

—

ST/CMOS

32 kHz low power oscillator crystal output.

32 kHz low power oscillator crystal input. ST buffer when

configured in RC mode; CMOS otherwise.

T1CK

T2CK

Timer1 external clock input.

Timer2 external clock input.

U1RX

U1TX

U1ARX

U1ATX

U2RX

U2TX

—

UART1 Receive.

UART1 Transmit.

UART1 Alternate Receive.

UART1 Alternate Transmit.

UART2 Receive.

UART2 Transmit.

VDD P — Positive supply for logic and I/O pins.

VSS P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins.

VREF+ I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (High) input.

VREF- I Analog Analog Voltage Reference (Low) input.

TABLE 1-1: PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)

Pin Name Pin

Type

Buffer

Type Description

Legend: CMOS =CMOS compatible input or output Analog= Analog input

ST =Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levelsO= Output

I =Input P = Power

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 12 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 13

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

2.0 CPU ARCHITECTURE

OVERVIEW

This section is an overview of the CPU architecture of

the dsPIC30F. The core has a 24-bit instruction word.

The Program Counter (PC) is 23-bits wide with the

Least Significant (LS) bit always clear (see

Section 3.1). The Most Significant (MS) bit is ignored

during normal program execution, except for certain

specialized instructions. Thus, the PC can address up

to 4M instruction words of user program space. An

instruction pre-fetch mechanism helps maintain

throughput. Program loop constructs, free from loop

count management overhead, are supported using the

DO and REPEAT instructions, both of which are inter-

ruptible at any point.

2.1 Core Overview

The working register array consists of 16 x 16-bit regis-

ters, each of which can act as data, address or offset

registers. One working register (W15) operates as a

software stack pointer for interrupts and calls.

The data space is 64 Kbytes (32K words) and is split

into two blocks, referred to as X and Y data memory.

Each block has its own independent Address Genera-

tion Unit (AGU). Most instructions operate solely

through the X memory, AGU, which provides the

appearance of a single unified data space. The

Multiply-Accumulate (MAC) class of dual source DSP

instructions operate through both the X and Y AGUs,

splitting the data address space into two parts (see

Section 3.2). The X and Y data space boundary is

device specific and cannot be altered by the user. Each

data word consists of 2 bytes, and most instructions

can address data either as words or bytes.

Two ways to access data in program memory are:

• The upper 32 Kbytes of data space memory can

be mapped into the lower half (user space) of

program space at any 16K program word bound-

ary, defined by the 8-bit Program Space Visibility

Page (PSVPAG) register. Thus any instruction

can access program space as if it were data

space, with a limitation that the access requires

an additional cycle. Only the lower 16 bits of each

instruction word can be accessed using this

method.

• Linear indirect access of 32K word pages within

program space is also possible using any working

Table read and write instructions can be used to

access all 24 bits of an instruction word.

Overhead-free circular buffers (modulo addressing) are

supported in both X and Y address spaces. This is

primarily intended to remove the loop overhead for

DSP algorithms.

The X AGU also supports bit-reversed addressing on

destination effective addresses to greatly simplify input

or output data reordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms.

Refer to Section 4.0 for details on modulo and

bit-reversed addressing.

The core supports Inherent (no operand), Relative,

Literal, Memory Direct, Register Direct, Register

Indirect, Register Offset and Literal Offset Addressing

modes. Instructions are associated with predefined

Addressing modes, depending upon their functional

requirements.

For most instructions, the core is capable of executing

a data (or program data) memory read, a working reg-

ister (data) read, a data memory write and a program

(instruction) memory read per instruction cycle. As a

result, 3-operand instructions are supported, allowing

C = A+B operations to be executed in a single cycle.

A DSP engine has been included to significantly

enhance the core arithmetic capability and throughput.

It features a high speed 17-bit by 17-bit multiplier, a

40-bit ALU, two 40-bit saturating accumulators and a

40-bit bidirectional barrel shifter. Data in the accumula-

tor or any working register can be shifted up to 15 bits

right, or 16 bits left in a single cycle. The DSP instruc-

tions operate seamlessly with all other instructions and

have been designed for optimal real-time performance.

The MAC class of instructions can concurrently fetch

two data operands from memory while multiplying two

W registers. To enable this concurrent fetching of data

operands, the data space has been split for these

instructions and linear for all others. This has been

achieved in a transparent and flexible manner, by ded-

icating certain working registers to each address space

for the MAC class of instructions.

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 14 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

The core does not support a multi-stage instruction

pipeline. However, a single stage instruction pre-fetch

mechanism is used, which accesses and partially

decodes instructions a cycle ahead of execution, in

order to maximize available execution time. Most

instructions execute in a single cycle with certain

exceptions.

The core features a vectored exception processing

structure for traps and interrupts, with 62 independent

vectors. The exceptions consist of up to 8 traps (of

which 4 are reserved) and 54 interrupts. Each interrupt

is prioritized based on a user assigned priority between

1 and 7 (1 being the lowest priority and 7 being the

highest), in conjunction with a predetermined ‘natural

order’. Traps have fixed priorities ranging from 8 to 15.

2.2 Programmer’s Model

The programmer’s model is shown in Figure 2-1 and

consists of 16 x 16-bit working registers (W0 through

W15), 2 x 40-bit accumulators (AccA and AccB),

STATUS register (SR), Data Table Page register

(TBLPAG), Program Space Visibility Page register

(PSVPAG), DO and REPEAT registers (DOSTART,

DOEND, DCOUNT and RCOUNT) and Program

Counter (PC). The working registers can act as data,

address or offset registers. All registers are memory

mapped. W0 acts as the W register for file register

addressing.

Some of these registers have a shadow register asso-

ciated with each of them, as shown in Figure 2-1. The

shadow register is used as a temporary holding register

and can transfer its contents to or from its host register

upon the occurrence of an event. None of the shadow

registers are accessible directly. The following rules

apply for transfer of registers into and out of shadows.

•PUSH.S and POP.S

W0, W1, W2, W3, SR (DC, N, OV, Z and C bits

only) are transferred.

•DO instruction

DOSTART, DOEND, DCOUNT shadows are

pushed on loop start, and popped on loop end.

When a byte operation is performed on a working reg-

ister, only the Least Significant Byte of the target regis-

ter is affected. However, a benefit of memory mapped

working registers is that both the Least and Most Sig-

nificant Bytes can be manipulated through byte wide

data memory space accesses.

2.2.1 SOFTWARE STACK POINTER/

FRAME POINTER

The dsPIC® devices contain a software stack. W15 is

the dedicated software Stack Pointer (SP), and will be

automatically modified by exception processing and

subroutine calls and returns. However, W15 can be ref-

erenced by any instruction in the same manner as all

other W registers. This simplifies the reading, writing

and manipulation of the stack pointer (e.g., creating

stack frames).

W15 is initialized to 0x0800 during a Reset. The user

may reprogram the SP during initialization to any

location within data space.

W14 has been dedicated as a stack frame pointer as

defined by the LNK and ULNK instructions. However,

W14 can be referenced by any instruction in the same

manner as all other W registers.

2.2.2 STATUS REGISTER

The dsPIC core has a 16-bit STATUS register (SR), the

LS Byte of which is referred to as the SR Low byte

(SRL) and the MS Byte as the SR High byte (SRH).

See Figure 2-1 for SR layout.

SRL contains all the MCU ALU operation status flags

(including the Z bit), as well as the CPU Interrupt Prior-

ity Level status bits, IPL<2:0> and the Repeat Active

status bit, RA. During exception processing, SRL is

concatenated with the MS Byte of the PC to form a

complete word value which is then stacked.

The upper byte of the STATUS register contains the

DSP Adder/Subtracter status bits, the DO Loop Active

bit (DA) and the Digit Carry (DC) status bit.

2.2.3 PROGRAM COUNTER

The program counter is 23-bits wide; bit 0 is always

clear. Therefore, the PC can address up to 4M

instruction words.

Note: In order to protect against misaligned

stack accesses, W15<0> is always clear.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 15

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 2-1: PROGRAMMER’S MODEL

TABPAG

PC22 PC0

7 0

D0D15

Program Counter

Data Table Page Address

Status Register

Working Registers

DSP Operand

Registers

W10

W11

W12/DSP Offset

W13/DSP Write Back

W14/Frame Pointer

W15/Stack Pointer

DSP Address

Registers

AD39 AD0AD31

DSP

Accumulators

AccA

AccB

PSVPAG

7 0

Program Space Visibility Page Address

OA OB SA SB

RCOUNT

15 0

REPEAT Loop Counter

DCOUNT

15 0

DO Loop Counter

DOSTART

22 0

DO Loop Start Address

IPL2 IPL1

SPLIM Stack Pointer Limit Register

AD15

SRL

PUSH.S Shadow

DO Shadow

OAB SAB

15 0

Core Configuration Register

Legend

CORCON

DA DC RA N

TBLPAG

PSVPAG

IPL0 OV

W0/WREG

SRH

DO Loop End Address

DOEND

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 16 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

2.3 Divide Support

The dsPIC devices feature a 16/16-bit signed fractional

divide operation, as well as 32/16-bit and 16/16-bit

signed and unsigned integer divide operations, in the

form of single instruction iterative divides. The following

instructions and data sizes are supported:

1. DIVF - 16/16 signed fractional divide

2. DIV.sd - 32/16 signed divide

3. DIV.ud - 32/16 unsigned divide

4. DIV.sw - 16/16 signed divide

5. DIV.uw - 16/16 unsigned divide

The 16/16 divides are similar to the 32/16 (same number

of iterations), but the dividend is either zero-extended or

sign-extended during the first iteration.

The divide instructions must be executed within a

REPEAT loop. Any other form of execution (e.g., a

series of discrete divide instructions) will not function

correctly because the instruction flow depends on

RCOUNT. The divide instruction does not automatically

set up the RCOUNT value and it must, therefore, be

explicitly and correctly specified in the REPEAT instruc-

tion as shown in Table 2-1 (REPEAT will execute the tar-

get instruction {operand value+1} times). The REPEAT

loop count must be setup for 18 iterations of the DIV/

DIVF instruction. Thus, a complete divide operation

requires 19 cycles.

TABLE 2-1: DIVIDE INSTRUCTIONS

Note: The divide flow is interruptible. However,

the user needs to save the context as

appropriate.

Instruction Function

DIVF Signed fractional divide: Wm/Wn → W0; Rem → W1

DIV.sd Signed divide: (Wm+1:Wm)/Wn → W0; Rem → W1

DIV.sw or

DIV.s

Signed divide: Wm/Wn → W0; Rem → W1

DIV.ud Unsigned divide: (Wm+1:Wm)/Wn → W0; Rem → W1

DIV.uw or

DIV.u

Unsigned divide: Wm/Wn → W0; Rem → W1

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 17

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

2.4 DSP Engine

The DSP engine consists of a high speed 17-bit x

17-bit multiplier, a barrel shifter and a 40-bit adder/

subtracter (with two target accumulators, round and

saturation logic).

The DSP engine also has the capability to perform

inherent accumulator-to-accumulator operations,

which require no additional data. These instructions are

ADD, SUB and NEG.

The dsPIC30F is a single-cycle instruction flow archi-

tecture, threfore, concurrent operation of the DSP

engine with MCU instruction flow is not possible.

However, some MCU ALU and DSP engine resources

may be used concurrently by the same instruction (e.g.,

ED, EDAC).

The DSP engine has various options selected through

various bits in the CPU Core Configuration register

(CORCON), as listed below:

1. Fractional or integer DSP multiply (IF).

2. Signed or unsigned DSP multiply (US).

3. Conventional or convergent rounding (RND).

4. Automatic saturation on/off for AccA (SATA).

5. Automatic saturation on/off for AccB (SATB).

6. Automatic saturation on/off for writes to data

memory (SATDW).

7. Accumulator Saturation mode selection

(ACCSAT).

A block diagram of the DSP engine is shown in

Figure 2-2.

Note: For CORCON layout, see Table 3-3.

TABLE 2-2: DSP INSTRUCTION SUMMARY

Instruction Algebraic Operation ACC WB?

CLR A = 0 Yes

ED A = (x – y)2No

EDAC A = A + (x – y)2No

MAC A = A + (x * y) Yes

MAC A = A + x2No

MOVSAC No change in A Yes

MPY A = x * y No

MPY.N A = – x * y No

MSC A = A – x * y Yes

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 18 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 2-2: DSP ENGINE BLOCK DIAGRAM

Zero Backfill

Sign-Extend

Barrel

Shifter

40-bit Accumulator A

40-bit Accumulator B Round

Logic

X Data Bus

To/From W Array

Adder

Saturate

Negate

16 16

40 40

Y Data Bus

Carry/Borrow Out

Carry/Borrow In

Multiplier/Scaler

17-bit

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 19

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

2.4.1 MULTIPLIER

The 17 x 17-bit multiplier is capable of signed or

unsigned operation and can multiplex its output using a

scaler to support either 1.31 fractional (Q31) or 32-bit

integer results. Unsigned operands are zero-extended

into the 17th bit of the multiplier input value. Signed

operands are sign-extended into the 17th bit of the mul-

tiplier input value. The output of the 17 x 17-bit multi-

plier/scaler is a 33-bit value which is sign-extended to

40 bits. Integer data is inherently represented as a

signed two’s complement value, where the MSB is

defined as a sign bit. Generally speaking, the range of

an N-bit two’s complement integer is -2N-1 to 2N-1 – 1.

For a 16-bit integer, the data range is -32768 (0x8000)

to 32767 (0x7FFF) including ‘0’. For a 32-bit integer,

the data range is -2,147,483,648 (0x8000 0000) to

2,147,483,645 (0x7FFF FFFF).

When the multiplier is configured for fractional multipli-

cation, the data is represented as a two’s complement

fraction, where the MSB is defined as a sign bit and the

radix point is implied to lie just after the sign bit (QX for-

mat). The range of an N-bit two’s complement fraction

with this implied radix point is -1.0 to (1 – 21-N). For a

16-bit fraction, the Q15 data range is -1.0 (0x8000) to

0.999969482 (0x7FFF) including ‘0’ and has a preci-

sion of 3.01518x10-5. In Fractional mode, the 16x16

multiply operation generates a 1.31 product which has

a precision of 4.65661 x 10-10.

The same multiplier is used to support the MCU multi-

ply instructions which include integer 16-bit signed,

unsigned and mixed sign multiplies.

The MUL instruction may be directed to use byte or

word sized operands. Byte operands will direct a 16-bit

result, and word operands will direct a 32-bit result to

the specified register(s) in the W array.

2.4.2 DATA ACCUMULATORS AND

ADDER/SUBTRACTER

The data accumulator consists of a 40-bit adder/

subtracter with automatic sign extension logic. It can

select one of two accumulators (A or B) as its pre-

accumulation source and post-accumulation destina-

tion. For the ADD and LAC instructions, the data to be

accumulated or loaded can be optionally scaled via the

barrel shifter, prior to accumulation.

2.4.2.1 Adder/Subtracter, Overflow and

Saturation

The adder/subtracter is a 40-bit adder with an optional

zero input into one side and either true, or complement

data into the other input. In the case of addition, the

carry/borrow input is active high and the other input is

true data (not complemented), whereas in the case of

subtraction, the carry/borrow input is active low and the

other input is complemented. The adder/subtracter

generates overflow status bits SA/SB and OA/OB,

which are latched and reflected in the STATUS register:

• Overflow from bit 39: this is a catastrophic

overflow in which the sign of the accumulator is

destroyed.

• Overflow into guard bits 32 through 39: this is a

recoverable overflow. This bit is set whenever all

the guard bits bits are not identical to each other.

The adder has an additional saturation block which

controls accumulator data saturation, if selected. It

uses the result of the adder, the overflow status bits

described above, and the SATA/B (CORCON<7:6>)

and ACCSAT (CORCON<4>) mode control bits to

determine when and to what value to saturate.

Six Status register bits have been provided to support

saturation and overflow; they are:

1. OA:

AccA overflowed into guard bits

2. OB:

AccB overflowed into guard bits

3. SA:

AccA saturated (bit 31 overflow and saturation)

AccA overflowed into guard bits and saturated

(bit 39 overflow and saturation)

4. SB:

AccB saturated (bit 31 overflow and saturation)

AccB overflowed into guard bits and saturated

(bit 39 overflow and saturation)

5. OAB:

Logical OR of OA and OB

6. SAB:

Logical OR of SA and SB

The OA and OB bits are modified each time data

passes through the adder/subtracter. When set, they

indicate that the most recent operation has overflowed

into the accumulator guard bits (bits 32 through 39).

The OA and OB bits can also optionally generate an

arithmetic warning trap when set and the correspond-

ing overflow trap flag enable bit (OVATEN, OVBTEN) in

the INTCON1 register (refer to Section 8.0) is set. This

allows the user to take immediate action, for example,

to correct system gain.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 20 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

The SA and SB bits are modified each time data

passes through the adder/subtracter but can only be

cleared by the user. When set, they indicate that the

accumulator has overflowed its maximum range (bit 31

for 32-bit saturation, or bit 39 for 40-bit saturation) and

will be saturated (if saturation is enabled). When satu-

ration is not enabled, SA and SB default to bit 39 over-

flow and thus indicate that a catastrophic overflow has

occurred. If the COVTE bit in the INTCON1 register is

set, SA and SB bits will generate an arithmetic warning

trap when saturation is disabled.

The overflow and saturation status bits can optionally

be viewed in the STATUS register (SR) as the logical

OR of OA and OB (in bit OAB) and the logical OR of SA

and SB (in bit SAB). This allows programmers to check

one bit in the STATUS register to determine if either

accumulator has overflowed, or one bit to determine if

either accumulator has saturated. This would be useful

for complex number arithmetic which typically uses

both the accumulators.

The device supports three saturation and overflow

modes:

1. Bit 39 Overflow and Saturation:

When bit 39 overflow and saturation occurs, the

saturation logic loads the maximally positive 9.31

(0x7FFFFFFFFF), or maximally negative 9.31

value (0x8000000000) into the target accumula-

tor. The SA or SB bit is set and remains set until

cleared by the user. This is referred to as ‘super

saturation’ and provides protection against erro-

neous data, or unexpected algorithm problems

(e.g., gain calculations).

2. Bit 31 Overflow and Saturation:

When bit 31 overflow and saturation occurs, the

saturation logic then loads the maximally posi-

tive 1.31 value (0x007FFFFFFF), or maximally

negative 1.31 value (0x0080000000) into the

target accumulator. The SA or SB bit is set and

remains set until cleared by the user. When this

Saturation mode is in effect, the guard bits are

not used (so the OA, OB or OAB bits are never

set).

3. Bit 39 Catastrophic Overflow:

The bit 39 overflow status bit from the adder is

used to set the SA or SB bit which remain set

until cleared by the user. No saturation operation

is performed and the accumulator is allowed to

overflow (destroying its sign). If the COVTE bit in

the INTCON1 register is set, a catastrophic

overflow can initiate a trap exception.

2.4.2.2 Accumulator ‘Write Back’

The MAC class of instructions (with the exception of

MPY, MPY.N, ED and EDAC) can optionally write a

rounded version of the high word (bits 31 through 16)

of the accumulator that is not targeted by the instruction

into data space memory. The write is performed across

the X bus into combined X and Y address space. The

following Addressing modes are supported:

1. W13, Register Direct:

The rounded contents of the non-target

accumulator are written into W13 as a 1.15

fraction.

2. [W13]+=2, Register Indirect with Post-Increment:

The rounded contents of the non-target accumu-

lator are written into the address pointed to by

W13 as a 1.15 fraction. W13 is then

incremented by 2 (for a word write).

2.4.2.3 Round Logic

The round logic is a combinational block which per-

forms a conventional (biased) or convergent (unbi-

ased) round function during an accumulator write

(store). The Round mode is determined by the state of

the RND bit in the CORCON register. It generates a 16-

bit, 1.15 data value which is passed to the data space

write saturation logic. If rounding is not indicated by the

instruction, a truncated 1.15 data value is stored and

the LS Word is simply discarded.

Conventional rounding takes bit 15 of the accumulator,

zero-extends it and adds it to the ACCxH word (bits 16

through 31 of the accumulator). If the ACCxL word

(bits 0 through 15 of the accumulator) is between

0x8000 and 0xFFFF (0x8000 included), ACCxH is

incremented. If ACCxL is between 0x0000 and 0x7FFF,

ACCxH is left unchanged. A consequence of this algo-

rithm is that over a succession of random rounding

operations, the value will tend to be biased slightly

positive.

Convergent (or unbiased) rounding operates in the

same manner as conventional rounding, except when

ACCxL equals 0x8000. If this is the case, the LS bit

(bit 16 of the accumulator) of ACCxH is examined. If it

is ‘1’, ACCxH is incremented. If it is ‘0’, ACCxH is not

modified. Assuming that bit 16 is effectively random in

nature, this scheme will remove any rounding bias that

may accumulate.

The SAC and SAC.R instructions store either a trun-

cated (SAC) or rounded (SAC.R) version of the contents

of the target accumulator to data memory via the X bus

(subject to data saturation, see Section 2.4.2.4). Note

that for the MAC class of instructions, the accumulator

write back operation will function in the same manner,

addressing combined MCU (X and Y) data space

though the X bus. For this class of instructions, the data

is always subject to rounding.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 21

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

2.4.2.4 Data Space Write Saturation

In addition to adder/subtracter saturation, writes to data

space may also be saturated but without affecting the

contents of the source accumulator. The data space

write saturation logic block accepts a 16-bit, 1.15 frac-

tional value from the round logic block as its input,

together with overflow status from the original source

(accumulator) and the 16-bit round adder. These are

combined and used to select the appropriate 1.15

fractional value as output to write to data space

memory.

If the SATDW bit in the CORCON register is set, data

(after rounding or truncation) is tested for overflow and

adjusted accordingly, For input data greater than

0x007FFF, data written to memory is forced to the max-

imum positive 1.15 value, 0x7FFF. For input data less

than 0xFF8000, data written to memory is forced to the

maximum negative 1.15 value, 0x8000. The MS bit of

the source (bit 39) is used to determine the sign of the

operand being tested.

If the SATDW bit in the CORCON register is not set, the

input data is always passed through unmodified under

all conditions.

2.4.3 BARREL SHIFTER

The barrel shifter is capable of performing up to 16-bit

arithmetic or logic right shifts, or up to 16-bit left shifts

in a single cycle. The source can be either of the two

DSP accumulators, or the X bus (to support multi-bit

shifts of register or memory data).

The shifter requires a signed binary value to determine

both the magnitude (number of bits) and direction of the

shift operation. A positive value will shift the operand

right. A negative value will shift the operand left. A

value of ‘0’ will not modify the operand.

The barrel shifter is 40-bits wide, thereby obtaining a

40-bit result for DSP shift operations and a 16-bit result

for MCU shift operations. Data from the X bus is pre-

sented to the barrel shifter between bit positions 16 to

31 for right shifts, and bit positions 0 to 16 for left shifts.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 22 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 23

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

3.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION

3.1 Program Address Space

The program address space is 4M instruction words.

The program space memory map for the dsPI30F2011/

2012 is shown in Figure 3-1. The program space

memory map for the dsPI30F3012/3013 is shown in

Figure 3-2.

Program memory is addressable by a 24-bit value from

either the 23-bit PC, table instruction Effective Address

(EA), or data space EA, when program space is

mapped into data space as defined by Table 3-1. Note

that the program space address is incremented by two

between successive program words in order to provide

compatibility with data space addressing.

User program space access is restricted to the lower

4M instruction word address range (0x000000 to

0x7FFFFE) for all accesses other than TBLRD/TBLWT,

which use TBLPAG<7> to determine user or configura-

tion space access. In Table 3-1, Program Space

Address Construction, bit 23 allows access to the

Device ID, the User ID and the configuration bits.

Otherwise, bit 23 is always clear.

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 24 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 3-1: dsPIC30F2011/2012

PROGRAM SPACE

MEMORY MAP

FIGURE 3-2: dsPIC30F3012/3013

PROGRAM SPACE

MEMORY MAP

Reset - Target Address

User Memory

Space

000000

00007E

000002

000080

Device Configuration

User Flash

Program Memory

002000

001FFE

Configuration Memory

Space

(4K instructions)

800000

F80000

Registers F8000E

F80010

DEVID (2)

FEFFFE

FF0000

FFFFFE

Reserved

F7FFFE

Reserved

(Read ‘0’s)

8005FE

800600

UNITID (32 instr.)

Vector Tables

8005BE

8005C0

Reset - GOTO Instruction

000004

Reserved

7FFFFE

Reserved

000100

0000FE

000084

Alternate Vector Table

Reserved

Interrupt Vector Table

Reset - Target Address

User Memory

Space

000000

00007E

000002

000080

Device Configuration

User Flash

Program Memory

004000

003FFE

Configuration Memory

Space

Data EEPROM

(8K instructions)

(1 Kbyte)

800000

F80000

Registers F8000E

F80010

DEVID (2)

FEFFFE

FF0000

FFFFFE

Reserved

F7FFFE

Reserved

7FFC00

7FFBFE

(Read ‘0’s)

8005FE

800600

UNITID (32 instr.)

Vector Tables

8005BE

8005C0

Reset - GOTO Instruction

000004

Reserved

7FFFFE

Reserved

000100

0000FE

000084

Alternate Vector Table

Reserved

Interrupt Vector Table

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 25

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 3-1: PROGRAM SPACE ADDRESS CONSTRUCTION

FIGURE 3-3: DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM SPACE ADDRESS GENERATION

Access Type Access

Space

Program Space Address

<23> <22:16> <15> <14:1> <0>

Instruction Access User 0PC<22:1> 0

TBLRD/TBLWT User

(TBLPAG<7> = 0)

TBLPAG<7:0> Data EA<15:0>

TBLRD/TBLWT Configuration

(TBLPAG<7> = 1)

TBLPAG<7:0> Data EA<15:0>

Program Space Visibility User 0PSVPAG<7:0> Data EA<14:0>

0Program Counter

23 bits

PSVPAG Reg

8 bits

15 bits

Program

Using

Select

TBLPAG Reg

8 bits

16 bits

Using

Byte

24-bit EA

1/0

Select

User/

Configuration

Table

Instruction

Program

Space

Counter

Using

Space

Select

Visibility

Note: Program space visibility cannot be used to access bits <23:16> of a word in program memory.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 26 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

3.1.1 DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM

MEMORY USING TABLE

INSTRUCTIONS

This architecture fetches 24-bit wide program memory.

Consequently, instructions are always aligned.

However, as the architecture is modified Harvard, data

can also be present in program space.

There are two methods by which program space can

be accessed: via special table instructions, or through

the remapping of a 16K word program space page into

the upper half of data space (see Section 3.1.2). The

TBLRDL and TBLWTL instructions offer a direct method

of reading or writing the LS Word of any address within

program space, without going through data space. The

TBLRDH and TBLWTH instructions are the only method

whereby the upper 8 bits of a program space word can

be accessed as data.

The PC is incremented by two for each successive

24-bit program word. This allows program memory

addresses to directly map to data space addresses.

Program memory can thus be regarded as two 16-bit

word wide address spaces, residing side by side, each

with the same address range. TBLRDL and TBLWTL

access the space which contains the LS Data Word,

and TBLRDH and TBLWTH access the space which

contains the MS Data Byte.

Figure 3-3 shows how the EA is created for table oper-

ations and data space accesses (PSV = 1). Here,

P<23:0> refers to a program space word, whereas

D<15:0> refers to a data space word.

A set of table instructions are provided to move byte or

word sized data to and from program space.

1. TBLRDL: Table Read Low

Word: Read the LS Word of the program address;

P<15:0> maps to D<15:0>.

Byte: Read one of the LS Bytes of the program

address;

P<7:0> maps to the destination byte when byte

select = 0;

P<15:8> maps to the destination byte when byte

select = 1.

2. TBLWTL: Table Write Low (refer to Section 5.0

for details on Flash Programming)

3. TBLRDH: Table Read High

Word: Read the MS Word of the program address;

P<23:16> maps to D<7:0>; D<15:8> will always

be = 0.

Byte: Read one of the MS Bytes of the program

address;

P<23:16> maps to the destination byte when

byte select = 0;

The destination byte will always be = 0 when

byte select = 1.

4. TBLWTH: Table Write High (refer to Section 5.0

for details on Flash Programming)

FIGURE 3-4: PROGRAM DATA TABLE ACCESS (LS WORD)

PC Address

0x000000

0x000002

0x000004

0x000006

00000000

Program Memory

‘Phantom’ Byte

(read as ‘0’)

TBLRDL.W

TBLRDL.B (Wn<0> = 1)

TBLRDL.B (Wn<0> = 0)

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 27

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 3-5: PROGRAM DATA TABLE ACCESS (MS BYTE)

3.1.2 DATA ACCESS FROM PROGRAM

MEMORY USING PROGRAM SPACE

VISIBILITY

The upper 32 Kbytes of data space may optionally be

mapped into any 16K word program space page. This

provides transparent access of stored constant data

from X data space without the need to use special

instructions (i.e., TBLRDL/H, TBLWTL/H instructions).

Program space access through the data space occurs

if the MS bit of the data space EA is set and program

space visibility is enabled by setting the PSV bit in the

Core Control register (CORCON). The functions of

CORCON are discussed in Section 2.4, DSP Engine.

Data accesses to this area add an additional cycle to

the instruction being executed, since two program

memory fetches are required.

Note that the upper half of addressable data space is

always part of the X data space. Therefore, when a

DSP operation uses program space mapping to access

this memory region, Y data space should typically con-

tain state (variable) data for DSP operations, whereas

X data space should typically contain coefficient

(constant) data.

Although each data space address, 0x8000 and higher,

maps directly into a corresponding program memory

address (see Figure 3-6), only the lower 16 bits of the

24-bit program word are used to contain the data. The

upper 8 bits should be programmed to force an illegal

instruction to maintain machine robustness. Refer to

the Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030) for

details on instruction encoding.

Note that by incrementing the PC by 2 for each

program memory word, the LS 15 bits of data space

addresses directly map to the LS 15 bits in the corre-

sponding program space addresses. The remaining

bits are provided by the Program Space Visibility Page

For instructions that use PSV which are executed

outside a REPEAT loop:

• The following instructions will require one

instruction cycle in addition to the specified

execution time:

-MAC class of instructions with data operand

pre-fetch

-MOV instructions

-MOV.D instructions

• All other instructions will require two instruction

cycles in addition to the specified execution time

of the instruction.

For instructions that use PSV which are executed

inside a REPEAT loop:

• The following instances will require two instruction

cycles in addition to the specified execution time

of the instruction:

- Execution in the first iteration

- Execution in the last iteration

- Execution prior to exiting the loop due to an

interrupt

- Execution upon re-entering the loop after an

interrupt is serviced

• Any other iteration of the REPEAT loop will allow

the instruction accessing data, using PSV, to

execute in a single cycle.

PC Address

0x000000

0x000002

0x000004

0x000006

00000000

Program Memory

‘Phantom’ Byte

(read as ‘0’)

TBLRDH.W

TBLRDH.B (Wn<0> = 1)

TBLRDH.B (Wn<0> = 0)

Note: PSV access is temporarily disabled during

table reads/writes.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 28 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 3-6: DATA SPACE WINDOW INTO PROGRAM SPACE OPERATION

23 15 0

PSVPAG(1)

EA<15> =

EA<15> = 1

Data

Space

Data Space Program Space

15 23

0x0000

0x8000

0xFFFF

0x00

0x001FFF

Data Read

Upper Half of Data

Space is Mapped

into Program Space

0x001200

Address

Concatenation

BSET CORCON,#2 ; Set PSV bit

MOV #0x0, W0 ; Set PSVPAG register

MOV W0, PSVPAG

MOV 0x9200, W0 ; Access program memory location

; using a data space access

Note: PSVPAG is an 8-bit register, containing bits <22:15> of the program space address.

0x000000

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 29

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

3.2 Data Address Space

The core has two data spaces. The data spaces can be

considered either separate (for some DSP instruc-

tions), or as one unified linear address range (for MCU

instructions). The data spaces are accessed using two

Address Generation Units (AGUs) and separate data

paths.

3.2.1 DATA SPACE MEMORY MAP

The data space memory is split into two blocks, X and

Y data space. A key element of this architecture is that

Y space is a subset of X space, and is fully contained

within X space. In order to provide an apparent linear

addressing space, X and Y spaces have contiguous

addresses.

When executing any instruction other than one of the

MAC class of instructions, the X block consists of the 64-

Kbyte data address space (including all Y addresses).

When executing one of the MAC class of instructions,

the X block consists of the 64-Kbyte data address

space excluding the Y address block (for data reads

only). In other words, all other instructions regard the

entire data memory as one composite address space.

The MAC class instructions extract the Y address space

from data space and address it using EAs sourced from

W10 and W11. The remaining X data space is

addressed using W8 and W9. Both address spaces are

concurrently accessed only with the MAC class

instructions.

The data space memory map for the dsPIC30F2011

and dsPIC30F2012 is shown in Figure 3-7. The data

space memory map for the dsPIC30F3012 and

dsPIC30F3013 is shown in Figure 3-8.

FIGURE 3-7: dsPIC30F2011/2012 DATA SPACE MEMORY MAP

0x0000

0x07FE

0x09FE

0xFFFE

LS Byte

Address

16 bits

LSBMSB

MS Byte

Address

0x0001

0x07FF

0x09FF

0xFFFF

0x8001 0x8000

Optionally

Mapped

into Program

Memory

0x0BFF 0x0BFE

0x0C000x0C01

0x0801 0x0800

0x0A01

0x0A00

Near

Data

0x1FFE 0x1FFF

2 Kbyte

SFR Space

1 Kbyte

SRAM Space

8 Kbyte

Space

X Data

Unimplemented (X)

SFR

Space

X Data RAM (X)

Y Data RAM (Y)

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 30 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 3-8: dsPIC30F3012/3013 DATA SPACE MEMORY MAP

0x0000

0x07FE

0x0BFE

0xFFFE

LS Byte

Address

16 bits

LSBMSB

MS Byte

Address

0x0001

0x07FF

0x0BFF

0xFFFF

0x8001 0x8000

Optionally

Mapped

into Program

Memory

0x0FFF 0x0FFE

0x10000x1001

0x0801 0x0800

0x0C01

0x0C00

Near

Data

0x1FFE 0x1FFF

2 Kbyte

SFR Space

2 Kbyte

SRAM Space

8 Kbyte

Space

X Data

Unimplemented (X)

SFR Space

X Data RAM (X)

Y Data RAM (Y)

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 31

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 3-9: DATA SPACE FOR MCU AND DSP (MAC CLASS) INSTRUCTIONS EXAMPLE

SFR SPACE

(Y SPACE)

X SPACE

SFR SPACE

UNUSED

X SPACE

Y SPACE

UNUSED

Non-MAC Class Ops (Read/Write) MAC Class Ops (Read)

Indirect EA using any W Indirect EA using W8, W9 Indirect EA using W10, W11

MAC Class Ops (Write)

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 32 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

3.2.2 DATA SPACES

The X data space is used by all instructions and sup-

ports all Addressing modes. There are separate read

and write data buses. The X read data bus is the return

data path for all instructions that view data space as

combined X and Y address space. It is also the X

address space data path for the dual operand read

instructions (MAC class). The X write data bus is the

only write path to data space for all instructions.

The X data space also supports modulo addressing for

all instructions, subject to Addressing mode restric-

tions. Bit-reversed addressing is only supported for

writes to X data space.

The Y data space is used in concert with the X data

space by the MAC class of instructions (CLR, ED,

EDAC, MAC, MOVSAC, MPY, MPY.N and MSC) to

provide two concurrent data read paths. No writes

occur across the Y bus. This class of instructions dedi-

cates two W register pointers, W10 and W11, to always

address Y data space, independent of X data space,

whereas W8 and W9 always address X data space.

Note that during accumulator write back, the data

address space is considered a combination of X and Y

data spaces, so the write occurs across the X bus.

Consequently, the write can be to any address in the

entire data space.

The Y data space can only be used for the data pre-

fetch operation associated with the MAC class of

instructions. It also supports modulo addressing for

automated circular buffers. Of course, all other instruc-

tions can access the Y data address space through the

X data path as part of the composite linear space.

The boundary between the X and Y data spaces is

defined as shown in Figure 3-8 and is not user pro-

grammable. Should an EA point to data outside its own

assigned address space, or to a location outside phys-

ical memory, an all zero word/byte will be returned. For

example, although Y address space is visible by all

non-MAC instructions using any Addressing mode, an

attempt by a MAC instruction to fetch data from that

space using W8 or W9 (X space pointers) will return

0x0000.

TABLE 3-2: EFFECT OF INVALID

MEMORY ACCESSES

All effective addresses are 16 bits wide and point to

bytes within the data space. Therefore, the data space

address range is 64 Kbytes or 32K words.

3.2.3 DATA SPACE WIDTH

The core data width is 16 bits. All internal registers are

organized as 16-bit wide words. Data space memory is

organized in byte addressable, 16-bit wide blocks.

3.2.4 DATA ALIGNMENT

To help maintain backward compatibility with

PICmicro® devices and improve data space memory

usage efficiency, the dsPIC30F instruction set supports

both word and byte operations. Data is aligned in data

memory and registers as words, but all data space EAs

resolve to bytes. Data byte reads will read the complete

word which contains the byte, using the LS bit of any

EA to determine which byte to select. The selected byte

is placed onto the LS Byte of the X data path (no byte

accesses are possible from the Y data path as the MAC

class of instruction can only fetch words). That is, data

memory and registers are organized as two parallel

byte wide entities with shared (word) address decode

but separate write lines. Data byte writes only write to

the corresponding side of the array or register which

matches the byte address.

As a consequence of this byte accessibility, all effective

address calculations (including those generated by the

DSP operations which are restricted to word sized

data) are internally scaled to step through word aligned

memory. For example, the core would recognize that

Post-Modified Register Indirect Addressing mode

[Ws++] will result in a value of Ws+1 for byte operations

and Ws+2 for word operations.

All word accesses must be aligned to an even address.

Misaligned word data fetches are not supported so

care must be taken when mixing byte and word opera-

tions, or translating from 8-bit MCU code. Should a mis-

aligned read or write be attempted, an address error

trap will be generated. If the error occurred on a read,

the instruction underway is completed, whereas if it

occurred on a write, the instruction will be executed but

the write will not occur. In either case, a trap will then

be executed, allowing the system and/or user to exam-

ine the machine state prior to execution of the address

fault.

FIGURE 3-10: DATA ALIGNMENT

Attempted Operation Data Returned

EA = an unimplemented address 0x0000

W8 or W9 used to access Y data

space in a MAC instruction

0x0000

W10 or W11 used to access X

data space in a MAC instruction

0x0000

15 8 7 0

0001

0003

0005

0000

0002

0004

Byte1 Byte 0

Byte3 Byte 2

Byte5 Byte 4

LS ByteMS Byte

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 33

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

All byte loads into any W register are loaded into the

LS Byte. The MSB is not modified.

A sign-extend (SE) instruction is provided to allow

users to translate 8-bit signed data to 16-bit signed

values. Alternatively, for 16-bit unsigned data, users

can clear the MSB of any W register by executing a

zero-extend (ZE) instruction on the appropriate

address.

Although most instructions are capable of operating on

word or byte data sizes, it should be noted that some

instructions, including the DSP instructions, operate

only on words.

3.2.5 NEAR DATA SPACE

An 8-Kbyte ‘near’ data space is reserved in X address

memory space between 0x0000 and 0x1FFF, which is

directly addressable via a 13-bit absolute address field

within all memory direct instructions. The remaining X

address space and all of the Y address space is

addressable indirectly. Additionally, the whole of X data

space is addressable using MOV instructions, which

support memory direct addressing with a 16-bit

address field.

3.2.6 SOFTWARE STACK

The dsPIC devices contain a software stack. W15 is

used as the stack pointer.

The stack pointer always points to the first available

free word and grows from lower addresses towards

higher addresses. It pre-decrements for stack pops

and post-increments for stack pushes as shown in

Figure 3-11. Note that for a PC push during any CALL

instruction, the MSB of the PC is zero-extended before

the push, ensuring that the MSB is always clear.

There is a Stack Pointer Limit register (SPLIM) associ-

ated with the stack pointer. SPLIM is uninitialized at

Reset. As is the case for the stack pointer, SPLIM<0>

is forced to ‘0’ because all stack operations must be

word aligned. Whenever an effective address (EA) is

generated using W15 as a source or destination

pointer, the address thus generated is compared with

the value in SPLIM. If the contents of the Stack Pointer

(W15) and the SPLIM register are equal and a push

operation is performed, a Stack Error Trap will not

occur. The Stack Error Trap will occur on a subsequent

push operation. Thus, for example, if it is desirable to

cause a Stack Error Trap when the stack grows beyond

address 0x2000 in RAM, initialize the SPLIM with the

value, 0x1FFE.

Similarly, a stack pointer underflow (stack error) trap is

generated when the stack pointer address is found to

FIGURE 3-11: CALL STACK FRAME

Note: A PC push during exception processing

will concatenate the SRL register to the

MSB of the PC prior to the push.

PC<15:0>

000000000

015

W15 (before CALL)

W15 (after CALL)

Stack Grows Towards

Higher Address

0x0000

PC<22:16>

POP : [--W15]

PUSH : [W15++]

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 34 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 3-3: CORE REGISTER MAP

SFR Name Address

(Home) Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

W0 0000 W0/WREG 0000 0000 0000 0000

W1 0002 W1 0000 0000 0000 0000

W2 0004 W2 0000 0000 0000 0000

W3 0006 W3 0000 0000 0000 0000

W4 0008 W4 0000 0000 0000 0000

W5 000A W5 0000 0000 0000 0000

W6 000C W6 0000 0000 0000 0000

W7 000E W7 0000 0000 0000 0000

W8 0010 W8 0000 0000 0000 0000

W9 0012 W9 0000 0000 0000 0000

W10 0014 W10 0000 0000 0000 0000

W11 0016 W11 0000 0000 0000 0000

W12 0018 W12 0000 0000 0000 0000

W13 001A W13 0000 0000 0000 0000

W14 001C W14 0000 0000 0000 0000

W15 001E W15 0000 1000 0000 0000

SPLIM 0020 SPLIM 0000 0000 0000 0000

ACCAL 0022 ACCAL 0000 0000 0000 0000

ACCAH 0024 ACCAH 0000 0000 0000 0000

ACCAU 0026 Sign-Extension (ACCA<39>) ACCAU 0000 0000 0000 0000

ACCBL 0028 ACCBL 0000 0000 0000 0000

ACCBH 002A ACCBH 0000 0000 0000 0000

ACCBU 002C Sign-Extension (ACCB<39>) ACCBU 0000 0000 0000 0000

PCL 002E PCL 0000 0000 0000 0000

PCH 0030 — — — — — — — — — PCH 0000 0000 0000 0000

TBLPAG 0032 — — — — — — — —TBLPAG0000 0000 0000 0000

PSVPAG 0034 — — — — — — — — PSVPAG 0000 0000 0000 0000

RCOUNT 0036 RCOUNT uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

DCOUNT 0038 DCOUNT uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

DOSTARTL 003A DOSTARTL 0uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0

DOSTARTH 003C — — — — — — — — — DOSTARTH 0000 0000 0uuu uuuu

DOENDL 003E DOENDL 0uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0

DOENDH 0040 — — — — — — — — — DOENDH 0000 0000 0uuu uuuu

SR 0042 OA OB SA SB OAB SAB DA DC IPL2 IPL1 IPL0 RA N OV Z C 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 35

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

CORCON 0044 — — — US EDT DL2 DL1 DL0 SATA SATB SATDW ACCSAT IPL3 PSV RND IF 0000 0000 0010 0000

MODCON 0046 XMODEN YMODEN —— BWM<3:0> YWM<3:0> XWM<3:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

XMODSRT 0048 XS<15:1> 0 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0

XMODEND 004A XE<15:1> 1 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu1

YMODSRT 004C YS<15:1> 0 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu0

YMODEND 004E YE<15:1> 1 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuu1

XBREV 0050 BREN XB<14:0> uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

DISICNT 0052 —— DISICNT<13:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

TABLE 3-3: CORE REGISTER MAP (CONTINUED)

SFR Name Address

(Home) Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 36 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 37

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

4.0 ADDRESS GENERATOR UNITS

The dsPIC core contains two independent address

generator units: the X AGU and Y AGU. The Y AGU

supports word sized data reads for the DSP MAC class

of instructions only. The dsPIC AGUs support three

types of data addressing:

• Linear Addressing

• Modulo (Circular) Addressing

• Bit-Reversed Addressing

Linear and Modulo Data Addressing modes can be

applied to data space or program space. Bit-reversed

addressing is only applicable to data space addresses.

4.1 Instruction Addressing Modes

The addressing modes in Table 4-1 form the basis of

the addressing modes optimized to support the specific

features of individual instructions. The addressing

modes provided in the MAC class of instructions are

somewhat different from those in the other instruction

types.

4.1.1 FILE REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS

Most file register instructions use a 13-bit address field

(f) to directly address data present in the first 8192

bytes of data memory (near data space). Most file

which is denoted as WREG in these instructions. The

destination is typically either the same file register, or

WREG (with the exception of the MUL instruction),

which writes the result to a register or register pair. The

MOV instruction allows additional flexibility and can

access the entire data space during file register

operation.

4.1.2 MCU INSTRUCTIONS

The three-operand MCU instructions are of the form:

Operand 3 = Operand 1 <function> Operand 2

where Operand 1 is always a working register (i.e., the

addressing mode can only be register direct), which is

referred to as Wb. Operand 2 can be a W register,

fetched from data memory, or a 5-bit literal. The result

location can be either a W register or an address

location. The following addressing modes are

supported by MCU instructions:

• Register Direct

• Register Indirect

• Register Indirect Post-modified

• Register Indirect Pre-modified

• 5-bit or 10-bit Literal

TABLE 4-1: FUNDAMENTAL ADDRESSING MODES SUPPORTED

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

Note: Not all instructions support all the address-

ing modes given above. Individual

instructions may support different subsets

of these addressing modes.

Addressing Mode Description

File Register Direct The address of the File register is specified explicitly.

decremented) by a constant value.

to form the EA.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 38 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

4.1.3 MOVE AND ACCUMULATOR

INSTRUCTIONS

Move instructions and the DSP accumulator class of

instructions provide a greater degree of addressing

flexibility than other instructions. In addition to the

addressing modes supported by most MCU instruc-

tions, move and accumulator instructions also support

mode, also referred to as Register Indexed mode.

In summary, the following addressing modes are

supported by move and accumulator instructions:

• Register Direct

• Register Indirect

• Register Indirect Post-modified

• Register Indirect Pre-modified

• Register Indirect with Register Offset (Indexed)

• Register Indirect with Literal Offset

• 8-bit Literal

• 16-bit Literal

4.1.4 MAC INSTRUCTIONS

The dual source operand DSP instructions (CLR, ED,

EDAC, MAC, MPY, MPY.N, MOVSAC and MSC), also

referred to as MAC instructions, utilize a simplified set of

addressing modes to allow the user to effectively

manipulate the data pointers through register indirect

tables.

The 2 source operand pre-fetch registers must be a

member of the set {W8, W9, W10, W11}. For data

reads, W8 and W9 will always be directed to the X

RAGU and W10 and W11 will always be directed to the

Y AGU. The effective addresses generated (before and

after modification) must, therefore, be valid addresses

within X data space for W8 and W9 and Y data space

for W10 and W11.

In summary, the following addressing modes are

supported by the MAC class of instructions:

• Register Indirect

• Register Indirect Post-modified by 2

• Register Indirect Post-modified by 4

• Register Indirect Post-modified by 6

• Register Indirect with Register Offset (Indexed)

4.1.5 OTHER INSTRUCTIONS

Besides the various addressing modes outlined above,

some instructions use literal constants of various sizes.

For example, BRA (branch) instructions use 16-bit

signed literals to specify the branch destination directly,

whereas the DISI instruction uses a 14-bit unsigned

literal field. In some instructions, such as ADD Acc, the

source of an operand or result is implied by the opcode

itself. Certain operations, such as NOP, do not have any

operands.

4.2 Modulo Addressing

Modulo addressing is a method of providing an auto-

mated means to support circular data buffers using

hardware. The objective is to remove the need for soft-

ware to perform data address boundary checks when

executing tightly looped code, as is typical in many

DSP algorithms.

Modulo addressing can operate in either data or pro-

gram space (since the data pointer mechanism is

essentially the same for both). One circular buffer can

be supported in each of the X (which also provides the

pointers into program space) and Y data spaces. Mod-

ulo addressing can operate on any W register pointer.

However, it is not advisable to use W14 or W15 for mod-

ulo addressing since these two registers are used as

the stack frame pointer and stack pointer, respectively.

In general, any particular circular buffer can only be

configured to operate in one direction, as there are cer-

tain restrictions on the buffer start address (for incre-

menting buffers), or end address (for decrementing

buffers) based upon the direction of the buffer.

The only exception to the usage restrictions is for buff-

ers which have a power-of-2 length. As these buffers

satisfy the start and end address criteria, they may

operate in a Bidirectional mode (i.e., address boundary

checks will be performed on both the lower and upper

address boundaries).

Note: For the MOV instructions, the addressing

mode specified in the instruction can differ

for the source and destination EA.

However, the 4-bit Wb (register offset)

field is shared between both source and

destination (but typically only used by

one).

Note: Not all instructions support all the address-

ing modes given above. Individual

instructions may support different subsets

of these addressing modes.

Note: Register indirect with register offset

addressing is only available for W9 (in X

space) and W11 (in Y space).

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 39

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

4.2.1 START AND END ADDRESS

The modulo addressing scheme requires that a starting

and an ending address be specified and loaded

into the 16-bit Modulo Buffer Address registers:

XMODSRT, XMODEND, YMODSRT and YMODEND

(see Table 3-3).

The length of a circular buffer is not directly specified. It

is determined by the difference between the corre-

sponding start and end addresses. The maximum pos-

sible length of the circular buffer is 32K words

(64 Kbytes).

4.2.2 W ADDRESS REGISTER

SELECTION

The Modulo and Bit-Reversed Addressing Control reg-

ister MODCON<15:0> contains enable flags as well as

a W register field to specify the W address registers.

The XWM and YWM fields select which registers will

operate with modulo addressing. If XWM = 15, X

RAGU and X WAGU modulo addressing is disabled.

Similarly, if YWM = 15, Y AGU modulo addressing is

disabled.

The X Address Space Pointer W register (XWM), to

which modulo addressing is to be applied, is stored in

MODCON<3:0> (see Table 3-3). Modulo addressing is

enabled for X data space when XWM is set to any value

other than ‘15’ and the XMODEN bit is set at

MODCON<15>.

The Y Address Space Pointer W register (YWM), to

which modulo addressing is to be applied, is stored in

MODCON<7:4>. Modulo addressing is enabled for Y

data space when YWM is set to any value other than

‘15’ and the YMODEN bit is set at MODCON<14>.

FIGURE 4-1: MODULO ADDRESSING OPERATION EXAMPLE

Note: Y space modulo addressing EA calcula-

tions assume word sized data (LS bit of

every EA is always clear).

0x1100

0x1163

Start Addr = 0x1100

End Addr = 0x1163

Length = 0x0032 words

Byte

Address MOV #0x1100,W0

MOV W0,XMODSRT ;set modulo start address

MOV #0x1163,W0

MOV W0,MODEND ;set modulo end address

MOV #0x8001,W0

MOV W0,MODCON ;enable W1, X AGU for modulo

MOV #0x0000,W0 ;W0 holds buffer fill value

MOV #0x1110,W1 ;point W1 to buffer

DO AGAIN,#0x31 ;fill the 50 buffer locations

MOV W0,[W1++] ;fill the next location

AGAIN: INC W0,W0 ;increment the fill value

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 40 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

4.2.3 MODULO ADDRESSING

APPLICABILITY

Modulo addressing can be applied to the effective

address (EA) calculation associated with any W regis-

ter. It is important to realize that the address bound-

aries check for addresses less than, or greater than the

upper (for incrementing buffers), and lower (for decre-

menting buffers) boundary addresses (not just equal

to). Address changes may, therefore, jump beyond

boundaries and still be adjusted correctly.

4.3 Bit-Reversed Addressing

Bit-reversed addressing is intended to simplify data re-

ordering for radix-2 FFT algorithms. It is supported by

the X AGU for data writes only.

The modifier, which may be a constant value or register

contents, is regarded as having its bit order reversed. The

address source and destination are kept in normal order.

Thus, the only operand requiring reversal is the modifier.

4.3.1 BIT-REVERSED ADDRESSING

IMPLEMENTATION

Bit-reversed addressing is enabled when:

1. BWM (W register selection) in the MODCON

cannot be accessed using bit-reversed

addressing) and

2. the BREN bit is set in the XBREV register and

3. the addressing mode used is Register Indirect

with Pre-Increment or Post-Increment.

If the length of a bit-reversed buffer is M = 2N bytes,

then the last ‘N’ bits of the data buffer start address

must be zeros.

XB<14:0> is the bit-reversed address modifier or ‘pivot

point’ which is typically a constant. In the case of an

FFT computation, its value is equal to half of the FFT

data buffer size.

When enabled, bit-reversed addressing will only be

executed for register indirect with pre-increment or

post-increment addressing and word sized data writes.

It will not function for any other addressing mode or for

byte sized data, and normal addresses will be gener-

ated instead. When bit-reversed addressing is active,

the W address pointer will always be added to the

address modifier (XB) and the offset associated with

the Register Indirect Addressing mode will be ignored.

In addition, as word sized data is a requirement, the LS

bit of the EA is ignored (and always clear).

If bit-reversed addressing has already been enabled by

setting the BREN (XBREV<15>) bit, then a write to the

XBREV register should not be immediately followed by

an indirect read operation using the W register that has

been designated as the bit-reversed pointer.

FIGURE 4-2: BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS EXAMPLE

Note: The modulo corrected effective address is

written back to the register only when Pre-

Modify or Post-Modify Addressing mode is

used to compute the effective address.

When an address offset (e.g., [W7+W2]) is

used, modulo address correction is per-

formed but the contents of the register

remain unchanged.

Note: All bit-reversed EA calculations assume

word sized data (LS bit of every EA is

always clear). The XB value is scaled

accordingly to generate compatible (byte)

addresses.

Note: Modulo addressing and bit-reversed

addressing should not be enabled together.

In the event that the user attempts to do

this, bit-reversed addressing will assume

priority when active for the X WAGU, and X

WAGU modulo addressing will be disabled.

However, modulo addressing will continue

to function in the X RAGU.

b3 b2 b1 0

b2 b3 b4 0

Bit Locations Swapped Left-to-Right

Around Center of Binary Value

Bit-Reversed Address

XB = 0x0008 for a 16-word Bit-Reversed Buffer

b7 b6 b5 b1

b7 b6 b5 b4

b11 b10 b9 b8

b15 b14 b13 b12

Sequential Address

Pivot Point

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 41

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 4-2: BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS SEQUENCE (16-ENTRY)

TABLE 4-3: BIT-REVERSED ADDRESS MODIFIER VALUES FOR XBREV REGISTER

Normal Address Bit-Reversed Address

A3 A2 A1 A0 Decimal A3 A2 A1 A0 Decimal

0000 00000 0

0001 11000 8

0010 20100 4

0011 31100 12

0100 40010 2

0101 51010 10

0110 60110 6

0111 71110 14

1000 80001 1

1001 91001 9

1010 10 0101 5

1011 11 1101 13

1100 12 0011 3

1101 13 1011 11

1110 14 0111 7

1111 15 1111 15

Buffer Size (Words) XB<14:0> Bit-Reversed Address Modifier Value

1024 0x0200

512 0x0100

256 0x0080

128 0x0040

64 0x0020

32 0x0010

16 0x0008

8 0x0004

4 0x0002

2 0x0001

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 42 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 43

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

5.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY

The dsPIC30F family of devices contains internal pro-

gram Flash memory for executing user code. There are

two methods by which the user can program this

memory:

1. Run-Time Self-Programming (RTSP)

2. In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™)

5.1 In-Circuit Serial Programming

(ICSP)

dsPIC30F devices can be serially programmed while in

the end application circuit. This is simply done with two

lines for Programming Clock and Programming Data

(which are named PGC and PGD respectively), and

three other lines for Power (VDD), Ground (VSS) and

Master Clear (MCLR). this allows customers to manu-

facture boards with unprogrammed devices, and then

program the microcontroller just before shipping the

product. This also allows the most recent firmware or a

custom firmware to be programmed.

5.2 Run-Time Self-Programming

(RTSP)

RTSP is accomplished using TBLRD (table read) and

TBLWT (table write) instructions.

With RTSP, the user may erase program memory, 32

instructions (96 bytes) at a time and can write program

memory data, 32 instructions (96 bytes) at a time.

5.3 Table Instruction Operation

Summary

The TBLRDL and the TBLWTL instructions are used to

read or write to bits<15:0> of program memory.

TBLRDL and TBLWTL can access program memory in

Word or Byte mode.

The TBLRDH and TBLWTH instructions are used to read

or write to bits<23:16> of program memory. TBLRDH

and TBLWTH can access program memory in Word or

Byte mode.

A 24-bit program memory address is formed using

bits<7:0> of the TBLPAG register and the effective

address (EA) from a W register specified in the table

instruction, as shown in Figure 5-1.

FIGURE 5-1: ADDRESSING FOR TABLE AND NVM REGISTERS

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

Program Counter

24 bits

NVMADRU Reg

8 bits 16 bits

Program

Using

TBLPAG Reg

8 bits

Working Reg EA

16 bits

Using

Byte

24-bit EA

1/0

Select

Table

Instruction

NVMADR

Addressing

Counter

Using

NVMADR Reg EA

User/Configuration

Space Select

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 44 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

5.4 RTSP Operation

The dsPIC30F Flash program memory is organized

into rows and panels. Each row consists of 32 instruc-

tions, or 96 bytes. Each panel consists of 128 rows, or

4K x 24 instructions. RTSP allows the user to erase one

row (32 instructions) at a time and to program four

instructions at one time. RTSP may be used to program

multiple program memory panels, but the table pointer

must be changed at each panel boundary.

Each panel of program memory contains write latches

that hold 32 instructions of programming data. Prior to

the actual programming operation, the write data must

be loaded into the panel write latches. The data to be

programmed into the panel is loaded in sequential

order into the write latches; instruction 0, instruction 1,

etc. The instruction words loaded must always be from

a group of 32 boundary.

The basic sequence for RTSP programming is to set up

a table pointer, then do a series of TBLWT instructions

to load the write latches. Programming is performed by

setting the special bits in the NVMCON register. 32

TBLWTL and four TBLWTH instructions are required to

load the 32 instructions. If multiple panel programming

is required, the table pointer needs to be changed and

the next set of multiple write latches written.

All of the table write operations are single word writes

(2 instruction cycles), because only the table latches

are written. A programming cycle is required for

programming each row.

The Flash Program Memory is readable, writable and

erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD

range.

5.5 Control Registers

The four SFRs used to read and write the program

Flash memory are:

•NVMCON

•NVMADR

• NVMADRU

•NVMKEY

5.5.1 NVMCON REGISTER

The NVMCON register controls which blocks are to be

erased, which memory type is to be programmed, and

start of the programming cycle.

5.5.2 NVMADR REGISTER

The NVMADR register is used to hold the lower two

bytes of the effective address. The NVMADR register

captures the EA<15:0> of the last table instruction that

has been executed and selects the row to write.

5.5.3 NVMADRU REGISTER

The NVMADRU register is used to hold the upper byte

of the effective address. The NVMADRU register cap-

tures the EA<23:16> of the last table instruction that

has been executed.

5.5.4 NVMKEY REGISTER

NVMKEY is a write-only register that is used for write

protection. To start a programming or an erase

sequence, the user must consecutively write 0x55 and

0xAA to the NVMKEY register. Refer to Section 5.6 for

further details.

Note: The user can also directly write to the

NVMADR and NVMADRU registers to

specify a program memory address for

erasing or programming.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 45

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

5.6 Programming Operations

A complete programming sequence is necessary for

programming or erasing the internal Flash in RTSP

mode. A programming operation is nominally 2 msec in

duration and the processor stalls (waits) until the oper-

ation is finished. Setting the WR bit (NVMCON<15>)

starts the operation, and the WR bit is automatically

cleared when the operation is finished.

5.6.1 PROGRAMMING ALGORITHM FOR

PROGRAM FLASH

The user can erase or program one row of program

Flash memory at a time. The general process is:

1. Read one row of program Flash (32 instruction

words) and store into data RAM as a data

“image”.

2. Update the data image with the desired new

data.

3. Erase program Flash row.

a) Setup NVMCON register for multi-word,

program Flash, erase, and set WREN bit.

b) Write address of row to be erased into

NVMADRU/NVMDR.

c) Write ‘55’ to NVMKEY.

d) Write ‘AA’ to NVMKEY.

e) Set the WR bit. This will begin erase cycle.

f) CPU will stall for the duration of the erase

cycle.

g) The WR bit is cleared when erase cycle

ends.

4. Write 32 instruction words of data from data

RAM “image” into the program Flash write

latches.

5. Program 32 instruction words into program

Flash.

a) Setup NVMCON register for multi-word,

program Flash, program, and set WREN

bit.

b) Write ‘55’ to NVMKEY.

c) Write ‘AA’ to NVMKEY.

d) Set the WR bit. This will begin program

cycle.

e) CPU will stall for duration of the program

cycle.

f) The WR bit is cleared by the hardware

when program cycle ends.

6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 as needed to program

desired amount of program Flash memory.

5.6.2 ERASING A ROW OF PROGRAM

MEMORY

Example 5-1 shows a code sequence that can be used

to erase a row (32 instructions) of program memory.

EXAMPLE 5-1: ERASING A ROW OF PROGRAM MEMORY

; Setup NVMCON for erase operation, multi word write

; program memory selected, and writes enabled

MOV #0x4041,W0 ;

MOV W0,NVMCON ; Init NVMCON SFR

; Init pointer to row to be ERASED

MOV #tblpage(PROG_ADDR),W0 ;

MOV W0,NVMADRU ; Initialize PM Page Boundary SFR

MOV #tbloffset(PROG_ADDR),W0 ; Intialize in-page EA[15:0] pointer

MOV W0, NVMADR ; Initialize NVMADR SFR

DISI #5 ; Block all interrupts with priority <7 for

; next 5 instructions

MOV #0x55,W0

MOV W0,NVMKEY ; Write the 0x55 key

MOV #0xAA,W1 ;

MOV W1,NVMKEY ; Write the 0xAA key

BSET NVMCON,#WR ; Start the erase sequence

NOP ; Insert two NOPs after the erase

NOP ; command is asserted

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 46 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

5.6.3 LOADING WRITE LATCHES

Example 5-2 shows a sequence of instructions that

can be used to load the 96 bytes of write latches. 32

TBLWTL and 32 TBLWTH instructions are needed to

load the write latches selected by the table pointer.

5.6.4 INITIATING THE PROGRAMMING

SEQUENCE

For protection, the write initiate sequence for NVMKEY

must be used to allow any erase or program operation

to proceed. After the programming command has been

executed, the user must wait for the programming time

until programming is complete. The two instructions fol-

lowing the start of the programming sequence should

be NOPs.

EXAMPLE 5-2: LOADING WRITE LATCHES

EXAMPLE 5-3: INITIATING A PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE

; Set up a pointer to the first program memory location to be written

; program memory selected, and writes enabled

MOV #0x0000,W0 ;

MOV W0,TBLPAG ; Initialize PM Page Boundary SFR

MOV #0x6000,W0 ; An example program memory address

; Perform the TBLWT instructions to write the latches

; 0th_program_word

MOV #LOW_WORD_0,W2 ;

MOV #HIGH_BYTE_0,W3 ;

TBLWTL W2,[W0] ; Write PM low word into program latch

TBLWTH W3,[W0++] ; Write PM high byte into program latch

; 1st_program_word

MOV #LOW_WORD_1,W2 ;

MOV #HIGH_BYTE_1,W3 ;

TBLWTL W2,[W0] ; Write PM low word into program latch

TBLWTH W3,[W0++] ; Write PM high byte into program latch

; 2nd_program_word

MOV #LOW_WORD_2,W2 ;

MOV #HIGH_BYTE_2,W3 ;

TBLWTL W2, [W0] ; Write PM low word into program latch

TBLWTH W3, [W0++] ; Write PM high byte into program latch

•

; 31st_program_word

MOV #LOW_WORD_31,W2 ;

MOV #HIGH_BYTE_31,W3 ;

TBLWTL W2, [W0] ; Write PM low word into program latch

TBLWTH W3, [W0++] ; Write PM high byte into program latch

Note: In Example 5-2, the contents of the upper byte of W3 has no effect.

DISI #5 ; Block all interrupts with priority <7 for

; next 5 instructions

MOV #0x55,W0 ;

MOV W0,NVMKEY ; Write the 0x55 key

MOV #0xAA,W1 ;

MOV W1,NVMKEY ; Write the 0xAA key

BSET NVMCON,#WR ; Start the erase sequence

NOP ; Insert two NOPs after the erase

NOP ; command is asserted

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 47

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 5-1: NVM REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

File Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 All RESETS

NVMCON 0760 WR WREN WRERR — — — —TWRI — PROGOP<6:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

NVMADR 0762 NVMADR<15:0> uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

NVMADRU 0764 — — — — — — — — NVMADR<23:16> 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu

NVMKEY 0766 — — — — — — — — KEY<7:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 48 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 49

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

6.0 DATA EEPROM MEMORY

The Data EEPROM Memory is readable and writable

during normal operation over the entire VDD range. The

data EEPROM memory is directly mapped in the

program memory address space.

The four SFRs used to read and write the program

Flash memory are used to access data EEPROM

memory, as well. As described in Section 6.5, these

registers are:

•NVMCON

•NVMADR

• NVMADRU

•NVMKEY

The EEPROM data memory allows read and write of

single words and 16-word blocks. When interfacing to

data memory, NVMADR in conjunction with the

NVMADRU register are used to address the EEPROM

location being accessed. TBLRDL and TBLWTL

instructions are used to read and write data EEPROM.

The dsPIC30F devices have up to 8 Kbytes (4K

words) of data EEPROM with an address range from

0x7FF000 to 0x7FFFFE.

A word write operation should be preceded by an erase

of the corresponding memory location(s). The write typ-

ically requires 2 ms to complete but the write time will

vary with voltage and temperature.

A program or erase operation on the data EEPROM

does not stop the instruction flow. The user is respon-

sible for waiting for the appropriate duration of time

before initiating another data EEPROM write/erase

operation. Attempting to read the data EEPROM while

a programming or erase operation is in progress results

in unspecified data.

Control bit WR initiates write operations similar to pro-

gram Flash writes. This bit cannot be cleared, only set,

in software. They are cleared in hardware at the com-

pletion of the write operation. The inability to clear the

WR bit in software prevents the accidental or

premature termination of a write operation.

The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation.

On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is

set when a write operation is interrupted by a MCLR

Reset or a WDT Time-out Reset during normal opera-

tion. In these situations, following Reset, the user can

check the WRERR bit and rewrite the location. The

address register NVMADR remains unchanged.

6.1 Reading the Data EEPROM

A TBLRD instruction reads a word at the current pro-

gram word address. This example uses W0 as a

pointer to data EEPROM. The result is placed in

EXAMPLE 6-1: DATA EEPROM READ

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

Note: Interrupt flag bit NVMIF in the IFS0 regis-

ter is set when write is complete. It must be

cleared in software.

MOV #LOW_ADDR_WORD,W0 ; Init Pointer

MOV #HIGH_ADDR_WORD,W1

MOV W1,TBLPAG

TBLRDL [ W0 ], W4 ; read data EEPROM

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 50 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

6.2 Erasing Data EEPROM

6.2.1 ERASING A BLOCK OF DATA

EEPROM

In order to erase a block of data EEPROM, the

NVMADRU and NVMADR registers must initially point

to the block of memory to be erased. Configure

NVMCON for erasing a block of data EEPROM, and

set the ERASE and WREN bits in the NVMCON

shown in Example 6-2.

EXAMPLE 6-2: DATA EEPROM BLOCK ERASE

6.2.2 ERASING A WORD OF DATA

EEPROM

The TBLPAG and NVMADR registers must point to the

block. Select erase a block of data Flash, and set the

ERASE and WREN bits in the NVMCON register. Set-

ting the WR bit initiates the erase as shown in

Example 6-3.

EXAMPLE 6-3: DATA EEPROM WORD ERASE

; Select data EEPROM block, ERASE, WREN bits

MOV #0x4045,W0

MOV W0,NVMCON ; Initialize NVMCON SFR

; Start erase cycle by setting WR after writing key sequence

DISI #5 ; Block all interrupts with priority <7 for

; next 5 instructions

MOV #0x55,W0 ;

MOV W0,NVMKEY ; Write the 0x55 key

MOV #0xAA,W1 ;

MOV W1,NVMKEY ; Write the 0xAA key

BSET NVMCON,#WR ; Initiate erase sequence

NOP

; Erase cycle will complete in 2mS. CPU is not stalled for the Data Erase Cycle

; User can poll WR bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to determine erasure complete

; Select data EEPROM word, ERASE, WREN bits

MOV #0x4044,W0

MOV W0,NVMCON

; Start erase cycle by setting WR after writing key sequence

DISI #5 ; Block all interrupts with priority <7 for

; next 5 instructions

MOV #0x55,W0 ;

MOV W0,NVMKEY ; Write the 0x55 key

MOV #0xAA,W1 ;

MOV W1,NVMKEY ; Write the 0xAA key

BSET NVMCON,#WR ; Initiate erase sequence

NOP

; Erase cycle will complete in 2mS. CPU is not stalled for the Data Erase Cycle

; User can poll WR bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to determine erasure complete

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 51

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

6.3 Writing to the Data EEPROM

To write an EEPROM data location, the following

sequence must be followed:

1. Erase data EEPROM word.

a) Select word, data EEPROM erase, and set

WREN bit in NVMCON register.

b) Write address of word to be erased into

NVMADR.

c) Enable NVM interrupt (optional).

d) Write ‘55’ to NVMKEY.

e) Write ‘AA’ to NVMKEY.

f) Set the WR bit. This will begin erase cycle.

g) Either poll NVMIF bit or wait for NVMIF

interrupt.

h) The WR bit is cleared when the erase cycle

ends.

2. Write data word into data EEPROM write

latches.

3. Program 1 data word into data EEPROM.

a) Select word, data EEPROM program, and

set WREN bit in NVMCON register.

b) Enable NVM write done interrupt (optional).

c) Write ‘55’ to NVMKEY.

d) Write ‘AA’ to NVMKEY.

e) Set the WR bit. This will begin program

cycle.

f) Either poll NVMIF bit or wait for NVM

interrupt.

g) The WR bit is cleared when the write cycle

ends.

The write will not initiate if the above sequence is not

exactly followed (write 0x55 to NVMKEY, write 0xAA to

NVMCON, then set WR bit) for each word. It is strongly

recommended that interrupts be disabled during this

code segment.

Additionally, the WREN bit in NVMCON must be set to

enable writes. This mechanism prevents accidental

writes to data EEPROM due to unexpected code exe-

cution. The WREN bit should be kept clear at all times

except when updating the EEPROM. The WREN bit is

not cleared by hardware.

After a write sequence has been initiated, clearing the

WREN bit will not affect the current write cycle. The WR

bit will be inhibited from being set unless the WREN bit

is set. The WREN bit must be set on a previous instruc-

tion. Both WR and WREN cannot be set with the same

instruction.

At the completion of the write cycle, the WR bit is

cleared in hardware and the Non-Volatile Memory

Write Complete Interrupt Flag bit (NVMIF) is set. The

user may either enable this interrupt or poll this bit.

NVMIF must be cleared by software.

6.3.1 WRITING A WORD OF DATA

EEPROM

Once the user has erased the word to be programmed,

then a table write instruction is used to write one write

latch, as shown in Example 6-4.

6.3.2 WRITING A BLOCK OF DATA

EEPROM

To write a block of data EEPROM, write to all sixteen

latches first, then set the NVMCON register and

program the block.

EXAMPLE 6-4: DATA EEPROM WORD WRITE

; Point to data memory

MOV #LOW_ADDR_WORD,W0 ; Init pointer

MOV #HIGH_ADDR_WORD,W1

MOV W1,TBLPAG

MOV #LOW(WORD),W2 ; Get data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0] ; Write data

; The NVMADR captures last table access address

; Select data EEPROM for 1 word op

MOV #0x4004,W0

MOV W0,NVMCON

; Operate key to allow write operation

DISI #5 ; Block all interrupts with priority <7 for

; next 5 instructions

MOV #0x55,W0

MOV W0,NVMKEY ; Write the 0x55 key

MOV #0xAA,W1

MOV W1,NVMKEY ; Write the 0xAA key

BSET NVMCON,#WR ; Initiate program sequence

NOP

; Write cycle will complete in 2mS. CPU is not stalled for the Data Write Cycle

; User can poll WR bit, use NVMIF or Timer IRQ to determine write complete

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 52 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

EXAMPLE 6-5: DATA EEPROM BLOCK WRITE

6.4 Write Verify

Depending on the application, good programming

practice may dictate that the value written to the mem-

ory should be verified against the original value. This

should be used in applications where excessive writes

can stress bits near the specification limit.

6.5 Protection Against Spurious Write

There are conditions when the device may not want to

write to the data EEPROM memory. To protect against

spurious EEPROM writes, various mechanisms have

been built-in. On power-up, the WREN bit is cleared;

also, the Power-up Timer prevents EEPROM write.

The write initiate sequence and the WREN bit together

help prevent an accidental write during brown-out,

power glitch, or software malfunction.

MOV #LOW_ADDR_WORD,W0 ; Init pointer

MOV #HIGH_ADDR_WORD,W1

MOV W1,TBLPAG

MOV #data1,W2 ; Get 1st data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data2,W2 ; Get 2nd data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data3,W2 ; Get 3rd data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data4,W2 ; Get 4th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data5,W2 ; Get 5th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data6,W2 ; Get 6th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data7,W2 ; Get 7th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data8,W2 ; Get 8th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data9,W2 ; Get 9th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data10,W2 ; Get 10th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data11,W2 ; Get 11th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data12,W2 ; Get 12th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data13,W2 ; Get 13th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data14,W2 ; Get 14th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data15,W2 ; Get 15th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data

MOV #data16,W2 ; Get 16th data

TBLWTL W2,[ W0]++ ; write data. The NVMADR captures last table access address.

MOV #0x400A,W0 ; Select data EEPROM for multi word op

MOV W0,NVMCON ; Operate Key to allow program operation

DISI #5 ; Block all interrupts with priority <7 for

; next 5 instructions

MOV #0x55,W0

MOV W0,NVMKEY ; Write the 0x55 key

MOV #0xAA,W1

MOV W1,NVMKEY ; Write the 0xAA key

BSET NVMCON,#WR ; Start write cycle

NOP

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 53

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

7.0 I/O PORTS

All of the device pins (except VDD, VSS, MCLR and

OSC1/CLKI) are shared between the peripherals and

the parallel I/O ports.

All I/O input ports feature Schmitt Trigger inputs for

improved noise immunity.

7.1 Parallel I/O (PIO) Ports

When a peripheral is enabled and the peripheral is

actively driving an associated pin, the use of the pin as

a general purpose output pin is disabled. The I/O pin

may be read but the output driver for the parallel port bit

will be disabled. If a peripheral is enabled but the

peripheral is not actively driving a pin, that pin may be

driven by a port.

All port pins have three registers directly associated

with the operation of the port pin. The Data Direction

or an output. If the data direction bit is a ‘1’, then the pin

is an input. All port pins are defined as inputs after a

Reset. Reads from the latch (LATx), read the latch.

Writes to the latch, write the latch (LATx). Reads from

the port (PORTx), read the port pins and writes to the

port pins, write the latch (LATx).

Any bit and its associated data and control registers

that are not valid for a particular device will be dis-

abled. That means the corresponding LATx and TRISx

registers and the port pin will read as zeros.

When a pin is shared with another peripheral or func-

tion that is defined as an input only, it is nevertheless

regarded as a dedicated port because there is no

other competing source of outputs.

A parallel I/O (PIO) port that shares a pin with a periph-

eral is, in general, subservient to the peripheral. The

peripheral’s output buffer data and control signals are

provided to a pair of multiplexers. The multiplexers

select whether the peripheral or the associated port

has ownership of the output data and control signals of

the I/O pad cell. Figure 7-1 shows how ports are shared

with other peripherals and the associated I/O cell (pad)

to which they are connected.

The format of the registers for the shared ports,

(PORTB, PORTC, PORTD and PORTF) are shown in

Table 7-1 through Table 7-6.

FIGURE 7-1: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF A SHARED PORT STRUCTURE

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

Note: The actual bits in use vary between

devices.

WR LAT +

TRIS Latch

I/O Pad

WR Port

Data Bus

Data Latch

Read LAT

Read Port

Read TRIS

WR TRIS

Peripheral Output Data

Output Enable

Peripheral Input Data

I/O Cell

Peripheral Module

Peripheral Output Enable

PIO Module

Output Multiplexers

Output Data

Input Data

Peripheral Module Enable

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 54 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

7.2 Configuring Analog Port Pins

The use of the ADPCFG and TRIS registers control the

operation of the A/D port pins. The port pins that are

desired as analog inputs must have their correspond-

ing TRIS bit set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared

(output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be

converted.

When reading the Port register, all pins configured as

analog input channels will read as cleared (a low level).

Pins configured as digital inputs will not convert an ana-

log input. Analog levels on any pin that is defined as a

digital input (including the ANx pins) may cause the

input buffer to consume current that exceeds the

device specifications.

7.2.1 I/O PORT WRITE/READ TIMING

One instruction cycle is required between a port

direction change or port write operation and a read

operation of the same port. Typically this instruction

would be a NOP.

EXAMPLE 7-1: PORT WRITE/READ

EXAMPLE

MOV #0xF0, W0; Configure PORTB<7:4>

; as inputs

MOV W0, TRISB; and PORTB<3:0> as outputs

NOP ; additional instruction cycle

btss PORTB, #7; bit test RB7 and skip if set

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 55

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 7-1: PORTB REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2011/3012

TABLE 7-2: PORTB REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2012/3013

TABLE 7-3: PORTC REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 7-4: PORTD REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2011/3012

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TRISB 02C6 — — — — — — — — TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 0000 0000 1111 1111

PORTB 02C8 — — — — — — — — RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 0000 0000 0000 0000

LATB 02CB — — — — — — — — LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 0000 0000 0000 0000

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TRISB 02C6 — — — — — — TRISB9 TRISB8 TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 0000 0011 1111 1111

PORTB 02C8 — — — — — — RB9 RB8 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 0000 0000 0000 0000

LATB 02CB — — — — — — LATB9 LATB8 LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 0000 0000 0000 0000

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TRISC 02CC TRISC15 TRISC14 TRISC13 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1110 0000 0000 0000

PORTC 02CE RC15 RC14 RC13 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

LATC 02D0 LATC15 LATC14 LATC13 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TRISD 02D2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —TRISD00000 0000 0000 0001

PORTD 02D4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —RD00000 0000 0000 0000

LATD 02D6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —LATD00000 0000 0000 0000

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 56 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 7-5: PORTD REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2012/3013

TABLE 7-6: PORTF REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2012/3013

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TRISD 02D2 — — — — — — TRISD9 TRISD8 — — — — — — — — 0000 0011 0000 0000

PORTD 02D4 — — — — — — RD9 RD8 — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

LATD 02D6 — — — — — — LATD9 LATD8 — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TRISF 02DE — — — — — — — — — TRISF6 TRISF5 TRISF4 TRISF3 TRISF2 — — 0000 0000 0111 1100

PORTF 02E0 — — — — — — — — — RF6 RF5 RF4 RF3 RF2 — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

LATF 02E2 — — — — — — — — — LATF6 LATF5 LATF4 LATF3 LATF2 — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note: The dsPIC30F2011/3012 do not have TRISF, PORTF or LATF.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 57

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

7.3 Input Change Notification Module

The input change notification module provides the

dsPIC30F devices the ability to generate interrupt

requests to the processor, in response to a change of

state on selected input pins. This module is capable of

detecting input change of states even in Sleep mode,

when the clocks are disabled. There are up to 10 exter-

nal signals (CN0 through CN7, CN17 and CN18) that

may be selected (enabled) for generating an interrupt

request on a change of state.

TABLE 7-7: INPUT CHANGE NOTIFICATION REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2011/3012 (BITS 7-0)

TABLE 7-8: INPUT CHANGE NOTIFICATION REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2012/3013 (BITS 7-0)

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

CNEN1 00C0 CN7IE CN6IE CN5IE CN4IE CN3IE CN2IE CN1IE CN0IE 0000 0000 0000 0000

CNEN2 00C2 ——————— —0000 0000 0000 0000

CNPU1 00C4 CN7PUE CN6PUE CN5PUE CN4PUE CN3PUE CN2PUE CN1PUE CN0PUE 0000 0000 0000 0000

CNPU2 00C6 ——————— —0000 0000 0000 0000

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

CNEN1 00C0 CN7IE CN6IE CN5IE CN4IE CN3IE CN2IE CN1IE CN0IE 0000 0000 0000 0000

CNEN2 00C2 — — — — — CN18IE CN17IE — 0000 0000 0000 0000

CNPU1 00C4 CN7PUE CN6PUE CN5PUE CN4PUE CN3PUE CN2PUE CN1PUE CN0PUE 0000 0000 0000 0000

CNPU2 00C6 — — — — — CN18PUE CN17PUE — 0000 0000 0000 0000

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 58 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 59

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

8.0 INTERRUPTS

The dsPIC30F Sensor Family has up to 21 interrupt

sources and 4 processor exceptions (traps) which must

be arbitrated based on a priority scheme.

The CPU is responsible for reading the Interrupt Vector

Table (IVT) and transferring the address contained in

the interrupt vector to the program counter. The inter-

rupt vector is transferred from the program data bus

into the program counter via a 24-bit wide multiplexer

on the input of the program counter.

The Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) and Alternate Interrupt

Vector Table (AIVT) are placed near the beginning of

program memory (0x000004). The IVT and AIVT are

shown in Figure 8-1.

The interrupt controller is responsible for pre-

processing the interrupts and processor exceptions

before they are presented to the processor core. The

peripheral interrupts and traps are enabled, prioritized

and controlled using centralized Special Function Reg-

isters:

• IFS0<15:0>, IFS1<15:0>, IFS2<15:0>

All interrupt request flags are maintained in these

three registers. The flags are set by their respec-

tive peripherals or external signals, and they are

cleared via software.

• IEC0<15:0>, IEC1<15:0>, IEC2<15:0>

All interrupt enable control bits are maintained in

these three registers. These control bits are used

to individually enable interrupts from the

peripherals or external signals.

• IPC0<15:0>... IPC10<7:0>

The user assignable priority level associated with

each of these 41 interrupts is held centrally in

these twelve registers.

• IPL<3:0>

The current CPU priority level is explicitly stored

in the IPL bits. IPL<3> is present in the CORCON

STATUS register (SR) in the processor core.

• INTCON1<15:0>, INTCON2<15:0>

Global interrupt control functions are derived from

these two registers. INTCON1 contains the con-

trol and status flags for the processor exceptions.

The INTCON2 register controls the external

interrupt request signal behavior and the use of

the alternate vector table.

All interrupt sources can be user assigned to one of 7

priority levels, 1 through 7, via the IPCx registers. Each

interrupt source is associated with an interrupt vector,

as shown in Table 8-1. Levels 7 and 1 represent the

highest and lowest maskable priorities, respectively.

If the NSTDIS bit (INTCON1<15>) is set, nesting of

interrupts is prevented. Thus, if an interrupt is currently

being serviced, processing of a new interrupt is pre-

vented even if the new interrupt is of higher priority than

the one currently being serviced.

Certain interrupts have specialized control bits for fea-

tures like edge or level triggered interrupts, interrupt-

on-change, etc. Control of these features remains

within the peripheral module which generates the

interrupt.

The DISI instruction can be used to disable the

processing of interrupts of priorities 6 and lower for a

certain number of instructions, during which the DISI bit

(INTCON2<14>) remains set.

When an interrupt is serviced, the PC is loaded with the

address stored in the vector location in program mem-

ory that corresponds to the interrupt. There are 63 dif-

ferent vectors within the IVT (refer to Table 8-1). These

vectors are contained in locations 0x000004 through

0x0000FE of program memory (refer to Table 8-1).

These locations contain 24-bit addresses and in order

to preserve robustness, an address error trap will take

place should the PC attempt to fetch any of these

words during normal execution. This prevents execu-

tion of random data as a result of accidentally decre-

menting a PC into vector space, accidentally mapping

a data space address into vector space, or the PC roll-

ing over to 0x000000 after reaching the end of imple-

mented program memory space. Execution of a GOTO

instruction to this vector space will also generate an

address error trap.

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030). Note: Interrupt flag bits get set when an interrupt

condition occurs, regardless of the state of

its corresponding enable bit. User soft-

ware should ensure the appropriate inter-

rupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an

interrupt.

Note: Assigning a priority level of ‘0’ to an inter-

rupt source is equivalent to disabling that

interrupt.

Note: The IPL bits become read only whenever

the NSTDIS bit has been set to ‘1’.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 60 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

8.1 Interrupt Priority

The user assignable interrupt priority (IP<2:0>) bits for

each individual interrupt source are located in the LS

3 bits of each nibble within the IPCx register(s). Bit 3 of

each nibble is not used and is read as a ‘0’. These bits

define the priority level assigned to a particular interrupt

by the user.

Natural Order Priority is determined by the position of

an interrupt in the vector table, and only affects

interrupt operation when multiple interrupts with the

same user-assigned priority become pending at the

same time.

Table 8-1 lists the interrupt numbers and interrupt

sources for the dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

devices and their associated vector numbers.

The ability for the user to assign every interrupt to one

of seven priority levels implies that the user can assign

a very high overall priority level to an interrupt with a

low natural order priority. For example, the PLVD (Low

Voltage Detect) can be given a priority of 7. The INT0

(External Interrupt 0) may be assigned to priority level

1, thus giving it a very low effective priority.

TABLE 8-1: INTERRUPT VECTOR TABLE

Note: The user selectable priority levels start at

0 as the lowest priority and level 7 as the

highest priority.

Note 1: The natural order priority scheme has 0

as the highest priority and 53 as the

lowest priority.

2: The natural order priority number is the

same as the INT number.

INT

Number

Vector

Number Interrupt Source

Highest Natural Order Priority

0 8 INT0 - External Interrupt 0

1 9 IC1 - Input Capture 1

2 10 OC1 - Output Compare 1

3 11 T1 - Timer 1

4 12 IC2 - Input Capture 2

5 13 OC2 - Output Compare 2

6 14 T2 - Timer 2

7 15 T3 - Timer 3

8 16 SPI1

9 17 U1RX - UART1 Receiver

10 18 U1TX - UART1 Transmitter

11 19 ADC - ADC Convert Done

12 20 NVM - NVM Write Complete

13 21 SI2C - I2C Slave Interrupt

14 22 MI2C - I2C Master Interrupt

15 23 Input Change Interrupt

16 24 INT1 - External Interrupt 1

17-22 25-30 Reserved

23 31 INT2 - External Interrupt 2

24 32 *U2RX - UART2 Receiver

25 33 *U2TX - UART2 Transmitter

26-41 34-49 Reserved

42 50 LVD - Low Voltage Detect

43-53 51-61 Reserved

Lowest Natural Order Priority

* Only the dsPIC30F3013 has UART2 and the U2RX,

U2TX interrupts. These locations are reserved for

the dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 61

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

8.2 Reset Sequence

A Reset is not a true exception, because the interrupt

controller is not involved in the Reset process. The pro-

cessor initializes its registers in response to a Reset

which forces the PC to zero. The processor then begins

program execution at location 0x000000. A GOTO

instruction is stored in the first program memory loca-

tion immediately followed by the address target for the

GOTO instruction. The processor executes the GOTO to

the specified address and then begins operation at the

specified target (start) address.

8.2.1 RESET SOURCES

In addition to external Reset and Power-on Reset

(POR), there are 6 sources of error conditions which

‘trap’ to the Reset vector.

• Watchdog Time-out:

The watchdog has timed out, indicating that the

processor is no longer executing the correct flow

of code.

• Uninitialized W Register Trap:

An attempt to use an uninitialized W register as

an address pointer will cause a Reset.

• Illegal Instruction Trap:

Attempted execution of any unused opcodes will

result in an illegal instruction trap. Note that a

fetch of an illegal instruction does not result in an

illegal instruction trap if that instruction is flushed

prior to execution due to a flow change.

• Brown-out Reset (BOR):

A momentary dip in the power supply to the

device has been detected which may result in

malfunction.

• Trap Lockout:

Occurrence of multiple trap conditions

simultaneously will cause a Reset.

8.3 Traps

Traps can be considered as non-maskable interrupts

indicating a software or hardware error, which adhere

to a predefined priority as shown in Figure 8-1. They

are intended to provide the user a means to correct

erroneous operation during debug and when operating

within the application.

Note that many of these trap conditions can only be

detected when they occur. Consequently, the question-

able instruction is allowed to complete prior to trap

exception processing. If the user chooses to recover

from the error, the result of the erroneous action that

caused the trap may have to be corrected.

There are 8 fixed priority levels for traps: Level 8

through Level 15, which implies that the IPL3 is always

set during processing of a trap.

If the user is not currently executing a trap, and he sets

the IPL<3:0> bits to a value of ‘0111’ (Level 7), then all

interrupts are disabled, but traps can still be processed.

8.3.1 TRAP SOURCES

The following traps are provided with increasing prior-

ity. However, since all traps can be nested, priority has

little effect.

Math Error Trap:

The Math Error trap executes under the following three

circumstances:

1. Should an attempt be made to divide by zero,

the divide operation will be aborted on a cycle

boundary and the trap taken.

2. If enabled, a Math Error trap will be taken when

an arithmetic operation on either accumulator A

or B causes an overflow from bit 31 and the

accumulator guard bits are not utilized.

3. If enabled, a Math Error trap will be taken when

an arithmetic operation on either accumulator A

or B causes a catastrophic overflow from bit 39

and all saturation is disabled.

4. If the shift amount specified in a shift instruction

is greater than the maximum allowed shift

amount, a trap will occur.

Note: If the user does not intend to take correc-

tive action in the event of a trap error

condition, these vectors must be loaded

with the address of a default handler that

simply contains the RESET instruction. If,

on the other hand, one of the vectors

containing an invalid address is called, an

address error trap is generated.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 62 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Address Error Trap:

This trap is initiated when any of the following

circumstances occurs:

1. A misaligned data word access is attempted.

2. A data fetch from our unimplemented data

memory location is attempted.

3. A data access of an unimplemented program

memory location is attempted.

4. An instruction fetch from vector space is

attempted.

5. Execution of a “BRA #literal” instruction or a

“GOTO #literal” instruction, where literal

is an unimplemented program memory address.

6. Executing instructions after modifying the PC to

point to unimplemented program memory

addresses. The PC may be modified by loading

a value into the stack and executing a RETURN

instruction.

Stack Error Trap:

This trap is initiated under the following conditions:

1. The stack pointer is loaded with a value which is

greater than the (user programmable) limit value

written into the SPLIM register (stack overflow).

2. The stack pointer is loaded with a value which is

less than 0x0800 (simple stack underflow).

Oscillator Fail Trap:

This trap is initiated if the external oscillator fails and

operation becomes reliant on an internal RC backup.

8.3.2 HARD AND SOFT TRAPS

It is possible that multiple traps can become active

within the same cycle (e.g., a misaligned word stack

write to an overflowed address). In such a case, the

fixed priority shown in Figure 8-2 is implemented,

which may require the user to check if other traps are

pending, in order to completely correct the fault.

‘Soft’ traps include exceptions of priority level 8 through

level 11, inclusive. The arithmetic error trap (level 11)

falls into this category of traps.

‘Hard’ traps include exceptions of priority level 12

through level 15, inclusive. The address error (level

12), stack error (level 13) and oscillator error (level 14)

traps fall into this category.

Each hard trap that occurs must be acknowledged

before code execution of any type may continue. If a

lower priority hard trap occurs while a higher priority

trap is pending, acknowledged, or is being processed,

a hard trap conflict will occur.

The device is automatically Reset in a hard trap conflict

condition. The TRAPR status bit (RCON<15>) is set

when the Reset occurs, so that the condition may be

detected in software.

Note: In the MAC class of instructions, wherein

the data space is split into X and Y data

space, unimplemented X space includes

all of Y space, and unimplemented Y

space includes all of X space.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 63

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 8-1: TRAP VECTORS

8.4 Interrupt Sequence

All interrupt event flags are sampled in the beginning of

each instruction cycle by the IFSx registers. A pending

interrupt request (IRQ) is indicated by the flag bit being

equal to a ‘1’ in an IFSx register. The IRQ will cause an

interrupt to occur if the corresponding bit in the Interrupt

Enable (IECx) register is set. For the remainder of the

instruction cycle, the priorities of all pending interrupt

requests are evaluated.

If there is a pending IRQ with a priority level greater

than the current processor priority level in the IPL bits,

the processor will be interrupted.

The processor then stacks the current program counter

and the low byte of the processor STATUS register

(SRL), as shown in Figure 8-2. The low byte of the

STATUS register contains the processor priority level at

the time prior to the beginning of the interrupt cycle.

The processor then loads the priority level for this inter-

rupt into the STATUS register. This action will disable

all lower priority interrupts until the completion of the

Interrupt Service Routine.

FIGURE 8-2: INTERRUPT STACK

FRAME

The RETFIE (return from interrupt) instruction will

unstack the program counter and STATUS registers to

return the processor to its state prior to the interrupt

sequence.

8.5 Alternate Vector Table

In program memory, the Interrupt Vector Table (IVT) is

followed by the Alternate Interrupt Vector Table (AIVT),

as shown in Figure 8-1. Access to the alternate vector

table is provided by the ALTIVT bit in the INTCON2 reg-

ister. If the ALTIVT bit is set, all interrupt and exception

processes will use the alternate vectors instead of the

default vectors. The alternate vectors are organized in

the same manner as the default vectors. The AIVT sup-

ports emulation and debugging efforts by providing a

means to switch between an application and a support

environment without requiring the interrupt vectors to

be reprogrammed. This feature also enables switching

between applications for evaluation of different

software algorithms at run time.

If the AIVT is not required, the program memory allo-

cated to the AIVT may be used for other purposes.

AIVT is not a protected section and may be freely

programmed by the user.

Address Error Trap Vector

Oscillator Fail Trap Vector

Stack Error Trap Vector

Reserved Vector

Math Error Trap Vector

Reserved

Oscillator Fail Trap Vector

Address Error Trap Vector

Reserved Vector

Interrupt 0 Vector

Interrupt 1 Vector

—

Interrupt 52 Vector

Interrupt 53 Vector

Math Error Trap Vector

Decreasing

Priority

0x000000

0x000014

Reserved

Stack Error Trap Vector

Reserved Vector

Interrupt 0 Vector

Interrupt 1 Vector

—

Interrupt 52 Vector

Interrupt 53 Vector

IVT

AIVT

0x000080

0x00007E

0x0000FE

Reserved

0x000094

Reset - GOTO Instruction

Reset - GOTO Address 0x000002

Reserved 0x000082

0x000084

0x000004

Reserved Vector

Note 1: The user can always lower the priority

level by writing a new value into SR. The

Interrupt Service Routine must clear the

interrupt flag bits in the IFSx register

before lowering the processor interrupt

priority, in order to avoid recursive

interrupts.

2: The IPL3 bit (CORCON<3>) is always

clear when interrupts are being pro-

cessed. It is set only during execution of

traps.

015

W15 (before CALL)

W15 (after CALL)

Stack Grows Towards

Higher Address

0x0000

PC<15:0>

SRL IPL3 PC<22:16>

POP : [--W15]

PUSH: [W15++]

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 64 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

8.6 Fast Context Saving

A context saving option is available using shadow reg-

isters. Shadow registers are provided for the DC, N,

OV, Z and C bits in SR, and the registers W0 through

W3. The shadows are only one level deep. The shadow

registers are accessible using the PUSH.S and POP.S

instructions only.

When the processor vectors to an interrupt, the

PUSH.S instruction can be used to store the current

value of the aforementioned registers into their

respective shadow registers.

If an ISR of a certain priority uses the PUSH.S and

POP.S instructions for fast context saving, then a

higher priority ISR should not include the same instruc-

tions. Users must save the key registers in software

during a lower priority interrupt if the higher priority ISR

uses fast context saving.

8.7 External Interrupt Requests

The interrupt controller supports three external inter-

rupt request signals, INT0-INT2. These inputs are edge

sensitive; they require a low-to-high or a high-to-low

transition to generate an interrupt request. The

INTCON2 register has three bits, INT0EP-INT2EP, that

select the polarity of the edge detection circuitry.

8.8 Wake-up from Sleep and Idle

The interrupt controller may be used to wake-up the

processor from either Sleep or Idle modes, if Sleep or

Idle mode is active when the interrupt is generated.

If an enabled interrupt request of sufficient priority is

received by the interrupt controller, then the standard

interrupt request is presented to the processor. At the

same time, the processor will wake-up from Sleep or

Idle and begin execution of the Interrupt Service

Routine (ISR) needed to process the interrupt request.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 65

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 8-2: dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR

Name ADR Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

INTCON1 0080 NSTDIS — — — — OVATE OVBTE COVTE — — — MATHERR ADDRERR STKERR OSCFAIL —0000 0000 0000 0000

INTCON2 0082 ALTIVT DISI — — — — — — — — — — — INT2EP INT1EP INT0EP 0000 0000 0000 0000

IFS0 0084 CNIF MI2CIF SI2CIF NVMIF ADIF U1TXIF U1RXIF SPI1IF T3IF T2IF OC2IF IC2IF T1IF OC1IF IC1IF INT0IF 0000 0000 0000 0000

IFS1 0086 — — — — — — — —INT2IF— — — — — — INT1IF 0000 0000 0000 0000

IFS2 0088 — — — — — LVDIF — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IEC0 008C CNIE MI2CIE SI2CIE NVMIE ADIE U1TXIE U1RXIE SPI1IE T3IE T2IE OC2IE IC2IE T1IE OC1IE IC1IE INT0IE 0000 0000 0000 0000

IEC1 008E — — — — — — — —INT2IE— — — — — — INT1IE 0000 0000 0000 0000

IEC2 0090 — — — — —LVDIE — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC0 0094 — T1IP<2:0> — OC1IP<2:0> — IC1IP<2:0> — INT0IP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC1 0096 — T31P<2:0> — T2IP<2:0> — OC2IP<2:0> — IC2IP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC2 0098 — ADIP<2:0> — U1TXIP<2:0> — U1RXIP<2:0> — SPI1IP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC3 009A — CNIP<2:0> — MI2CIP<2:0> — SI2CIP<2:0> — NVMIP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC4 009C — — — — — — — — — — — — — INT1IP<2:0> 0000 0000 0000 0100

IPC5 009E — INT2IP<2:0> — — — — — — — — — — — — 0100 0000 0000 0000

IPC6 00A0 — — — — — — — — —10 0 —100

0000 0000 0100 0100

IPC7 00A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC8 00A4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC9 00A6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC10 00A8 — — — — — LVDIP<2:0> — — — — — — — — 0000 0100 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 66 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 8-3: dsPIC30F3013 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR

Name ADR Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

INTCON1 0080 NSTDIS — — — — OVATE OVBTE COVTE — — — MATHERR ADDRERR STKERR OSCFAIL —0000 0000 0000 0000

INTCON2 0082 ALTIVT DISI — — — — — — — — — — — INT2EP INT1EP INT0EP 0000 0000 0000 0000

IFS0 0084 CNIF MI2CIF SI2CIF NVMIF ADIF U1TXIF U1RXIF SPI1IF T3IF T2IF OC2IF IC2IF T1IF OC1IF IC1IF INT0IF 0000 0000 0000 0000

IFS1 0086 — — — — — — U2TXIF U2RXIF INT2IF — — — — — — INT1IF 0000 0000 0000 0000

IFS2 0088 — — — — — LVDIF — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IEC0 008C CNIE MI2CIE SI2CIE NVMIE ADIE U1TXIE U1RXIE SPI1IE T3IE T2IE OC2IE IC2IE T1IE OC1IE IC1IE INT0IE 0000 0000 0000 0000

IEC1 008E — — — — — U2TXIE U2RXIE INT2IE — — — — — — INT1IE 0000 0000 0000 0000

IEC2 0090 — — — — —LVDIE — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC0 0094 — T1IP<2:0> — OC1IP<2:0> — IC1IP<2:0> — INT0IP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC1 0096 — T31P<2:0> — T2IP<2:0> — OC2IP<2:0> — IC2IP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC2 0098 — ADIP<2:0> — U1TXIP<2:0> — U1RXIP<2:0> — SPI1IP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC3 009A — CNIP<2:0> — MI2CIP<2:0> — SI2CIP<2:0> — NVMIP<2:0> 0100 0100 0100 0100

IPC4 009C — — — — — — — — — — — — — INT1IP<2:0> 0000 0000 0000 0100

IPC5 009E — INT2IP<2:0> — — — — — — — — — 0100 0000 0000 0000

IPC6 00A0 — — — — — — — — — U2TXIP<2:0> — U2RXIP<2:0> 0000 0000 0100 0100

IPC7 00A2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC8 00A4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC9 00A6 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 0000 0000 0000 0000

IPC10 00A8 — — — — — LVDIP<2:0> — — — — — — — — 0000 0100 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 67

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

9.0 TIMER1 MODULE

This section describes the 16-bit General Purpose

(GP) Timer1 module and associated Operational

modes. Figure 9-1 depicts the simplified block diagram

of the 16-bit Timer1 module. The following sections

provide detailed descriptions including setup and con-

trol registers, along with associated block diagrams for

the Operational modes of the timers.

The Timer1 module is a 16-bit timer that serves as the

time counter for the real-time clock or operates as a

free-running interval timer/counter. The 16-bit timer has

the following modes:

• 16-bit Timer

• 16-bit Synchronous Counter

• 16-bit Asynchronous Counter

These operational characteristics are supported:

• Timer gate operation

• Selectable prescaler settings

• Timer operation during CPU Idle and Sleep

modes

• Interrupt on 16-bit Period register match or falling

edge of external gate signal

These Operating modes are determined by setting the

appropriate bit(s) in the 16-bit SFR, T1CON. Figure 9-1

presents a block diagram of the 16-bit timer module.

16-bit Timer Mode: In the 16-bit Timer mode, the timer

increments on every instruction cycle up to a match

value preloaded into the Period register PR1, then

resets to ‘0’ and continues to count.

When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer stops

incrementing unless the TSIDL (T1CON<13>) bit = 0.

If TSIDL = 1, the timer module logic resumes the incre-

menting sequence on termination of CPU Idle mode.

16-bit Synchronous Counter Mode: In the 16-bit

Synchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on

the rising edge of the applied external clock signal

which is synchronized with the internal phase clocks.

The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in PR1,

then resets to ‘0’ and continues.

When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will

stop incrementing unless the respective TSIDL bit = 0.

If TSIDL = 1, the timer module logic will resume the

incrementing sequence upon termination of the CPU

Idle mode.

16-bit Asynchronous Counter Mode: In the 16-bit

Asynchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on

every rising edge of the applied external clock signal.

The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in PR1,

then resets to ‘0’ and continues.

When the timer is configured for the Asynchronous

mode of operation and the CPU goes into the Idle

mode, the timer will stop incrementing if TSIDL = 1.

FIGURE 9-1: 16-BIT TIMER1 MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

TON

Sync

SOSCI

SOSCO/

PR1

T1IF

Equal Comparator x 16

TMR1

Reset

LPOSCEN

Event Flag

TSYNC

TGATE

TCKPS<1:0>

Prescaler

1, 8, 64, 256

TGATE

TCY

T1CK

TCS

1 x

0 1

TGATE

0 0

Gate

Sync

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 68 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

9.1 Timer Gate Operation

The 16-bit timer can be placed in the Gated Time Accu-

mulation mode. This mode allows the internal TCY to

increment the respective timer when the gate input sig-

nal (T1CK pin) is asserted high. Control bit TGATE

(T1CON<6>) must be set to enable this mode. The

timer must be enabled (TON = 1) and the timer clock

source set to internal (TCS = 0).

When the CPU goes into the Idle mode, the timer will

stop incrementing unless TSIDL = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the

timer will resume the incrementing sequence upon

termination of the CPU Idle mode.

9.2 Timer Prescaler

The input clock (FOSC/4 or external clock) to the 16-bit

Timer has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:8, 1:64 and 1:256,

selected by control bits TCKPS<1:0> (T1CON<5:4>).

The prescaler counter is cleared when any of the

following occurs:

• a write to the TMR1 register

• a write to the T1CON register

• device Reset, such as POR and BOR

However, if the timer is disabled (TON = 0), then the

timer prescaler cannot be reset since the prescaler

clock is halted.

TMR1 is not cleared when T1CON is written. It is

cleared by writing to the TMR1 register.

9.3 Timer Operation During Sleep

Mode

During CPU Sleep mode, the timer will operate if:

• The timer module is enabled (TON = 1) and

• The timer clock source is selected as external

(TCS = 1) and

• The TSYNC bit (T1CON<2>) is asserted to a logic

‘0’ which defines the external clock source as

asynchronous.

When all three conditions are true, the timer will con-

tinue to count up to the Period register and be reset to

0x0000.

When a match between the timer and the Period regis-

ter occurs, an interrupt can be generated if the

respective timer interrupt enable bit is asserted.

9.4 Timer Interrupt

The 16-bit timer has the ability to generate an interrupt on

period match. When the timer count matches the Period

generated if enabled. The T1IF bit must be cleared in

software. The timer interrupt flag, T1IF, is located in the

IFS0 Control register in the interrupt controller.

When the Gated Time Accumulation mode is enabled,

an interrupt will also be generated on the falling edge of

the gate signal (at the end of the accumulation cycle).

Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respec-

tive timer interrupt enable bit, T1IE. The timer interrupt

enable bit is located in the IEC0 Control register in the

interrupt controller.

9.5 Real-Time Clock

Timer1, when operating in Real-Time Clock (RTC)

mode, provides time of day and event time-stamping

capabilities. Key operational features of the RTC are:

• Operation from 32 kHz LP oscillator

• 8-bit prescaler

•Low power

• Real-Time Clock interrupts

These operating modes are determined by setting the

appropriate bit(s) in the T1CON Control register.

FIGURE 9-2: RECOMMENDED

COMPONENTS FOR

TIMER1 LP OSCILLATOR

RTC

SOSCI

SOSCO

dsPIC30FXXXX

32.768 kHz

XTAL

C1 = C2 = 18 pF; R = 100K

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 69

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

9.5.1 RTC OSCILLATOR OPERATION

When the TON = 1, TCS = 1 and TGATE = 0, the timer

increments on the rising edge of the 32 kHz LP oscilla-

tor output signal, up to the value specified in the Period

The TSYNC bit must be asserted to a logic ‘0’

(Asynchronous mode) for correct operation.

Enabling LPOSCEN (OSCCON<1>) will disable the

normal Timer and Counter modes and enable a timer

carry-out wake-up event.

When the CPU enters Sleep mode, the RTC will con-

tinue to operate provided the 32 kHz external crystal

oscillator is active and the control bits have not been

changed. The TSIDL bit should be cleared to ‘0’ in

order for RTC to continue operation in Idle mode.

9.5.2 RTC INTERRUPTS

When an interrupt event occurs, the respective interrupt

flag, T1IF, is asserted and an interrupt will be generated

if enabled. The T1IF bit must be cleared in software. The

respective Timer interrupt flag, T1IF, is located in the

IFS0 Status register in the interrupt controller.

Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respec-

tive timer interrupt enable bit, T1IE. The timer interrupt

enable bit is located in the IEC0 Control register in the

interrupt controller.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 70 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 9-1: TIMER1 REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TMR1 0100 Timer1 Register uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

PR1 0102 Period Register 1 1111 1111 1111 1111

T1CON 0104 TON —TSIDL — — — — — — TGATE TCKPS1 TCKPS0 — TSYNC TCS — 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 71

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

10.0 TIMER2/3 MODULE

This section describes the 32-bit General Purpose

(GP) Timer module (Timer2/3) and associated Opera-

tional modes. Figure 10-1 depicts the simplified block

diagram of the 32-bit Timer2/3 module. Figure 10-2

and Figure 10-3 show Timer2/3 configured as two

independent 16-bit timers, Timer2 and Timer3,

respectively.

The Timer2/3 module is a 32-bit timer (which can be

configured as two 16-bit timers) with selectable

Operating modes. These timers are utilized by other

peripheral modules, such as:

• Input Capture

• Output Compare/Simple PWM

The following sections provide a detailed description,

including setup and control registers, along with asso-

ciated block diagrams for the Operational modes of the

timers.

The 32-bit timer has the following modes:

• Two independent 16-bit timers (Timer2 and

Timer3) with all 16-bit Operating modes (except

Asynchronous Counter mode)

• Single 32-bit timer operation

• Single 32-bit synchronous counter

Further, the following operational characteristics are

supported:

• ADC event trigger

• Timer gate operation

• Selectable prescaler settings

• Timer operation during Idle and Sleep modes

• Interrupt on a 32-bit period register match

These Operating modes are determined by setting the

appropriate bit(s) in the 16-bit T2CON and T3CON

SFRs.

For 32-bit timer/counter operation, Timer2 is the LS

Word and Timer3 is the MS Word of the 32-bit timer.

16-bit Timer Mode: In the 16-bit mode, Timer2 and

Timer3 can be configured as two independent 16-bit

timers. Each timer can be set up in either 16-bit Timer

mode or 16-bit Synchronous Counter mode. See

Section 9.0, Timer1 Module for details on these two

Operating modes.

The only functional difference between Timer2 and

Timer3 is that Timer2 provides synchronization of the

clock prescaler output. This is useful for high frequency

external clock inputs.

32-bit Timer Mode: In the 32-bit Timer mode, the timer

increments on every instruction cycle, up to a match

value preloaded into the combined 32-bit Period

count.

For synchronous 32-bit reads of the Timer2/Timer3

pair, reading the LS Word (TMR2 register) will cause

the MS word to be read and latched into a 16-bit

holding register, termed TMR3HLD.

For synchronous 32-bit writes, the holding register

(TMR3HLD) must first be written to. When followed by

a write to the TMR2 register, the contents of TMR3HLD

will be transferred and latched into the MSB of the

32-bit timer (TMR3).

32-bit Synchronous Counter Mode: In the 32-bit

Synchronous Counter mode, the timer increments on

the rising edge of the applied external clock signal

which is synchronized with the internal phase clocks.

The timer counts up to a match value preloaded in the

combined 32-bit period register PR3/PR2, then resets

to ‘0’ and continues.

When the timer is configured for the Synchronous

Counter mode of operation and the CPU goes into the

Idle mode, the timer will stop incrementing unless the

TSIDL (T2CON<13>) bit = 0. If TSIDL = 1, the timer

module logic will resume the incrementing sequence

upon termination of the CPU Idle mode.

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

Note: For 32-bit timer operation, T3CON control

bits are ignored. Only T2CON control bits

are used for setup and control. Timer2

clock and gate inputs are utilized for the

32-bit timer module but an interrupt is gen-

erated with the Timer3 interrupt flag (T3IF)

and the interrupt is enabled with the

Timer3 interrupt enable bit (T3IE).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 72 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 10-1: 32-BIT TIMER2/3 BLOCK DIAGRAM

TMR3 TMR2

T3IF

Equal Comparator x 32

PR3 PR2

Reset

LSB MSB

Event Flag

Note: Timer configuration bit T32 (T2CON<3>) must be set to ‘1’ for a 32-bit timer/counter operation. All control

bits are respective to the T2CON register.

Data Bus<15:0>

Read TMR2

Write TMR2 16

TGATE (T2CON<6>)

(T2CON<6>)

TGATE

TON

TCKPS<1:0>

TCY

TCS

1 x

0 1

TGATE

0 0

Gate

T2CK

Sync

ADC Event Trigger

Sync

TMR3HLD

Prescaler

1, 8, 64, 256

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 73

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 10-2: 16-BIT TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

FIGURE 10-3: 16-BIT TIMER3 BLOCK DIAGRAM

TON

Sync

PR2

T2IF

Equal Comparator x 16

TMR2

Reset

Event Flag TGATE

TCKPS<1:0>

TGATE

TCY

TCS

1 x

0 1

TGATE

0 0

Gate

T2CK

Sync

Prescaler

1, 8, 64, 256

TON

PR3

T3IF

Equal

Comparator x 16

TMR3

Reset

Event Flag TGATE

TCKPS<1:0>

TGATE

TCY

TCS

1 x

0 1

TGATE

0 0

T3CK

ADC Event Trigger

Sync

Prescaler

1, 8, 64, 256

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 74 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

10.1 Timer Gate Operation

The 32-bit timer can be placed in the Gated Time Accu-

mulation mode. This mode allows the internal TCY to

increment the respective timer when the gate input sig-

nal (T2CK pin) is asserted high. Control bit TGATE

(T2CON<6>) must be set to enable this mode. When in

this mode, Timer2 is the originating clock source. The

TGATE setting is ignored for Timer3. The timer must be

enabled (TON = 1) and the timer clock source set to

internal (TCS = 0).

The falling edge of the external signal terminates the

count operation but does not reset the timer. The user

must reset the timer in order to start counting from zero.

10.2 ADC Event Trigger

When a match occurs between the 32-bit timer (TMR3/

TMR2) and the 32-bit combined period register (PR3/

PR2), or between the 16-bit timer TMR3 and the 16-bit

period register PR3, a special ADC trigger event signal

is generated by Timer3.

10.3 Timer Prescaler

The input clock (FOSC/4 or external clock) to the timer

has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:8, 1:64, and 1:256,

selected by control bits TCKPS<1:0> (T2CON<5:4>

and T3CON<5:4>). For the 32-bit timer operation, the

originating clock source is Timer2. The prescaler oper-

ation for Timer3 is not applicable in this mode. The

prescaler counter is cleared when any of the following

occurs:

• a write to the TMR2/TMR3 register

• a write to the T2CON/T3CON register

• device Reset, such as POR and BOR

However, if the timer is disabled (TON = 0), then the

Timer 2 prescaler cannot be reset since the prescaler

clock is halted.

TMR2/TMR3 is not cleared when T2CON/T3CON is

written.

10.4 Timer Operation During Sleep

Mode

During CPU Sleep mode, the timer will not operate

because the internal clocks are disabled.

10.5 Timer Interrupt

The 32-bit timer module can generate an interrupt on

period match or on the falling edge of the external gate

signal. When the 32-bit timer count matches the

respective 32-bit period register, or the falling edge of

the external “gate” signal is detected, the T3IF bit

(IFS0<7>) is asserted and an interrupt will be gener-

ated if enabled. In this mode, the T3IF interrupt flag is

used as the source of the interrupt. The T3IF bit must

be cleared in software.

Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the

respective timer interrupt enable bit, T3IE (IEC0<7>).

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 75

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 10-1: TIMER2/3 REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

TMR2 0106 Timer2 Register uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

TMR3HLD 0108 Timer3 Holding Register (for 32-bit timer operations only) uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

TMR3 010A Timer3 Register uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

PR2 010C Period Register 2 1111 1111 1111 1111

PR3 010E Period Register 3 1111 1111 1111 1111

T2CON 0110 TON —TSIDL — — — — — — TGATE TCKPS1 TCKPS0 T32 —TCS —0000 0000 0000 0000

T3CON 0112 TON —TSIDL — — — — — — TGATE TCKPS1 TCKPS0 ——TCS —0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 76 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 77

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

11.0 INPUT CAPTURE MODULE

This section describes the input capture module and

associated operational modes. The features provided

by this module are useful in applications requiring fre-

quency (period) and pulse measurement.

Figure 11-1 depicts a block diagram of the input cap-

ture module. Input capture is useful for such modes as:

• Frequency/Period/Pulse Measurements

• Additional Sources of External Interrupts

Important operational features of the input capture

module are its

• Simple Capture Event mode

• Timer2 and Timer3 mode selection

• Interrupt on input capture event

These operating modes are determined by setting the

appropriate bits in the IC1CON and IC2CON registers.

The dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013 devices have two

capture channels.

11.1 Simple Capture Event Mode

The simple capture events in the dsPIC30F product

family are:

• Capture every falling edge

• Capture every rising edge

• Capture every 4th rising edge

• Capture every 16th rising edge

• Capture every rising and falling edge

These simple Input Capture modes are configured by

setting the appropriate bits ICM<2:0> (ICxCON<2:0>).

11.1.1 CAPTURE PRESCALER

There are four input capture prescaler settings speci-

fied by bits ICM<2:0> (ICxCON<2:0>). Whenever the

capture channel is turned off, the prescaler counter will

be cleared. In addition, any Reset will clear the

prescaler counter.

FIGURE 11-1: INPUT CAPTURE MODE BLOCK DIAGRAM

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

ICxBUF

Prescaler

ICx pin

ICM<2:0>

Mode Select

Note: Where ‘x’ is shown, reference is made to the registers or bits associated to the respective input capture

channel (1 or 2).

Set Flag

ICxIF

ICTMR

T2_CNT T3_CNT

Edge

Detection

Logic

Clock

Synchronizer

1, 4, 16

From GP Timer Module

16 16

FIFO

R/W

Logic

ICI<1:0>

ICBNE, ICOV

ICxCON Interrupt

Logic

Set Flag

ICxIF

Data Bus

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 78 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

11.1.2 CAPTURE BUFFER OPERATION

Each capture channel has an associated FIFO buffer

which is four 16-bit words deep. There are two status

flags which provide status on the FIFO buffer:

• ICBFNE - Input Capture Buffer Not Empty

• ICOV - Input Capture Overflow

The ICBFNE will be set on the first input capture event

and remain set until all capture events have been read

from the FIFO. As each word is read from the FIFO, the

remaining words are advanced by one position within

the buffer.

In the event that the FIFO is full with four capture

events and a fifth capture event occurs prior to a read

of the FIFO, an overflow condition will occur and the

ICOV bit will be set to a logic ‘1’. The fifth capture event

is lost and is not stored in the FIFO. No additional

events will be captured until all four events have been

read from the buffer.

If a FIFO read is performed after the last read and no

new capture event has been received, the read will

yield indeterminate results.

11.1.3 TIMER2 AND TIMER3 SELECTION

MODE

The input capture module consists of up to 8 input cap-

ture channels. Each channel can select between one of

two timers for the time base, Timer2 or Timer3.

Selection of the timer resource is accomplished

through SFR bit, ICTMR (ICxCON<7>). Timer3 is the

default timer resource available for the input capture

module.

11.1.4 HALL SENSOR MODE

When the input capture module is set for capture on

every edge, rising and falling, ICM<2:0> = 001, the fol-

lowing operations are performed by the input capture

logic:

• The input capture interrupt flag is set on every

edge, rising and falling.

• The interrupt on Capture mode setting bits,

ICI<1:0>, is ignored since every capture

generates an interrupt.

• A capture overflow condition is not generated in

this mode.

11.2 Input Capture Operation During

Sleep and Idle Modes

An input capture event will generate a device wake-up

or interrupt, if enabled, if the device is in CPU Idle or

Sleep mode.

Independent of the timer being enabled, the input cap-

ture module will wake-up from the CPU Sleep or Idle

mode when a capture event occurs if ICM<2:0> = 111

and the interrupt enable bit is asserted. The same wake-

up can generate an interrupt if the conditions for pro-

cessing the interrupt have been satisfied. The wake-up

feature is useful as a method of adding extra external pin

interrupts.

11.2.1 INPUT CAPTURE IN CPU SLEEP

MODE

CPU Sleep mode allows input capture module opera-

tion with reduced functionality. In the CPU Sleep mode,

the ICI<1:0> bits are not applicable and the input cap-

ture module can only function as an external interrupt

source.

The capture module must be configured for interrupt

only on rising edge (ICM<2:0> = 111) in order for the

input capture module to be used while the device is in

Sleep mode. The prescale settings of 4:1 or 16:1 are

not applicable in this mode.

11.2.2 INPUT CAPTURE IN CPU IDLE

MODE

CPU Idle mode allows input capture module operation

with full functionality. In the CPU Idle mode, the Inter-

rupt mode selected by the ICI<1:0> bits is applicable,

as well as the 4:1 and 16:1 capture prescale settings

which are defined by control bits ICM<2:0>. This mode

requires the selected timer to be enabled. Moreover,

the ICSIDL bit must be asserted to a logic ‘0’.

If the input capture module is defined as

ICM<2:0> = 111 in CPU Idle mode, the input capture

pin will serve only as an external interrupt pin.

11.3 Input Capture Interrupts

The input capture channels have the ability to generate

an interrupt based upon the selected number of cap-

ture events. The selection number is set by control bits

ICI<1:0> (ICxCON<6:5>).

Each channel provides an interrupt flag (ICxIF) bit. The

respective capture channel interrupt flag is located in

the corresponding IFSx Status register.

Enabling an interrupt is accomplished via the respec-

tive capture channel interrupt enable (ICxIE) bit. The

capture interrupt enable bit is located in the

corresponding IEC Control register.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 79

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 11-1: INPUT CAPTURE REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

IC1BUF 0140 Input 1 Capture Register uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

IC1CON 0142 ——ICSIDL— — — — — ICTMR ICI<1:0> ICOV ICBNE ICM<2:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

IC2BUF 0144 Input 2 Capture Register uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu

IC2CON 0146 ——ICSIDL— — — — — ICTMR ICI<1:0> ICOV ICBNE ICM<2:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 80 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 81

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

12.0 OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE

This section describes the output compare module and

associated Operational modes. The features provided

by this module are useful in applications requiring

Operational modes, such as:

• Generation of Variable Width Output Pulses

• Power Factor Correction

Figure 12-1 depicts a block diagram of the output

compare module.

The key operational features of the output compare

module include:

• Timer2 and Timer3 Selection mode

• Simple Output Compare Match mode

• Dual Output Compare Match mode

• Simple PWM mode

• Output Compare During Sleep and Idle modes

• Interrupt on Output Compare/PWM Event

These operating modes are determined by setting the

appropriate bits in the 16-bit OC1CON and OC2CON

registers. The dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013 devices

have 2 compare channels.

OCxRS and OCxR in Figure 12-1 represent the Dual

Compare registers. In the Dual Compare mode, the

OCxR register is used for the first compare and OCxRS

is used for the second compare.

FIGURE 12-1: OUTPUT COMPARE MODE BLOCK DIAGRAM

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

OCxR

Comparator

Output

Logic

OCM<2:0>

Output OCx

Set Flag bit

OCxIF

OCxRS

Mode Select

Note: Where ‘x’ is shown, reference is made to the registers associated with the respective output compare

channel (1 or 2).

OCFA

OCTSEL 01

T2P2_MATCHTMR2<15:0 TMR3<15:0> T3P3_MATCH

From GP

(for x = 1, 2, 3 or 4)

Timer Module

Enable

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 82 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

12.1 Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode

Each output compare channel can select between one

of two 16-bit timers, Timer2 or Timer3.

The selection of the timers is controlled by the OCTSEL

bit (OCxCON<3>). Timer2 is the default timer resource

for the output compare module.

12.2 Simple Output Compare Match

Mode

When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 001,

010 or 011, the selected output compare channel is

configured for one of three simple Output Compare

Match modes:

• Compare forces I/O pin low

• Compare forces I/O pin high

• Compare toggles I/O pin

The OCxR register is used in these modes. The OCxR

selected incrementing timer count. When a compare

occurs, one of these Compare Match modes occurs. If

the counter resets to zero before reaching the value in

OCxR, the state of the OCx pin remains unchanged.

12.3 Dual Output Compare Match Mode

When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 100

or 101, the selected output compare channel is config-

ured for one of two Dual Output Compare modes,

which are:

• Single Output Pulse mode

• Continuous Output Pulse mode

12.3.1 SINGLE PULSE MODE

For the user to configure the module for the generation

of a single output pulse, the following steps are

required (assuming timer is off):

• Determine instruction cycle time TCY.

• Calculate desired pulse width value based on TCY.

• Calculate time to start pulse from timer start value

of 0x0000.

• Write pulse width start and stop times into OCxR

and OCxRS Compare registers (x denotes

channel 1, 2, ...,N).

• Set Timer Period register to value equal to, or

greater than value in OCxRS Compare register.

• Set OCM<2:0> = 100.

• Enable timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1.

To initiate another single pulse, issue another write to

set OCM<2:0> = 100.

12.3.2 CONTINUOUS PULSE MODE

For the user to configure the module for the generation

of a continuous stream of output pulses, the following

steps are required:

• Determine instruction cycle time TCY.

• Calculate desired pulse value based on TCY.

• Calculate timer to start pulse width from timer start

value of 0x0000.

• Write pulse width start and stop times into OCxR

and OCxRS (x denotes channel 1, 2, ...,N)

Compare registers, respectively.

• Set Timer Period register to value equal to, or

greater than value in OCxRS Compare register.

• Set OCM<2:0> = 101.

• Enable timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1.

12.4 Simple PWM Mode

When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 110

or 111, the selected output compare channel is config-

ured for the PWM mode of operation. When configured

for the PWM mode of operation, OCxR is the main latch

(read only) and OCxRS is the secondary latch. This

enables glitchless PWM transitions.

The user must perform the following steps in order to

configure the output compare module for PWM

operation:

1. Set the PWM period by writing to the appropriate

period register.

2. Set the PWM duty cycle by writing to the OCxRS

3. Configure the output compare module for PWM

operation.

4. Set the TMRx prescale value and enable the

Timer, TON (TxCON<15>) = 1.

12.4.1 INPUT PIN FAULT PROTECTION

FOR PWM

When control bits OCM<2:0> (OCxCON<2:0>) = 111,

the selected output compare channel is again config-

ured for the PWM mode of operation with the additional

feature of input FAULT protection. While in this mode,

if a logic ‘0’ is detected on the OCFA/B pin, the respec-

tive PWM output pin is placed in the high impedance

input state. The OCFLT bit (OCxCON<4>) indicates

whether a FAULT condition has occurred. This state will

be maintained until both of the following events have

occurred:

• The external FAULT condition has been removed.

• The PWM mode has been re-enabled by writing

to the appropriate control bits.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 83

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

12.4.2 PWM PERIOD

The PWM period is specified by writing to the PRx

Equation 12-1.

EQUATION 12-1:

PWM frequency is defined as 1 / [PWM period].

When the selected TMRx is equal to its respective

period register, PRx, the following four events occur on

the next increment cycle:

• TMRx is cleared.

• The OCx pin is set.

- Exception 1: If PWM duty cycle is 0x0000,

the OCx pin will remain low.

- Exception 2: If duty cycle is greater than PRx,

the pin will remain high.

• The PWM duty cycle is latched from OCxRS into

OCxR.

• The corresponding timer interrupt flag is set.

See Figure 12-2 for key PWM period comparisons.

Timer3 is referred to in Figure 12-2 for clarity.

FIGURE 12-2: PWM OUTPUT TIMING

12.5 Output Compare Operation During

CPU Sleep Mode

When the CPU enters Sleep mode, all internal clocks

are stopped. Therefore, when the CPU enters the

Sleep state, the output compare channel will drive the

pin to the active state that was observed prior to

entering the CPU Sleep state.

For example, if the pin was high when the CPU entered

the Sleep state, the pin will remain high. Likewise, if the

pin was low when the CPU entered the Sleep state, the

pin will remain low. In either case, the output compare

module will resume operation when the device wakes

up.

12.6 Output Compare Operation During

CPU Idle Mode

When the CPU enters the Idle mode, the output

compare module can operate with full functionality.

The output compare channel will operate during the

CPU Idle mode if the OCSIDL bit (OCxCON<13>) is at

logic ‘0’ and the selected time base (Timer2 or Timer3)

is enabled and the TSIDL bit of the selected timer is set

to logic ‘0’.

12.7 Output Compare Interrupts

The output compare channels have the ability to gener-

ate an interrupt on a compare match, for whichever

Match mode has been selected.

For all modes except the PWM mode, when a compare

event occurs, the respective interrupt flag (OCxIF) is

asserted and an interrupt will be generated if enabled.

The OCxIF bit is located in the corresponding IFS

Status register and must be cleared in software. The

interrupt is enabled via the respective compare inter-

rupt enable (OCxIE) bit located in the corresponding

IEC Control register.

For the PWM mode, when an event occurs, the respec-

tive timer interrupt flag (T2IF or T3IF) is asserted and

an interrupt will be generated if enabled. The IF bit is

located in the IFS0 Status register and must be cleared

in software. The interrupt is enabled via the respective

timer interrupt enable bit (T2IE or T3IE) located in the

IEC0 Control register. The output compare interrupt

flag is never set during the PWM mode of operation.

PWM period = [(PRx) + 1] • 4 • TOSC •

(TMRx prescale value)

Period

Duty Cycle

TMR3 = Duty Cycle TMR3 = Duty Cycle

TMR3 = PR3

T3IF = 1

(Interrupt Flag)

OCxR = OCxRS

TMR3 = PR3

(Interrupt Flag)

OCxR = OCxRS

T3IF = 1

(OCxR) (OCxR)

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 84 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 12-1: OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

OC1RS 0180 Output Compare 1 Secondary Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

OC1R 0182 Output Compare 1 Main Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

OC1CON 0184 ——OCSIDL— — — — — — — — OCFLT OCTSEL OCM<2:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

OC2RS 0186 Output Compare 2 Secondary Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

OC2R 0188 Output Compare 2 Main Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

OC2CON 018A ——OCSIDL— — — — — — — — OCFLT OCTSE OCM<2:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 85

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

13.0 SPI MODULE

The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) module is a syn-

chronous serial interface. It is useful for communicating

with other peripheral devices, such as EEPROMs, shift

registers, display drivers and A/D converters, or other

microcontrollers. It is compatible with Motorola's SPI

and SIOP interfaces. The dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/

3013 devices feature one SPI module, SPI1.

13.1 Operating Function Description

Figure 13-1 is a simplified block diagram of the SPI

module, which consists of a 16-bit shift register,

SPI1SR , used for shifting data in and out, and a buffer

shown) configures the module. Additionally, status reg-

ister SPI1STAT (not shown) indicates various status

conditions.

Four I/O pins comprise the serial interface:

• SDI1 (serial data input)

• SDO1 (serial data output)

• SCK1 (shift clock input or output)

• SS1 (active low slave select).

In Master mode operation, SCK1 is a clock output. In

Slave mode, it is a clock input.

A series of eight (8) or sixteen (16) clock pulses shift

out bits from the SPI1SR to SDO1 pin and simulta-

neously shift in data from SDI1 pin. An interrupt is

generated when the transfer is complete and the

interrupt flag bit (SPI1IF) is set. This interrupt can be

disabled through the interrupt enable bit SPI1IE.

The receive operation is double-buffered. When a com-

plete byte is received, it is transferred from SPI1SR to

SPI1BUF.

If the receive buffer is full when new data is being trans-

ferred from SPI1SR to SPI1BUF, the module will set the

SPIROV bit indicating an overflow condition. The trans-

fer of the data from SPI1SR to SPI1BUF will not be

completed and the new data will be lost. The module

will not respond to SCL transitions while SPIROV is ‘1’,

effectively disabling the module until SPI1BUF is read

by user software.

Transmit writes are also double-buffered. The user

writes to SPI1BUF. When the master or slave transfer

is completed, the contents of the shift register

(SPI1SR) are moved to the receive buffer. If any trans-

mit data has been written to the buffer register, the con-

tents of the transmit buffer are moved to SPI1SR. The

received data is thus placed in SPI1BUF and the trans-

mit data in SPI1SR is ready for the next transfer.

FIGURE 13-1: SPI BLOCK DIAGRAM

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

Note: See dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual

(DS70046) for detailed information on the

control and status registers.

Note: Both the transmit buffer (SPI1TXB) and

the receive buffer (SPI1RXB) are mapped

to the same register address, SPI1BUF.

Read Write

Internal

Data Bus

SDI1

SDO1

SS1

SCK1

SPI1SR

SPIxBUF

bit 0

Shift

Clock

Edge

Select

FCY

Primary

1, 4, 16, 64

Enable Master Clock

Prescaler

Secondary

Prescaler

1, 2, 4, 6, 8

SS & FSYNC

Control

Clock

Control

Transmit

SPIxBUF

Receive

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 86 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Figure 13-2 depicts the a master/slave connection

between two processors. In Master mode, the clock is

generated by prescaling the system clock. Data is

transmitted as soon as a value is written to SPI1BUF.

The interrupt is generated at the middle of the transfer

of the last bit.

In Slave mode, data is transmitted and received as

external clock pulses appear on SCK. Again, the inter-

rupt is generated when the last bit is latched. If SS1

control is enabled, then transmission and reception are

enabled only when SS1 = low. The SDO1 output will be

disabled in SS1 mode with SS1 high.

The clock provided to the module is (FOSC/4). This

clock is then prescaled by the primary (PPRE<1:0>)

and the secondary (SPRE<2:0>) prescale factors. The

CKE bit determines whether transmit occurs on transi-

tion from active clock state to Idle clock state, or vice

versa. The CKP bit selects the Idle state (high or low)

for the clock.

13.1.1 WORD AND BYTE

COMMUNICATION

A control bit, MODE16 (SPI1CON<10>), allows the

module to communicate in either 16-bit or 8-bit mode.

16-bit operation is identical to 8-bit operation except

that the number of bits transmitted is 16 instead of 8.

The user software must disable the module prior to

changing the MODE16 bit. The SPI module is reset

when the MODE16 bit is changed by the user.

A basic difference between 8-bit and 16-bit operation is

that the data is transmitted out of bit 7 of the SPI1SR

for 8-bit operation, and data is transmitted out of bit15

of the SPI1SR for 16-bit operation. In both modes, data

is shifted into bit 0 of the SPI1SR.

13.1.2 SDO1 DISABLE

A control bit, DISSDO, is provided to the SPI1CON reg-

ister to allow the SDO1 output to be disabled. This will

allow the SPI module to be connected in an input only

configuration. SDO1 can also be used for general

purpose I/O.

13.2 Framed SPI Support

The module supports a basic framed SPI protocol in

Master or Slave mode. The control bit FRMEN enables

framed SPI support and causes the SS1 pin to perform

the frame synchronization pulse (FSYNC) function.

The control bit SPIFSD determines whether the SS1

pin is an input or an output (i.e., whether the module

receives or generates the frame synchronization

pulse). The frame pulse is an active high pulse for a

single SPI clock cycle. When frame synchronization is

enabled, the data transmission starts only on the

subsequent transmit edge of the SPI clock.

FIGURE 13-2: SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION

Serial Input Buffer

(SPI1BUF)

Shift Register

(SPI1SR)

MSb LSb

SDO1

SDI1

PROCESSOR 1

SCK1

SPI™ Master

Serial Input Buffer

(SPI1BUF)

Shift Register

(SPI1SR)

LSb

MSb

SDI1

SDO1

PROCESSOR 2

SCK1

SPI™ Slave

Serial Clock

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 87

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

13.3 Slave Select Synchronization

The SS1 pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The

SPI must be configured in SPI Slave mode with SS1

pin control enabled (SSEN = 1). When the SS1 pin is

low, transmission and reception are enabled and the

SDOx pin is driven. When SS1 pin goes high, the

SDOx pin is no longer driven. Also, the SPI module is

re-synchronized, and all counters/control circuitry are

reset. Therefore, when the SS1 pin is asserted low

again, transmission/reception will begin at the MS bit

even if SS1 had been de-asserted in the middle of a

transmit/receive.

13.4 SPI Operation During CPU Sleep

Mode

During Sleep mode, the SPI module is shutdown. If the

CPU enters Sleep mode while an SPI transaction is in

progress, then the transmission and reception is

aborted.

The transmitter and receiver will stop in Sleep mode.

However, register contents are not affected by entering

or exiting Sleep mode.

13.5 SPI Operation During CPU Idle

Mode

When the device enters Idle mode, all clock sources

remain functional. The SPISIDL bit (SPI1STAT<13>)

selects if the SPI module will stop or continue on Idle. If

SPISIDL = 0, the module will continue to operate when

the CPU enters Idle mode. If SPISIDL = 1, the module

will stop when the CPU enters Idle mode.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 88 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 13-1: SPI1 REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

SPI1STAT 0220 SPIEN — SPISIDL — — — — — —SPIROV — — — — SPITBF SPIRBF 0000 0000 0000 0000

SPI1CON 0222 — FRMEN SPIFSD — DISSDO MODE16 SMP CKE SSEN CKP MSTEN SPRE2 SPRE1 SPRE0 PPRE1 PPRE0 0000 0000 0000 0000

SPI1BUF 0224 Transmit and Receive Buffer 0000 0000 0000 0000

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 89

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

14.0 I2C MODULE

The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2CTM) module provides

complete hardware support for both Slave and Multi-

Master modes of the I2C serial communication

standard, with a 16-bit interface.

This module offers the following key features:

•I

2C interface supporting both master and slave

operation.

•I

2C Slave mode supports 7 and 10-bit address.

•I

2C Master mode supports 7 and 10-bit address.

•I

2C port allows bidirectional transfers between

master and slaves.

• Serial clock synchronization for I2C port can be

used as a handshake mechanism to suspend and

resume serial transfer (SCLREL control).

•I

2C supports multi-master operation; detects bus

collision and will arbitrate accordingly.

14.1 Operating Function Description

The hardware fully implements all the master and slave

functions of the I2C Standard and Fast mode

specifications, as well as 7 and 10-bit addressing.

Thus, the I2C module can operate either as a slave or

a master on an I2C bus.

14.1.1 VARIOUS I2C MODES

The following types of I2C operation are supported:

•I

2C slave operation with 7-bit address

•I

2C slave operation with 10-bit address

•I

2C master operation with 7 or 10-bit address

See the I2C programmer’s model (Figure 14-1).

14.1.2 PIN CONFIGURATION IN I2C MODE

I2C has a 2-pin interface: the SCL pin is clock and the

SDA pin is data.

14.1.3 I2C REGISTERS

I2CCON and I2CSTAT are control and status registers,

respectively. The I2CCON register is readable and writ-

able. The lower 6 bits of I2CSTAT are read only. The

remaining bits of the I2CSTAT are read/write.

I2CRSR is the shift register used for shifting data,

whereas I2CRCV is the buffer register to which data

bytes are written, or from which data bytes are read.

I2CRCV is the receive buffer as shown in Figure 14-1.

I2CTRN is the transmit register to which bytes are

written during a transmit operation, as shown in

Figure 14-2.

The I2CADD register holds the slave address. A status

bit, ADD10, indicates 10-bit Address mode. The

I2CBRG acts as the baud rate generator reload value.

In receive operations, I2CRSR and I2CRCV together

form a double-buffered receiver. When I2CRSR

receives a complete byte, it is transferred to I2CRCV

and an interrupt pulse is generated. During

transmission, the I2CTRN is not double-buffered.

FIGURE 14-1: PROGRAMMER’S MODEL

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

Note: Following a RESTART condition in 10-bit

mode, the user only needs to match the

first 7-bit address.

Bit 7 Bit 0

I2CRCV (8 bits)

Bit 7 Bit 0

I2CTRN (8 bits)

Bit 8 Bit 0

I2CBRG (9 bits)

Bit 15 Bit 0

I2CCON (16 bits)

Bit 15 Bit 0

I2CSTAT (16 bits)

Bit 9 Bit 0

I2CADD (10 bits)

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 90 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 14-2: I2C BLOCK DIAGRAM

I2CRSR

I2CRCV

Internal

Data Bus

SCL

SDA

Shift

Match Detect

I2CADD

Start and

Stop bit Detect

Clock

Addr_Match

Clock

Stretching

I2CTRN

LSB

Shift

Clock

Write

Read

BRG Down I2CBRG

Reload

Control

FCY

Start, RESTART,

Stop bit Generate

Write

Read

Acknowledge

Generation

Collision

Detect

Write

Read

Write

Read

I2CCON

Write

Read

I2CSTAT

Control Logic

Read

LSB

Counter

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 91

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

14.2 I2C Module Addresses

The I2CADD register contains the Slave mode

addresses. The register is a 10-bit register.

If the A10M bit (I2CCON<10>) is ‘0’, the address is

interpreted by the module as a 7-bit address. When an

address is received, it is compared to the 7 LS bits of

the I2CADD register.

If the A10M bit is ‘1’, the address is assumed to be a

10-bit address. When an address is received, it will be

compared with the binary value ‘11110 A9 A8’ (where

A9 and A8 are two Most Significant bits of I2CADD). If

that value matches, the next address will be compared

with the Least Significant 8 bits of I2CADD, as specified

in the 10-bit addressing protocol.

The 7-bit I2C Slave Addresses supported by the

dsPIC30Fare shown in Table 14-1.

TABLE 14-1: 7-BIT I2C SLAVE ADDRESSES

14.3 I2C 7-bit Slave Mode Operation

Once enabled (I2CEN = 1), the slave module will wait

for a Start bit to occur (i.e., the I2C module is ‘Idle’). Fol-

lowing the detection of a Start bit, 8 bits are shifted into

I2CRSR and the address is compared against

I2CADD. In 7-bit mode (A10M = 0), bits I2CADD<6:0>

are compared against I2CRSR<7:1> and I2CRSR<0>

is the R_W bit. All incoming bits are sampled on the ris-

ing edge of SCL.

If an address match occurs, an Acknowledgement will

be sent, and the slave event interrupt flag (SI2CIF) is

set on the falling edge of the ninth (ACK) bit. The

address match does not affect the contents of the

I2CRCV buffer or the RBF bit.

14.3.1 SLAVE TRANSMISSION

If the R_W bit received is a ‘1’, then the serial port will

go into Transmit mode. It will send ACK on the ninth bit

and then hold SCL to ‘0’ until the CPU responds by writ-

ing to I2CTRN. SCL is released by setting the SCLREL

bit, and 8 bits of data are shifted out. Data bits are

shifted out on the falling edge of SCL, such that SDA is

valid during SCL high. The interrupt pulse is sent on the

falling edge of the ninth clock pulse, regardless of the

status of the ACK received from the master.

14.3.2 SLAVE RECEPTION

If the R_W bit received is a ‘0’ during an address

match, then Receive mode is initiated. Incoming bits

are sampled on the rising edge of SCL. After 8 bits are

received, if I2CRCV is not full or I2COV is not set,

I2CRSR is transferred to I2CRCV. ACK is sent on the

ninth clock.

If the RBF flag is set, indicating that I2CRCV is still

holding data from a previous operation (RBF = 1), then

ACK is not sent; however, the interrupt pulse is gener-

ated. In the case of an overflow, the contents of the

I2CRSR are not loaded into the I2CRCV.

14.4 I2C 10-bit Slave Mode Operation

In 10-bit mode, the basic receive and transmit opera-

tions are the same as in the 7-bit mode. However, the

criteria for address match is more complex.

The I2C specification dictates that a slave must be

addressed for a write operation with two address bytes

following a Start bit.

The A10M bit is a control bit that signifies that the

address in I2CADD is a 10-bit address rather than a 7-bit

address. The address detection protocol for the first byte

of a message address is identical for 7-bit and 10-bit

messages, but the bits being compared are different.

I2CADD holds the entire 10-bit address. Upon receiv-

ing an address following a Start bit, I2CRSR <7:3> is

compared against a literal ‘11110’ (the default 10-bit

address) and I2CRSR<2:1> are compared against

I2CADD<9:8>. If a match occurs and if R_W = 0, the

interrupt pulse is sent. The ADD10 bit will be cleared to

indicate a partial address match. If a match fails or

R_W = 1, the ADD10 bit is cleared and the module

returns to the Idle state.

The low byte of the address is then received and com-

pared with I2CADD<7:0>. If an address match occurs,

the interrupt pulse is generated and the ADD10 bit is

set, indicating a complete 10-bit address match. If an

address match did not occur, the ADD10 bit is cleared

and the module returns to the Idle state.

0x00 General call address or start byte

0x01-0x03 Reserved

0x04-0x77 Valid 7-bit addresses

0x78-0x7b Valid 10-bit addresses (lower 7

bits)

0x7c-0x7f Reserved

Note: The I2CRCV will be loaded if the I2COV

bit = 1 and the RBF flag = 0. In this case,

a read of the I2CRCV was performed but

the user did not clear the state of the

I2COV bit before the next receive

occurred. The Acknowledgement is not

sent (ACK = 1) and the I2CRCV is

updated.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 92 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

14.4.1 10-BIT MODE SLAVE

TRANSMISSION

Once a slave is addressed in this fashion with the full

10-bit address (we will refer to this state as

“PRIOR_ADDR_MATCH”), the master can begin

sending data bytes for a slave reception operation.

14.4.2 10-BIT MODE SLAVE RECEPTION

Once addressed, the master can generate a Repeated

Start, reset the high byte of the address and set the

R_W bit without generating a Stop bit, thus initiating a

slave transmit operation.

14.5 Automatic Clock Stretch

In the Slave modes, the module can synchronize buffer

reads and write to the master device by clock stretching.

14.5.1 TRANSMIT CLOCK STRETCHING

Both 10-bit and 7-bit Transmit modes implement clock

stretching by asserting the SCLREL bit after the falling

edge of the ninth clock, if the TBF bit is cleared, indicat-

ing the buffer is empty.

In Slave Transmit modes, clock stretching is always

performed irrespective of the STREN bit.

Clock synchronization takes place following the ninth

clock of the transmit sequence. If the device samples

an ACK on the falling edge of the ninth clock and if the

TBF bit is still clear, then the SCLREL bit is automati-

cally cleared. The SCLREL being cleared to ‘0’ will

assert the SCL line low. The user’s ISR must set the

SCLREL bit before transmission is allowed to continue.

By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to ser-

vice the ISR and load the contents of the I2CTRN

before the master device can initiate another transmit

sequence.

14.5.2 RECEIVE CLOCK STRETCHING

The STREN bit in the I2CCON register can be used to

enable clock stretching in Slave Receive mode. When

the STREN bit is set, the SCL pin will be held low at the

end of each data receive sequence.

14.5.3 CLOCK STRETCHING DURING

7-BIT ADDRESSING (STREN = 1)

When the STREN bit is set in Slave Receive mode, the

SCL line is held low when the buffer register is full. The

method for stretching the SCL output is the same for

both 7 and 10-bit Addressing modes.

Clock stretching takes place following the ninth clock of

the receive sequence. On the falling edge of the ninth

clock at the end of the ACK sequence, if the RBF bit is

set, the SCLREL bit is automatically cleared, forcing

the SCL output to be held low. The user’s ISR must set

the SCLREL bit before reception is allowed to continue.

By holding the SCL line low, the user has time to ser-

vice the ISR and read the contents of the I2CRCV

before the master device can initiate another receive

sequence. This will prevent buffer overruns from

occurring.

14.5.4 CLOCK STRETCHING DURING

10-BIT ADDRESSING (STREN = 1)

Clock stretching takes place automatically during the

addressing sequence. Because this module has a

the protocol to wait for the address to be updated.

After the address phase is complete, clock stretching

will occur on each data receive or transmit sequence as

was described earlier.

14.6 Software Controlled Clock

Stretching (STREN = 1)

When the STREN bit is ‘1’, the SCLREL bit may be

cleared by software to allow software to control the

clock stretching. The logic will synchronize writes to the

SCLREL bit with the SCL clock. Clearing the SCLREL

bit will not assert the SCL output until the module

detects a falling edge on the SCL output and SCL is

sampled low. If the SCLREL bit is cleared by the user

while the SCL line has been sampled low, the SCL out-

put will be asserted (held low). The SCL output will

remain low until the SCLREL bit is set, and all other

devices on the I2C bus have de-asserted SCL. This

ensures that a write to the SCLREL bit will not violate

the minimum high time requirement for SCL.

If the STREN bit is ‘0’, a software write to the SCLREL

bit will be disregarded and have no effect on the

SCLREL bit.

Note 1: If the user loads the contents of I2CTRN,

setting the TBF bit before the falling edge

of the ninth clock, the SCLREL bit will not

be cleared and clock stretching will not

occur.

2: The SCLREL bit can be set in software,

regardless of the state of the TBF bit.

Note 1: If the user reads the contents of the

I2CRCV, clearing the RBF bit before the

falling edge of the ninth clock, the

SCLREL bit will not be cleared and clock

stretching will not occur.

2: The SCLREL bit can be set in software

regardless of the state of the RBF bit. The

user should be careful to clear the RBF bit

in the ISR before the next receive

sequence in order to prevent an overflow

condition.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 93

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

14.7 Interrupts

The I2C module generates two interrupt flags, MI2CIF

(I2C Master Interrupt Flag) and SI2CIF (I2C Slave Inter-

rupt Flag). The MI2CIF interrupt flag is activated on

completion of a master message event. The SI2CIF

interrupt flag is activated on detection of a message

directed to the slave.

14.8 Slope Control

The I2C standard requires slope control on the SDA

and SCL signals for Fast mode (400 kHz). The control

bit, DISSLW, enables the user to disable slew rate con-

trol if desired. It is necessary to disable the slew rate

control for 1 MHz mode.

14.9 IPMI Support

The control bit, IPMIEN, enables the module to support

Intelligent Peripheral Management Interface (IPMI).

When this bit is set, the module accepts and acts upon

all addresses.

14.10 General Call Address Support

The general call address can address all devices.

When this address is used, all devices should, in

theory, respond with an Acknowledgement.

The general call address is one of eight addresses

reserved for specific purposes by the I2C protocol. It

consists of all ‘0’s with R_W = 0.

The general call address is recognized when the Gen-

eral Call Enable (GCEN) bit is set (I2CCON<15> = 1).

Following a Start bit detection, 8 bits are shifted into

I2CRSR and the address is compared with I2CADD,

and is also compared with the general call address

which is fixed in hardware.

If a general call address match occurs, the I2CRSR is

transferred to the I2CRCV after the eighth clock, the

RBF flag is set and on the falling edge of the ninth bit

(ACK bit), the master event interrupt flag (MI2CIF) is

set.

When the interrupt is serviced, the source for the inter-

rupt can be checked by reading the contents of the

I2CRCV to determine if the address was device

specific or a general call address.

14.11 I2C Master Support

As a master device, six operations are supported:

• Assert a Start condition on SDA and SCL.

• Assert a RESTART condition on SDA and SCL.

• Write to the I2CTRN register initiating

transmission of data/address.

• Generate a Stop condition on SDA and SCL.

• Configure the I2C port to receive data.

• Generate an ACK condition at the end of a

received byte of data.

14.12 I2C Master Operation

The master device generates all of the serial clock

pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is

ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start

condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also

the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will

not be released.

In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output

through SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. The

first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the

receiving device (7 bits) and the data direction bit. In

this case, the data direction bit (R_W) is logic ‘0’. Serial

data is transmitted 8 bits at a time. After each byte is

transmitted, an ACK bit is received. Start and Stop con-

ditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end

of a serial transfer.

In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted con-

tains the slave address of the transmitting device

(7 bits) and the data direction bit. In this case, the data

direction bit (R_W) is logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte trans-

mitted is a 7-bit slave address, followed by a ‘1’ to indi-

cate receive bit. Serial data is received via SDA while

SCL outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received

8 bits at a time. After each byte is received, an ACK bit

is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the

beginning and end of transmission.

14.12.1 I2C MASTER TRANSMISSION

Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address, or the sec-

ond half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply

writing a value to I2CTRN register. The user should

only write to I2CTRN when the module is in a WAIT

state. This action will set the Buffer Full Flag (TBF) and

allow the baud rate generator to begin counting and

start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data

will be shifted out onto the SDA pin after the falling

edge of SCL is asserted. The Transmit Status Flag,

TRSTAT (I2CSTAT<14>), indicates that a master

transmit is in progress.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 94 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

14.12.2 I2C MASTER RECEPTION

Master mode reception is enabled by programming the

Receive Enable bit, RCEN (I2CCON<11>). The I2C

module must be Idle before the RCEN bit is set, other-

wise the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The baud rate

generator begins counting and on each rollover, the

state of the SCL pin ACK and data are shifted into the

I2CRSR on the rising edge of each clock.

14.12.3 BAUD RATE GENERATOR

In I2C Master mode, the reload value for the BRG is

located in the I2CBRG register. When the BRG is

loaded with this value, the BRG counts down to ‘0’ and

stops until another reload has taken place. If clock arbi-

tration is taking place, for instance, the BRG is reloaded

when the SCL pin is sampled high.

As per the I2C standard, FSCK may be 100 kHz or

400 kHz. However, the user can specify any baud rate

up to 1 MHz. I2CBRG values of ‘0’ or ‘1’ are illegal.

EQUATION 14-1: SERIAL CLOCK RATE

14.12.4 CLOCK ARBITRATION

Clock arbitration occurs when the master de-asserts

the SCL pin (SCL allowed to float high) during any

receive, transmit, or RESTART/Stop condition. When

the SCL pin is allowed to float high, the baud rate gen-

erator (BRG) is suspended from counting until the SCL

pin is actually sampled high. When the SCL pin is sam-

pled high, the baud rate generator is reloaded with the

contents of I2CBRG and begins counting. This ensures

that the SCL high time will always be at least one BRG

rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by

an external device.

14.12.5 MULTI-MASTER COMMUNICATION,

BUS COLLISION, AND BUS

ARBITRATION

Multi-master operation support is achieved by bus arbi-

tration. When the master outputs address/data bits

onto the SDA pin, arbitration takes place when the

master outputs a ‘1’ on SDA by letting SDA float high

while another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCL pin

floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data

on SDA is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDA

pin = 0, then a bus collision has taken place. The

master will set the MI2CIF pulse and reset the master

portion of the I2C port to its Idle state.

If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision

occurred, the transmission is halted, the TBF flag is

cleared, the SDA and SCL lines are de-asserted and a

value can now be written to I2CTRN. When the user

services the I2C master event Interrupt Service Rou-

tine, if the I2C bus is free (i.e., the P bit is set), the user

can resume communication by asserting a Start

condition.

If a Start, RESTART, Stop or Acknowledge condition

was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the

condition is aborted, the SDA and SCL lines are de-

asserted, and the respective control bits in the I2CCON

bus collision Interrupt Service Routine, and if the I2C

bus is free, the user can resume communication by

asserting a Start condition.

The master will continue to monitor the SDA and SCL

pins, and if a Stop condition occurs, the MI2CIF bit will

be set.

A write to the I2CTRN will start the transmission of data

at the first data bit regardless of where the transmitter

left off when bus collision occurred.

In a multi-master environment, the interrupt generation

on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the

determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C

bus can be taken when the P bit is set in the I2CSTAT

cleared.

14.13 I2C Module Operation During CPU

Sleep and Idle Modes

14.13.1 I2C OPERATION DURING CPU

SLEEP MODE

When the device enters Sleep mode, all clock sources

to the module are shutdown and stay at logic ‘0’. If

Sleep occurs in the middle of a transmission and the

state machine is partially into a transmission as the

clocks stop, then the transmission is aborted. Similarly,

if Sleep occurs in the middle of a reception, then the

reception is aborted.

14.13.2 I2C OPERATION DURING CPU IDLE

MODE

For the I2C, the I2CSIDL bit selects if the module will

stop on Idle or continue on Idle. If I2CSIDL = 0, the

module will continue operation on assertion of the Idle

mode. If I2CSIDL = 1, the module will stop on Idle.

I2CBRG = FCY FCY

FSCK 1,111,111 – 1

–

()

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 95

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 14-2: I2C REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

I2CRCV 0200 — — — — — — — — Receive Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

I2CTRN 0202 — — — — — — — — Transmit Register 0000 0000 1111 1111

I2CBRG 0204 — — — — — — — Baud Rate Generator 0000 0000 0000 0000

I2CCON 0206 I2CEN — I2CSIDL SCLREL IPMIEN A10M DISSLW SMEN GCEN STREN ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 0001 0000 0000 0000

I2CSTAT 0208 ACKSTAT TRSTAT — — — BCL GCSTAT ADD10 IWCOL I2COV D_A P S R_W RBF TBF 0000 0000 0000 0000

I2CADD 020A — — — — — — Address Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 96 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 97

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

15.0 UNIVERSAL ASYNCHRONOUS

RECEIVER TRANSMITTER

(UART) MODULE

This section describes the Universal Asynchronous

Receiver/Transmitter Communications module. The

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012 processors have one UART

module (UART1). The dsPIC30F3013 processor has

two UART modules (UART1 and UART2).

15.1 UART Module Overview

The key features of the UART module are:

• Full-duplex, 8 or 9-bit data communication

• Even, odd or no parity options (for 8-bit data)

• One or two Stop bits

• Fully integrated baud rate generator with 16-bit

prescaler

• Baud rates range from 38 bps to 1.875 Mbps at a

30 MHz instruction rate

• 4-word deep transmit data buffer

• 4-word deep receive data buffer

• Parity, framing and buffer overrun error detection

• Support for interrupt only on address detect

(9th bit = 1)

• Separate transmit and receive interrupts

• Loopback mode for diagnostic support

• Alternate receive and transmit pins for UART1

FIGURE 15-1: UART TRANSMITTER BLOCK DIAGRAM

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

Write Write

UTX8 UxTXREG Low Byte

Load TSR

Transmit Control

– Control TSR

– Control Buffer

– Generate Flags

– Generate Interrupt

Control and Status bits

UxTXIF

Data

‘0’ (Start)

‘1’ (Stop)

Parity Parity

Generator

Transmit Shift Register (UxTSR)

16 Divider

Control

Signals

16x Baud Clock

from Baud Rate

Generator

Internal Data Bus

UTXBRK

UxTX

Note: x = 1 or 2.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 98 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 15-2: UART RECEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM

Read

URX8 UxRXREG Low Byte

Load RSR

UxMODE

Receive Buffer Control

– Generate Flags

– Generate Interrupt

UxRXIF

UxRX

· Start bit Detect

Receive Shift Register

16 Divider

Control

Signals

UxSTA

– Shift Data Characters

Read Read

Write Write

to Buffer

8-9

(UxRSR)

PERR

FERR

· Parity Check

· Stop bit Detect

· Shift Clock Generation

· Wake Logic

Internal Data Bus

LPBACK

From UxTX

16x Baud Clock from

Baud Rate Generator

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 99

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

15.2 Enabling and Setting Up UART

15.2.1 ENABLING THE UART

The UART module is enabled by setting the UARTEN

bit in the UxMODE register (where x = 1 or 2). Once

enabled, the UxTX and UxRX pins are configured as an

output and an input respectively, overriding the TRIS

and LATCH register bit settings for the corresponding

I/O port pins. The UxTX pin is at logic ‘1’ when no

transmission is taking place.

15.2.2 DISABLING THE UART

The UART module is disabled by clearing the UARTEN

bit in the UxMODE register. This is the default state

after any Reset. If the UART is disabled, all I/O pins

operate as port pins under the control of the latch and

TRIS bits of the corresponding port pins.

Disabling the UART module resets the buffers to empty

states. Any data characters in the buffers are lost and

the baud rate counter is reset.

All error and status flags associated with the UART

module are reset when the module is disabled. The

URXDA, OERR, FERR, PERR, UTXEN, UTXBRK and

UTXBF bits are cleared, whereas RIDLE and TRMT

are set. Other control bits, including ADDEN,

URXISEL<1:0>, UTXISEL, as well as the UxMODE

and UxBRG registers, are not affected.

Clearing the UARTEN bit while the UART is active will

abort all pending transmissions and receptions and

reset the module as defined above. Re-enabling the

UART will restart the UART in the same configuration.

15.2.3 ALTERNATE I/O

The alternate I/O function is enabled by setting the

ALTIO bit (UxMODE<10>). If ALTIO = 1, the UxATX

and UxARX pins (alternate transmit and alternate

receive pins, respectively) are used by the UART mod-

ule instead of the UxTX and UxRX pins. If ALTIO = 0,

the UxTX and UxRX pins are used by the UART

module.

15.2.4 SETTING UP DATA, PARITY AND

STOP BIT SELECTIONS

Control bits PDSEL<1:0> in the UxMODE register are

used to select the data length and parity used in the

transmission. The data length may either be 8 bits with

even, odd or no parity, or 9 bits with no parity.

The STSEL bit determines whether one or two Stop bits

will be used during data transmission.

The default (power-on) setting of the UART is 8 bits, no

parity and 1 Stop bit (typically represented as 8, N, 1).

15.3 Transmitting Data

15.3.1 TRANSMITTING IN 8-BIT DATA

MODE

The following steps must be performed in order to

transmit 8-bit data:

1. Set up the UART:

First, the data length, parity and number of Stop

bits must be selected. Then, the transmit and

receive interrupt enable and priority bits are

setup in the UxMODE and UxSTA registers.

Also, the appropriate baud rate value must be

written to the UxBRG register.

2. Enable the UART by setting the UARTEN bit

(UxMODE<15>).

3. Set the UTXEN bit (UxSTA<10>), thereby

enabling a transmission.

4. Write the byte to be transmitted to the lower byte

of UxTXREG. The value will be transferred to the

Transmit Shift register (UxTSR) immediately

and the serial bit stream will start shifting out

during the next rising edge of the baud clock.

Alternatively, the data byte may be written while

UTXEN = 0, following which, the user may set

UTXEN. This will cause the serial bit stream to

begin immediately because the baud clock will

start from a cleared state.

5. A transmit interrupt will be generated, depend-

ing on the value of the interrupt control bit

UTXISEL (UxSTA<15>).

15.3.2 TRANSMITTING IN 9-BIT DATA

MODE

The sequence of steps involved in the transmission of

9-bit data is similar to 8-bit transmission, except that a

16-bit data word (of which the upper 7 bits are always

clear) must be written to the UxTXREG register.

15.3.3 TRANSMIT BUFFER (UXTXB)

The transmit buffer is 9 bits wide and 4 characters

deep. Including the Transmit Shift register (UxTSR),

the user effectively has a 5-deep FIFO (First-In, First-

Out) buffer. The UTXBF status bit (UxSTA<9>)

indicates whether the transmit buffer is full.

If a user attempts to write to a full buffer, the new data

will not be accepted into the FIFO, and no data shift will

occur within the buffer. This enables recovery from a

buffer overrun condition.

The FIFO is reset during any device Reset but is not

affected when the device enters or wakes up from a

Power Saving mode.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 100 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

15.3.4 TRANSMIT INTERRUPT

The transmit interrupt flag (U1TXIF or U2TXIF) is

located in the corresponding interrupt flag register.

The transmitter generates an edge to set the UxTXIF

bit. The condition for generating the interrupt depends

on the UTXISEL control bit:

a) If UTXISEL = 0, an interrupt is generated when

a word is transferred from the transmit buffer to

the Transmit Shift register (UxTSR). This implies

that the transmit buffer has at least one empty

word.

b) If UTXISEL = 1, an interrupt is generated when

a word is transferred from the transmit buffer to

the Transmit Shift register (UxTSR) and the

transmit buffer is empty.

Switching between the two Interrupt modes during

operation is possible and sometimes offers more

flexibility.

15.3.5 TRANSMIT BREAK

Setting the UTXBRK bit (UxSTA<11>) will cause the

UxTX line to be driven to logic ‘0’. The UTXBRK bit

overrides all transmission activity. Therefore, the user

should generally wait for the transmitter to be Idle

before setting UTXBRK.

To send a break character, the UTXBRK bit must be set

by software and must remain set for a minimum of 13

baud clock cycles. The UTXBRK bit is then cleared by

software to generate Stop bits. The user must wait for

a duration of at least one or two baud clock cycles in

order to ensure a valid Stop bit(s) before reloading the

UxTXB, or starting other transmitter activity. Transmis-

sion of a break character does not generate a transmit

interrupt.

15.4 Receiving Data

15.4.1 RECEIVING IN 8-BIT OR 9-BIT

DATA MODE

The following steps must be performed while receiving

8-bit or 9-bit data:

1. Set up the UART (see Section 15.3.1).

2. Enable the UART (see Section 15.3.1).

3. A receive interrupt will be generated when one

or more data words have been received,

depending on the receive interrupt settings

specified by the URXISEL bits (UxSTA<7:6>).

4. Read the OERR bit to determine if an overrun

error has occurred. The OERR bit must be reset

in software.

5. Read the received data from UxRXREG. The act

of reading UxRXREG will move the next word to

the top of the receive FIFO, and the PERR and

FERR values will be updated.

15.4.2 RECEIVE BUFFER (UXRXB)

The receive buffer is 4 words deep. Including the

Receive Shift register (UxRSR), the user effectively

has a 5-word deep FIFO buffer.

URXDA (UxSTA<0>) = 1 indicates that the receive

buffer has data available. URXDA = 0 implies that the

buffer is empty. If a user attempts to read an empty

buffer, the old values in the buffer will be read and no

data shift will occur within the FIFO.

The FIFO is reset during any device Reset. It is not

affected when the device enters or wakes up from a

Power Saving mode.

15.4.3 RECEIVE INTERRUPT

The receive interrupt flag (U1RXIF or U2RXIF) can be

read from the corresponding interrupt flag register. The

interrupt flag is set by an edge generated by the

receiver. The condition for setting the receive interrupt

flag depends on the settings specified by the

URXISEL<1:0> (UxSTA<7:6>) control bits.

a) If URXISEL<1:0> = 00 or 01, an interrupt is gen-

erated every time a data word is transferred

from the Receive Shift register (UxRSR) to the

receive buffer. There may be one or more

characters in the receive buffer.

b) If URXISEL<1:0> = 10, an interrupt is generated

when a word is transferred from the Receive Shift

result of the transfer, contains 3 characters.

c) If URXISEL<1:0> = 11, an interrupt is set when

a word is transferred from the Receive Shift reg-

ister (UxRSR) to the receive buffer, which as a

result of the transfer, contains 4 characters (i.e.,

becomes full).

Switching between the Interrupt modes during opera-

tion is possible, though generally not advisable during

normal operation.

15.5 Reception Error Handling

15.5.1 RECEIVE BUFFER OVERRUN

ERROR (OERR BIT)

The OERR bit (UxSTA<1>) is set if all of the following

conditions occur:

a) The receive buffer is full.

b) The Receive Shift register is full, but unable to

transfer the character to the receive buffer.

c) The Stop bit of the character in the UxRSR is

detected, indicating that the UxRSR needs to

transfer the character to the buffer.

Once OERR is set, no further data is shifted in UxRSR

(until the OERR bit is cleared in software or a Reset

occurs). The data held in UxRSR and UxRXREG

remains valid.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 101

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

15.5.2 FRAMING ERROR (FERR)

The FERR bit (UxSTA<2>) is set if a ‘0’ is detected

instead of a Stop bit. If two Stop bits are selected, both

Stop bits must be ‘1’, otherwise FERR will be set. The

read only FERR bit is buffered along with the received

data. It is cleared on any Reset.

15.5.3 PARITY ERROR (PERR)

The PERR bit (UxSTA<3>) is set if the parity of the

received word is incorrect. This error bit is applicable

only if a Parity mode (odd or even) is selected. The

read only PERR bit is buffered along with the received

data bytes. It is cleared on any Reset.

15.5.4 IDLE STATUS

When the receiver is active (i.e., between the initial

detection of the Start bit and the completion of the Stop

bit), the RIDLE bit (UxSTA<4>) is ‘0’. Between the com-

pletion of the Stop bit and detection of the next Start bit,

the RIDLE bit is ‘1’, indicating that the UART is Idle.

15.5.5 RECEIVE BREAK

The receiver will count and expect a certain number of

bit times based on the values programmed in the

PDSEL (UxMODE<2:1>) and STSEL (UxMODE<0>)

bits.

If the break is longer than 13 bit times, the reception is

considered complete after the number of bit times

specified by PDSEL and STSEL. The URXDA bit is set,

FERR is set, zeros are loaded into the receive FIFO,

interrupts are generated if appropriate and the RIDLE

bit is set.

When the module receives a long break signal and the

receiver has detected the Start bit, the data bits and the

invalid Stop bit (which sets the FERR), the receiver

must wait for a valid Stop bit before looking for the next

Start bit. It cannot assume that the break condition on

the line is the next Start bit.

Break is regarded as a character containing all ‘0’s with

the FERR bit set. The break character is loaded into the

buffer. No further reception can occur until a Stop bit is

received. Note that RIDLE goes high when the Stop bit

has not yet been received.

15.6 Address Detect Mode

Setting the ADDEN bit (UxSTA<5>) enables this spe-

cial mode in which a 9th bit (URX8) value of ‘1’ identi-

fies the received word as an address, rather than data.

This mode is only applicable for 9-bit data communica-

tion. The URXISEL control bit does not have any

impact on interrupt generation in this mode since an

interrupt (if enabled) will be generated every time the

received word has the 9th bit set.

15.7 Loopback Mode

Setting the LPBACK bit enables this special mode in

which the UxTX pin is internally connected to the UxRX

pin. When configured for the Loopback mode, the

UxRX pin is disconnected from the internal UART

receive logic. However, the UxTX pin still functions as

in a normal operation.

To select this mode:

a) Configure UART for desired mode of operation.

b) Set LPBACK = 1 to enable Loopback mode.

c) Enable transmission as defined in Section 15.3.

15.8 Baud Rate Generator

The UART has a 16-bit baud rate generator to allow

maximum flexibility in baud rate generation. The baud

rate generator register (UxBRG) is readable and

writable. The baud rate is computed as follows:

BRG = 16-bit value held in UxBRG register

(0 through 65535)

FCY = Instruction Clock Rate (1/TCY)

The Baud Rate is given by Equation 15-1.

EQUATION 15-1: BAUD RATE

Therefore, the maximum baud rate possible is

FCY /16 (if BRG = 0),

and the minimum baud rate possible is

FCY / (16* 65536).

With a full 16-bit baud rate generator at 30 MIPs

operation, the minimum baud rate achievable is

28.5 bps.

Baud Rate = FCY / (16*(BRG+1))

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 102 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

15.9 Auto Baud Support

To allow the system to determine baud rates of

received characters, the input can be optionally linked

to a selected capture input (IC1 for UART1 and IC2 for

UART2). To enable this mode, you must program the

input capture module to detect the falling and rising

edges of the Start bit.

15.10 UART Operation During CPU

Sleep and Idle Modes

15.10.1 UART OPERATION DURING CPU

SLEEP MODE

When the device enters Sleep mode, all clock sources

to the module are shutdown and stay at logic ‘0’. If entry

into Sleep mode occurs while a transmission is in

progress, then the transmission is aborted. The UxTX

pin is driven to logic ‘1’. Similarly, if entry into Sleep

mode occurs while a reception is in progress, then the

reception is aborted. The UxSTA, UxMODE, transmit

and receive registers and buffers, and the UxBRG

If the WAKE bit (UxSTA<7>) is set before the device

enters Sleep mode, then a falling edge on the UxRX pin

will generate a receive interrupt. The Receive Interrupt

Select mode bit (URXISEL) has no effect for this func-

tion. If the receive interrupt is enabled, then this will

wake-up the device from Sleep. The UARTEN bit must

be set in order to generate a wake-up interrupt.

15.10.2 UART OPERATION DURING CPU

IDLE MODE

For the UART, the USIDL bit selects if the module will

stop operation when the device enters Idle mode or

whether the module will continue on Idle. If USIDL = 0,

the module will continue operation during Idle mode. If

USIDL = 1, the module will stop on Idle.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 103

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 15-1: UART1 REGISTER MAP FOR dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 15-2: UART2 REGISTER MAP FOR DSPIC30F3013

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

U1MODE 020C UARTEN —USIDL——ALTIO—— WAKE LPBACK ABAUD —— PDSEL1 PDSEL0 STSEL 0000 0000 0000 0000

U1STA 020E UTXISEL — — — UTXBRK UTXEN UTXBF TRMT URXISEL1 URXISEL0 ADDEN RIDLE PERR FERR OERR URXDA 0000 0001 0001 0000

U1TXREG 0210 — — — — — — — UTX8 Transmit Register 0000 000u uuuu uuuu

U1RXREG 0212 — — — — — — — URX8 Receive Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

U1BRG 0214 Baud Rate Generator Prescaler 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

U2MODE 0216 UARTEN —USIDL— — — — — WAKE LPBACK ABAUD —— PDSEL1 PDSEL0 STSEL 0000 0000 0000 0000

U2STA 0218 UTXISEL — — — UTXBRK UTXEN UTXBF TRMT URXISEL1 URXISEL0 ADDEN RIDLE PERR FERR OERR URXDA 0000 0001 0001 0000

U2TXREG 021A — — — — — — — UTX8 Transmit Register 0000 000u uuuu uuuu

U2RXREG 021C — — — — — — — URX8 Receive Register 0000 0000 0000 0000

U2BRG 021E Baud Rate Generator Prescaler 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

Note 1: UART2 is not available on the dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 104 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 105

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

16.0 12-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL

CONVERTER (A/D) MODULE

The 12-bit Analog-to-Digital converter (A/D) allows

conversion of an analog input signal to a 12-bit digital

number. This module is based on a Successive

Approximation Register (SAR) architecture and pro-

vides a maximum sampling rate of 100 ksps. The A/D

module has up to 10 analog inputs which are multi-

plexed into a sample and hold amplifier. The output of

the sample and hold is the input into the converter

which generates the result. The analog reference volt-

age is software selectable to either the device supply

voltage (AVDD/AVSS) or the voltage level on the

(VREF+/VREF-) pin. The A/D converter has a unique

feature of being able to operate while the device is in

Sleep mode with RC oscillator selection.

The A/D module has six 16-bit registers:

• A/D Control Register 1 (ADCON1)

• A/D Control Register 2 (ADCON2)

• A/D Control Register 3 (ADCON3)

• A/D Input Select Register (ADCHS)

• A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPCFG)

• A/D Input Scan Selection Register (ADCSSL)

The ADCON1, ADCON2 and ADCON3 registers

control the operation of the A/D module. The ADCHS

ADPCFG register configures the port pins as analog

inputs or as digital I/O. The ADCSSL register selects

inputs for scanning.

The block diagram of the 12-bit A/D module is shown in

Figure 16-1.

FIGURE 16-1: 12-BIT A/D FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046).

Note: The SSRC<2:0>, ASAM, SMPI<3:0>,

BUFM and ALTS bits, as well as the

ADCON3 and ADCSSL registers, must

not be written to while ADON = 1. This

would lead to indeterminate results.

Comparator

12-bit SAR Conversion Logic

AVDD/VREF+

DAC

Data Format

16-word, 12-bit

Dual Port

Buffer

Bus Interface

0000

0101

0111

1001

0001

0010

0011

0100

0110

1000

AN8

AN9

AN4

AN5

AN6

AN7

AN0

AN1

AN2

AN3

CH0

AVSS/VREF-

Sample/Sequence

Control

Sample

Input Mux

Control

Input

Switches

S/H

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 106 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

16.1 A/D Result Buffer

The module contains a 16-word dual port read only

buffer, called ADCBUF0...ADCBUFF, to buffer the A/D

results. The RAM is 12 bits wide but the data obtained

is represented in one of four different 16-bit data for-

mats. The contents of the sixteen A/D Conversion

Result Buffer registers, ADCBUF0 through ADCBUFF,

cannot be written by user software.

16.2 Conversion Operation

After the A/D module has been configured, the sample

acquisition is started by setting the SAMP bit. Various

sources, such as a programmable bit, timer time-outs

and external events, will terminate acquisition and start

a conversion. When the A/D conversion is complete,

the result is loaded into ADCBUF0...ADCBUFF, and

the DONE bit and the A/D interrupt flag ADIF are set after

the number of samples specified by the SMPI bit. The

ADC module can be configured for different interrupt

rates as described in Section 16.3.

The following steps should be followed for doing an

A/D conversion:

1. Configure the A/D module:

• Configure analog pins, voltage reference and

digital I/O

•Select A/D input channels

•Select A/D conversion clock

•Select A/D conversion trigger

• Turn on A/D module

2. Configure A/D interrupt (if required):

• Clear ADIF bit

• Select A/D interrupt priority

3. Start sampling.

4. Wait the required acquisition time.

5. Trigger acquisition end, start conversion:

6. Wait for A/D conversion to complete, by either:

• Waiting for the A/D interrupt, or

• Waiting for the DONE bit to get set.

7. Read A/D result buffer, clear ADIF if required.

16.3 Selecting the Conversion

Sequence

Several groups of control bits select the sequence in

which the A/D connects inputs to the sample/hold

channel, converts a channel, writes the buffer memory

and generates interrupts.

The sequence is controlled by the sampling clocks.

The SMPI bits select the number of acquisition/

conversion sequences that would be performed before

an interrupt occurs. This can vary from 1 sample per

interrupt to 16 samples per interrupt.

The BUFM bit will split the 16-word results buffer into

two 8-word groups. Writing to the 8-word buffers will be

alternated on each interrupt event.

Use of the BUFM bit will depend on how much time is

available for the moving of the buffers after the

interrupt.

If the processor can quickly unload a full buffer within

the time it takes to acquire and convert one channel,

the BUFM bit can be ‘0’ and up to 16 conversions (cor-

responding to the 16 input channels) may be done per

interrupt. The processor will have one acquisition and

conversion time to move the sixteen conversions.

If the processor cannot unload the buffer within the

acquisition and conversion time, the BUFM bit should be

‘1’. For example, if SMPI<3:0> (ADCON2<5:2>) = 0111,

then eight conversions will be loaded into 1/2 of the

buffer, following which an interrupt occurs. The next

eight conversions will be loaded into the other 1/2 of the

buffer. The processor will have the entire time between

interrupts to move the eight conversions.

The ALTS bit can be used to alternate the inputs

selected during the sampling sequence. The input

multiplexer has two sets of sample inputs: MUX A and

MUX B. If the ALTS bit is ‘0’, only the MUX A inputs are

selected for sampling. If the ALTS bit is ‘1’ and

SMPI<3:0> = 0000 on the first sample/convert

sequence, the MUX A inputs are selected and on the

next acquire/convert sequence, the MUX B inputs are

selected.

The CSCNA bit (ADCON2<10>) will allow the multi-

plexer input to be alternately scanned across a

selected number of analog inputs for the MUX A group.

The inputs are selected by the ADCSSL register. If a

particular bit in the ADCSSL register is ‘1’, the corre-

sponding input is selected. The inputs are always

scanned from lower to higher numbered inputs, starting

after each interrupt. If the number of inputs selected is

greater than the number of samples taken per interrupt,

the higher numbered inputs are unused.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 107

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

16.4 Programming the Start of

Conversion Trigger

The conversion trigger will terminate acquisition and

start the requested conversions.

The SSRC<2:0> bits select the source of the conver-

sion trigger. The SSRC bits provide for up to 4 alternate

sources of conversion trigger.

When SSRC<2:0> = 000, the conversion trigger is

under software control. Clearing the SAMP bit will

cause the conversion trigger.

When SSRC<2:0> = 111 (Auto-Start mode), the con-

version trigger is under A/D clock control. The SAMC

bits select the number of A/D clocks between the start

of acquisition and the start of conversion. This provides

the fastest conversion rates on multiple channels.

SAMC must always be at least 1 clock cycle.

Other trigger sources can come from timer modules or

external interrupts.

16.5 Aborting a Conversion

Clearing the ADON bit during a conversion will abort

the current conversion and stop the sampling sequenc-

ing until the next sampling trigger. The ADCBUF will not

be updated with the partially completed A/D conversion

sample. That is, the ADCBUF will continue to contain

the value of the last completed conversion (or the last

value written to the ADCBUF register).

If the clearing of the ADON bit coincides with an auto-

start, the clearing has a higher priority and a new

conversion will not start.

After the A/D conversion is aborted, a 2 TAD wait is

required before the next sampling may be started by

setting the SAMP bit.

16.6 Selecting the A/D Conversion

Clock

The A/D conversion requires 15 TAD. The source of the

A/D conversion clock is software selected, using a

six-bit counter. There are 64 possible options for TAD.

EQUATION 16-1: A/D CONVERSION CLOCK

The internal RC oscillator is selected by setting the

ADRC bit.

For correct A/D conversions, the A/D conversion clock

(TAD) must be selected to ensure a minimum TAD time

of 667 nsec (for VDD = 5V). Refer to the Electrical

Specifications section for minimum TAD under other

operating conditions.

Example 16-1 shows a sample calculation for the

ADCS<5:0> bits, assuming a device operating speed

of 30 MIPS.

EXAMPLE 16-1: A/D CONVERSION CLOCK

CALCULATION

16.7 A/D Acquisition Requirements

The analog input model of the 12-bit A/D converter is

shown in Figure 16-2. The total sampling time for the A/

D is a function of the internal amplifier settling time and

the holding capacitor charge time.

For the A/D converter to meet its specified accuracy,

the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed

to fully charge to the voltage level on the analog input

pin. The source impedance (RS), the interconnect

impedance (RIC), and the internal sampling switch

(RSS) impedance combine to directly affect the time

required to charge the capacitor CHOLD. The combined

impedance of the analog sources must therefore be

small enough to fully charge the holding capacitor

within the chosen sample time. To minimize the effects

of pin leakage currents on the accuracy of the A/D con-

verter, the maximum recommended source imped-

ance, RS, is 2.5 kΩ. After the analog input channel is

selected (changed), this sampling function must be

completed prior to starting the conversion. The internal

holding capacitor will be in a discharged state prior to

each sample operation.

TAD = TCY * (0.5*(ADCS<5:0> + 1))

Minimum TAD = 667 nsec

ADCS<5:0> = 2 – 1

TAD

TCY

TCY = 33 nsec (30 MIPS)

= 2 • – 1

667 nsec

33 nsec

= 39.4

Therefore,

Set ADCS<5:0> = 40

Actual TAD = (ADCS<5:0> + 1)

TCY

= (40 + 1)

33 nsec

= 677 nsec

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 108 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 16-2: 12-BIT A/D CONVERTER ANALOG INPUT MODEL

16.8 Module Power-down Modes

The module has 2 internal Power modes.

When the ADON bit is ‘1’, the module is in Active mode;

it is fully powered and functional.

When ADON is ‘0’, the module is in Off mode. The dig-

ital and analog portions of the circuit are disabled for

maximum current savings.

In order to return to the Active mode from Off mode, the

user must wait for the ADC circuitry to stabilize.

16.9 A/D Operation During CPU Sleep

and Idle Modes

16.9.1 A/D OPERATION DURING CPU

SLEEP MODE

When the device enters Sleep mode, all clock sources

to the module are shutdown and stay at logic ‘0’.

If Sleep occurs in the middle of a conversion, the con-

version is aborted. The converter will not continue with

a partially completed conversion on exit from Sleep

mode.

entering or leaving Sleep mode.

The A/D module can operate during Sleep mode if the

A/D clock source is set to RC (ADRC = 1). When the RC

clock source is selected, the A/D module waits one

instruction cycle before starting the conversion. This

allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed which elim-

inates all digital switching noise from the conversion.

When the conversion is complete, the CONV bit will be

cleared and the result loaded into the ADCBUF register.

If the A/D interrupt is enabled, the device will wake-up

from Sleep. If the A/D interrupt is not enabled, the A/

D module will then be turned off, although the ADON bit

will remain set.

16.9.2 A/D OPERATION DURING CPU IDLE

MODE

The ADSIDL bit selects if the module will stop on Idle or

continue on Idle. If ADSIDL = 0, the module will con-

tinue operation on assertion of Idle mode. If ADSIDL =

1, the module will stop on Idle.

16.10 Effects of a Reset

A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state.

This forces the A/D module to be turned off, and any

conversion and sampling sequence is aborted. The val-

ues that are in the ADCBUF registers are not modified.

The A/D Result register will contain unknown data after

a Power-on Reset.

16.11 Output Formats

The A/D result is 12 bits wide. The data buffer RAM is

also 12 bits wide. The 12-bit data can be read in one of

four different formats. The FORM<1:0> bits select the

format. Each of the output formats translates to a 16-bit

result on the data bus.

CPIN

Rs ANx VT = 0.6V

VT = 0.6V I leakage

RIC ≤ 250ΩSampling

Switch

RSS

CHOLD

= DAC capacitance

VSS

VDD

= 18 pF

± 500 nA

Legend: CPIN

I leakage

RIC

RSS

CHOLD

= input capacitance

= threshold voltage

= leakage current at the pin due to

= interconnect resistance

= sampling switch resistance

= sample/hold capacitance (from DAC)

various junctions

Note: CPIN value depends on device package and is not tested. Effect of CPIN negligible if Rs ≤ 2.5 kΩ.

RSS ≤ 3 kΩ

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 109

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 16-3: A/D OUTPUT DATA FORMATS

16.12 Configuring Analog Port Pins

The use of the ADPCFG and TRIS registers control the

operation of the A/D port pins. The port pins that are

desired as analog inputs must have their correspond-

ing TRIS bit set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared (out-

put), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be

converted.

The A/D operation is independent of the state of the

CH0SA<3:0>/CH0SB<3:0> bits and the TRIS bits.

When reading the Port register, all pins configured as

analog input channels will read as cleared.

Pins configured as digital inputs will not convert an ana-

log input. Analog levels on any pin that is defined as a

digital input (including the ANx pins) may cause the

input buffer to consume current that exceeds the

device specifications.

16.13 Connection Considerations

The analog inputs have diodes to VDD and VSS as ESD

protection. This requires that the analog input be

between VDD and VSS. If the input voltage exceeds this

range by greater than 0.3V (either direction), one of the

diodes becomes forward biased and it may damage the

device if the input current specification is exceeded.

An external RC filter is sometimes added for anti-

aliasing of the input signal. The R component should be

selected to ensure that the sampling time requirements

are satisfied. Any external components connected (via

high impedance) to an analog input pin (capacitor,

zener diode, etc.) should have very little leakage

current at the pin.

RAM Contents: d11 d10 d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00

Read to Bus:

Signed Fractional d11 d10d09d08d07d06d05d04d03d02d01d000000

Fractional d11d10d09d08d07d06d05d04d03d02d01d000000

Signed Integer d11 d11 d11 d11 d11 d10 d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00

Integer 0 0 0 0 d11 d10 d09 d08 d07 d06 d05 d04 d03 d02 d01 d00

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 110 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 16-1: A/D CONVERTER REGISTER MAP FOR DSPIC30F2011/3012

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

ADCBUF0 0280 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 0 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF1 0282 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 1 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF2 0284 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 2 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF3 0286 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 3 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF4 0288 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 4 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF5 028A — — — — ADC Data Buffer 5 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF6 028C — — — — ADC Data Buffer 6 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF7 028E — — — — ADC Data Buffer 7 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF8 0290 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 8 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF9 0292 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 9 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFA 0294 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 10 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFB 0296 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 11 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFC 0298 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 12 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFD 029A — — — — ADC Data Buffer 13 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFE 029C — — — — ADC Data Buffer 14 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFF 029E — — — — ADC Data Buffer 15 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCON1 02A0 ADON —ADSIDL — — — FORM<1:0> SSRC<2:0> —— ASAM SAMP DONE 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCON2 02A2 VCFG<2:0> — — CSCNA — — BUFS — SMPI<3:0> BUFM ALTS 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCON3 02A4 — — — SAMC<4:0> ADRC — ADCS<5:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCHS 02A6 — — — CH0NB CH0SB<3:0> — — — CH0NA CH0SA<3:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADPCFG 02A8 — — — — — — — — PCFG7 PCFG6 PCFG5 PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCSSL 02AA — — — — — — — — CSSL7 CSSL6 CSSL5 CSSL4 CSSL3 CSSL2 CSSL1 CSSL0 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 111

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 16-2: A/D CONVERTER REGISTER MAP FOR DSPIC30F2012/3013

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

ADCBUF0 0280 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 0 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF1 0282 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 1 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF2 0284 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 2 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF3 0286 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 3 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF4 0288 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 4 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF5 028A — — — — ADC Data Buffer 5 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF6 028C — — — — ADC Data Buffer 6 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF7 028E — — — — ADC Data Buffer 7 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF8 0290 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 8 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUF9 0292 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 9 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFA 0294 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 10 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFB 0296 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 11 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFC 0298 — — — — ADC Data Buffer 12 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFD 029A — — — — ADC Data Buffer 13 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFE 029C — — — — ADC Data Buffer 14 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCBUFF 029E — — — — ADC Data Buffer 15 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu

ADCON1 02A0 ADON —ADSIDL — — — FORM<1:0> SSRC<2:0> —— ASAM SAMP DONE 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCON2 02A2 VCFG<2:0> — — CSCNA — — BUFS — SMPI<3:0> BUFM ALTS 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCON3 02A4 — — — SAMC<4:0> ADRC — ADCS<5:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCHS 02A6 — — — CH0NB CH0SB<3:0> — — — CH0NA CH0SA<3:0> 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADPCFG 02A8 — — — — — — PCFG9 PCFG8 PCFG7 PCFG6 PCFG5 PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 0000 0000 0000 0000

ADCSSL 02AA — — — — — — CSSL9 CSSL8 CSSL7 CSSL6 CSSL5 CSSL4 CSSL3 CSSL2 CSSL1 CSSL0 0000 0000 0000 0000

Legend: u = uninitialized bit

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 112 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 113

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

17.0 SYSTEM INTEGRATION

There are several features intended to maximize sys-

tem reliability, minimize cost through elimination of

external components, provide Power Saving Operating

modes and offer code protection:

• Oscillator Selection

• Reset

- Power-on Reset (POR)

- Power-up Timer (PWRT)

- Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)

- Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR)

• Watchdog Timer (WDT)

• Power Saving Modes (Sleep and Idle)

• Code Protection

• Unit ID Locations

• In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP)

dsPIC30F devices have a Watchdog Timer which is

permanently enabled via the configuration bits or can

be software controlled. It runs off its own RC oscillator

for added reliability. There are two timers that offer

necessary delays on power-up. One is the Oscillator

Start-up Timer (OST), intended to keep the chip in

Reset until the crystal oscillator is stable. The other is

the Power-up Timer (PWRT) which provides a delay on

power-up only, designed to keep the part in Reset while

the power supply stabilizes. With these two timers

on-chip, most applications need no external Reset

circuitry.

Sleep mode is designed to offer a very low current

Power-down mode. The user can wake-up from Sleep

through external Reset, Watchdog Timer Wake-up, or

through an interrupt. Several oscillator options are also

made available to allow the part to fit a wide variety of

applications. In the Idle mode, the clock sources are

still active but the CPU is shut-off. The RC oscillator

option saves system cost while the LP crystal option

saves power.

17.1 Oscillator System Overview

The dsPIC30F oscillator system has the following

modules and features:

• Various external and internal oscillator options as

clock sources

• An on-chip PLL to boost internal operating

frequency

• A clock switching mechanism between various

clock sources

• Programmable clock postscaler for system power

savings

• A Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) that detects

clock failure and takes fail-safe measures

• Clock Control register (OSCCON)

• Configuration bits for main oscillator selection

Configuration bits determine the clock source upon

Power-on Reset (POR) and Brown-out Reset (BOR).

Thereafter, the clock source can be changed between

permissible clock sources. The OSCCON register con-

trols the clock switching and reflects system clock

related status bits.

Table 17-1 provides a summary of the dsPIC30F Oscil-

lator Operating modes. A simplified diagram of the

oscillator system is shown in Figure 17-1.

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 114 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 17-1: OSCILLATOR OPERATING MODES

Oscillator Mode Description

XTL 200 kHz-4 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2.

XT 4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2.

XT w/ PLL 4x 4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2, 4x PLL enabled.

XT w/ PLL 8x 4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2, 8x PLL enabled.

XT w/ PLL 16x 4 MHz-10 MHz crystal on OSC1:OSC2, 16x PLL enabled(1).

LP 32 kHz crystal on SOSCO:SOSCI(2).

HS 10 MHz-25 MHz crystal.

HS/2 w/PLL 4x 10 MHz -25 MHz crystal, divide by 2, 4x PLL enabled.

HS/2 w/ PLL 8x 10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 2, 8x PLL enabled.

HS/2 w/ PLL 16x 10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 2, 16x PLL enabled(1).

HS/3 w/PLL 4x 10 MHz-25 MHz crystal, divide by 3, 4x PLL enabled.

HS/3 w/ PLL 8x 10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 3, 8x PLL enabled.

HS/3 w/ PLL 16x 10 MHz-25MHz crystal, divide by 3, 16x PLL enabled(1).

EC External clock input (0-40 MHz).

ECIO External clock input (0-40 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O.

EC w/ PLL 4x External clock input (4-10 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O, 4x PLL enabled.

EC w/ PLL 8x External clock input (4-10 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O, 8x PLL enabled.

EC w/ PLL 16x External clock input (4-10 MHz), OSC2 pin is I/O, 16x PLL enabled(1).

ERC External RC oscillator, OSC2 pin is FOSC/4 output(3).

ERCIO External RC oscillator, OSC2 pin is I/O(3).

FRC 8 MHz internal RC oscillator.

FRC w/ PLL 4x 8 MHz Internal RC oscillator, 4x PLL enabled.

FRC w/ PLL 8x 8 MHz Internal RC oscillator, 8x PLL enabled.

FRC w/ PLL 16x 7.5 MHz Internal RC oscillator, 16x PLL enabled.

LPRC 512 kHz internal RC oscillator.

Note 1: dsPIC30F maximum operating frequency of 120 MHz must be met.

2: LP oscillator can be conveniently shared as system clock, as well as real-time clock for Timer1.

3: Requires external R and C. Frequency operation up to 4 MHz.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 115

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 17-1: OSCILLATOR SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

Primary

OSC1

OSC2

SOSCO

SOSCI

Oscillator

32 kHz LP

Clock

and Control

Block

Switching

Oscillator

x4, x8, x16

PLL

Primary

Oscillator

Stability Detector

Secondary

Oscillator

Programmable

Clock Divider

Oscillator

Start-up

Timer

Fail-Safe Clock

Monitor (FSCM)

Internal Fast RC

Oscillator (FRC)

Internal Low

Power RC

Oscillator (LPRC)

PWRSAV Instruction

Wake-up Request

Oscillator Configuration bits

System

Clock

Oscillator Trap

To Timer1

LPRC

Secondary Osc

POR Done

Primary Osc

FPLL

POST<1:0>

FCKSM<1:0>

PLL

Lock COSC<2:0>

NOSC<2:0>

OSWEN

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 116 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

17.2 Oscillator Configurations

17.2.1 INITIAL CLOCK SOURCE

SELECTION

While coming out of Power-on Reset or Brown-out

Reset, the device selects its clock source based on:

a) FOS<2:0> configuration bits that select one of

four oscillator groups,

b) and FPR<4:0> configuration bits that select one

of 15 oscillator choices within the primary group.

The selection is as shown in Table 17-2.

17.2.2 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER

(OST)

In order to ensure that a crystal oscillator (or ceramic

resonator) has started and stabilized, an Oscillator

Start-up Timer is included. It is a simple 10-bit counter

that counts 1024 TOSC cycles before releasing the

oscillator clock to the rest of the system. The time-out

period is designated as TOST.

The TOST time is involved every time the oscillator has

to restart (i.e., on POR, BOR and wake-up from Sleep).

The Oscillator Start-up Timer is applied to the LP oscil-

lator, XT, XTL and HS modes (upon wake-up from

Sleep, POR and BOR) for the primary oscillator.

TABLE 17-2: CONFIGURATION BIT VALUES FOR CLOCK SELECTION

Oscillator Mode Oscillator

Source FOS<2:0> FPR<4:0> OSC2

Function

ECIO w/ PLL 4x PLL 1 1 101101 I/O

ECIO w/ PLL 8x PLL 1 1 101110 I/O

ECIO w/ PLL 16x PLL 1 1 101111 I/O

FRC w/ PLL 4X PLL 1 1 100001 I/O

FRC w/ PLL 8x PLL 1 1 101010 I/O

FRC w/ PLL 16x PLL 1 1 100011 I/O

XT w/ PLL 4x PLL 1 1 100101 OSC2

XT w/ PLL 8x PLL 1 1 100110 OSC2

XT w/ PLL 16x PLL 1 1 100111 OSC2

HS2 w/ PLL 4x PLL 1 1 110001 OSC2

HS2 w/ PLL 8x PLL 1 1 110010 OSC2

HS2 w/ PLL 16x PLL 1 1 110011 OSC2

HS3 w/ PLL 4x PLL 1 1 110101 OSC2

HS3 w/ PLL 8x PLL 1 1 110110 OSC2

HS3 w/ PLL 16x PLL 1 1 110111 OSC2

ECIO External 0 1 101100 I/O

XT External 0 1 100100 OSC2

HS External 0 1 100010 OSC2

EC External 0 1 101011 CLKOUT

ERC External 0 1 101001 CLKOUT

ERCIO External 0 1 101000 I/O

XTL External 0 1 100000 OSC2

LP Secondary 0 0 0XXXXX(Note 1, 2)

FRC Internal FRC 0 0 1XXXXX(Note 1, 2)

LPRC Internal LPRC 0 1 0XXXXX(Note 1, 2)

Note 1: OSC2 pin function is determined by the Primary Oscillator mode selection (FPR<4:0>).

2: OSC1 pin cannot be used as an I/O pin even if the secondary oscillator or an internal clock source is

selected at all times.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 117

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

17.2.3 LP OSCILLATOR CONTROL

Enabling the LP oscillator is controlled with two elements:

1. The current oscillator group bits COSC<1:0>.

2. The LPOSCEN bit (OSCON register).

The LP oscillator is on (even during Sleep mode) if

LPOSCEN = 1. The LP oscillator is the device clock if:

• COSC<1:0> = 00 (LP selected as main oscillator)

and

• LPOSCEN = 1

Keeping the LP oscillator on at all times allows for a fast

switch to the 32 kHz system clock for lower power oper-

ation. Returning to the faster main oscillator will still

require a start-up time

17.2.4 PHASE LOCKED LOOP (PLL)

The PLL multiplies the clock which is generated by the

primary oscillator or Fast RC oscillator. The PLL is

selectable to have either gains of x4, x8, and x16. Input

and output frequency ranges are summarized in

Table 17-3.

TABLE 17-3: PLL FREQUENCY RANGE

The PLL features a lock output which is asserted when

the PLL enters a phase locked state. Should the loop

fall out of lock (e.g., due to noise), the lock signal will be

rescinded. The state of this signal is reflected in the

read only LOCK bit in the OSCCON register.

17.2.5 FAST RC OSCILLATOR (FRC)

The FRC oscillator is a fast (8 MHz nominal) internal

RC oscillator. This oscillator is intended to provide

reasonable device operating speeds without the use of

an external crystal, ceramic resonator, or RC network.

The FRC oscillator can be used with the PLL to obtain

higher clock frequencies.

The dsPIC30F operates from the FRC oscillator when-

ever the current oscillator selection control bits in the

OSCCON register (OSCCON<13:12>) are set to ‘01’.

The four bit field specified by TUN<3:0> (OSCON

<15:14> and OSCON<11:10>) allows the user to tune

the internal fast RC oscillator (nominal 8.0 MHz). The

user can tune the FRC oscillator within a range of

+10.5% (840 kHz) and -12% (960 kHz) in steps of

1.50% around the factory-calibrated setting, see

Table 17-4.

If OSCCON<13:12> are set to ‘11’ and FPR<3:0> are

set to ‘0001’, ‘1010’ or ‘0011’, then a PLL multiplier of 4,

8 or 16 (respectively) is applied.

TABLE 17-4: FRC TUNING

17.2.6 LOW POWER RC OSCILLATOR

(LPRC)

The LPRC oscillator is a component of the Watchdog

Timer (WDT) and oscillates at a nominal frequency of

512 kHz. The LPRC oscillator is the clock source for

the Power-up Timer (PWRT) circuit, WDT, and clock

monitor circuits. It may also be used to provide a low

frequency clock source option for applications where

power consumption is critical and timing accuracy is

not required

The LPRC oscillator is always enabled at a Power-on

Reset because it is the clock source for the PWRT.

After the PWRT expires, the LPRC oscillator will remain

on if one of the following is true:

• The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled

• The WDT is enabled

• The LPRC oscillator is selected as the system

clock via the COSC<1:0> control bits in the

OSCCON register

If one of the above conditions is not true, the LPRC will

shut-off after the PWRT expires.

FIN PLL

Multiplier FOUT

4 MHz-10 MHz x4 16 MHz-40 MHz

4 MHz-10 MHz x8 32 MHz-80 MHz

4 MHz-7.5 MHz x16 64 MHz-120 MHz

Note: When a 16x PLL is used, the FRC fre-

quency must not be tuned to a frequency

greater than 7.5 MHz.

TUN<3:0>

Bits FRC Frequency

0111 + 10.5%

0110 + 9.0%

0101 + 7.5%

0100 + 6.0%

0011 + 4.5%

0010 + 3.0%

0001 + 1.5%

0000 Center Frequency (oscillator is

running at calibrated frequency)

1111 - 1.5%

1110 - 3.0%

1101 - 4.5%

1100 - 6.0%

1011 - 7.5%

1010 - 9.0%

1001 - 10.5%

1000 - 12.0%

Note 1: OSC2 pin function is determined by the

Primary Oscillator mode selection

(FPR<3:0>).

2: OSC1 pin cannot be used as an I/O pin

even if the secondary oscillator or an

internal clock source is selected at all

times.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 118 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

17.2.7 FAIL-SAFE CLOCK MONITOR

The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device

to continue to operate even in the event of an oscillator

failure. The FSCM function is enabled by appropriately

programming the FCKSM configuration bits (clock

switch and monitor selection bits) in the FOSC Device

Configuration register. If the FSCM function is enabled,

the LPRC internal oscillator will run at all times (except

during Sleep mode) and will not be subject to control by

the SWDTEN bit.

In the event of an oscillator failure, the FSCM will gen-

erate a clock failure trap event and will switch the sys-

tem clock over to the FRC oscillator. The user will then

have the option to either attempt to restart the oscillator

or execute a controlled shutdown. The user may decide

to treat the trap as a warm Reset by simply loading the

Reset address into the oscillator fail trap vector. In this

event, the CF (Clock Fail) status bit (OSCCON<3>) is

also set whenever a clock failure is recognized.

In the event of a clock failure, the WDT is unaffected

and continues to run on the LPRC clock.

If the oscillator has a very slow start-up time coming out

of POR, BOR or Sleep, it is possible that the PWRT

timer will expire before the oscillator has started. In

such cases, the FSCM will be activated and the FSCM

will initiate a clock failure trap, and the COSC<1:0> bits

are loaded with FRC oscillator selection. This will effec-

tively shut-off the original oscillator that was trying to

start.

The user may detect this situation and restart the

oscillator in the clock fail trap ISR.

Upon a clock failure detection, the FSCM module will

initiate a clock switch to the FRC oscillator as follows:

1. The COSC bits (OSCCON<13:12>) are loaded

with the FRC oscillator selection value.

2. CF bit is set (OSCCON<3>).

3. OSWEN control bit (OSCCON<0>) is cleared.

For the purpose of clock switching, the clock sources

are sectioned into four groups:

1. Primary

2. Secondary

3. Internal FRC

4. Internal LPRC

The user can switch between these functional groups

but cannot switch between options within a group. If the

primary group is selected, then the choice within the

group is always determined by the FPR<3:0>

configuration bits.

The OSCCON register holds the control and status bits

related to clock switching.

• COSC<1:0>: Read only status bits always reflect

the current oscillator group in effect.

• NOSC<1:0>: Control bits which are written to

indicate the new oscillator group of choice.

- On POR and BOR, COSC<1:0> and

NOSC<1:0> are both loaded with the

configuration bit values FOS<1:0>.

• LOCK: The LOCK status bit indicates a PLL lock.

• CF: Read only status bit indicating if a clock fail

detect has occurred.

• OSWEN: Control bit changes from a ‘0’ to a ‘1’

when a clock transition sequence is initiated.

Clearing the OSWEN control bit will abort a clock

transition in progress (used for hang-up

situations).

If configuration bits FCKSM<1:0> = 1x, then the clock

switching and Fail-Safe Clock monitoring functions are

disabled. This is the default configuration bit setting.

If clock switching is disabled, then the FOS<1:0> and

FPR<3:0> bits directly control the oscillator selection

and the COSC<1:0> bits do not control the clock selec-

tion. However, these bits will reflect the clock source

selection.

17.2.8 PROTECTION AGAINST

ACCIDENTAL WRITES TO OSCCON

A write to the OSCCON register is intentionally made

difficult because it controls clock switching and clock

scaling.

To write to the OSCCON low byte, the following code

sequence must be executed without any other

instructions in between:

Byte write is allowed for one instruction cycle. Write the

desired value or use bit manipulation instruction.

To write to the OSCCON high byte, the following

instructions must be executed without any other

instructions in between:

Byte write is allowed for one instruction cycle. Write the

desired value or use bit manipulation instruction.

Note: The application should not attempt to

switch to a clock of frequency lower than

100 KHz when the fail-safe clock monitor is

enabled. If such clock switching is

performed, the device may generate an

oscillator fail trap and switch to the Fast RC

oscillator.

Byte Write “0x46” to OSCCON low

Byte Write “0x57” to OSCCON low

Byte Write “0x78” to OSCCON high

Byte Write “0x9A” to OSCCON high

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 119

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

17.3 Reset

The dsPIC30F differentiates between various kinds of

Reset:

a) Power-on Reset (POR)

b) MCLR Reset during normal operation

c) MCLR Reset during Sleep

d) Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during normal

operation)

e) Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR)

f) RESET Instruction

g) Reset caused by trap lockup (TRAPR)

h) Reset caused by illegal opcode or by using an

uninitialized W register as an address pointer

(IOPUWR)

Different registers are affected in different ways by var-

ious Reset conditions. Most registers are not affected

by a WDT wake-up since this is viewed as the resump-

tion of normal operation. Status bits from the RCON

situations, as indicated in Table 17-5. These bits are

used in software to determine the nature of the Reset.

A block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit is shown

in Figure 17-2.

A MCLR noise filter is provided in the MCLR Reset

path. The filter detects and ignores small pulses.

Internally generated Resets do not drive MCLR pin low.

FIGURE 17-2: RESET SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

17.3.1 POR: POWER-ON RESET

A power-on event will generate an internal POR pulse

when a VDD rise is detected. The Reset pulse will occur

at the POR circuit threshold voltage (VPOR) which is

nominally 1.85V. The device supply voltage character-

istics must meet specified starting voltage and rise rate

requirements. The POR pulse will reset a POR timer

and place the device in the Reset state. The POR also

selects the device clock source identified by the

oscillator configuration fuses.

The POR circuit inserts a small delay, TPOR, which is

nominally 10 µs and ensures that the device bias cir-

cuits are stable. Furthermore, a user selected power-

up time-out (TPWRT) is applied. The TPWRT parameter

is based on device configuration bits and can be 0 ms

(no delay), 4 ms, 16 ms, or 64 ms. The total delay is at

device power-up, TPOR + TPWRT. When these delays

have expired, SYSRST will be negated on the next

leading edge of the Q1 clock and the PC will jump to the

Reset vector.

The timing for the SYSRST signal is shown in

Figure 17-3 through Figure 17-5.

MCLR

VDD

VDD Rise

Detect

POR

SYSRST

Sleep or Idle

Brown-out

Reset BOREN

RESET

Instruction

WDT

Module

Digital

Glitch Filter

BOR

Trap Conflict

Illegal Opcode/

Uninitialized W Register

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 120 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 17-3: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD)

FIGURE 17-4: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1

FIGURE 17-5: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2

TPWRT

TOST

VDD

INTERNAL POR

PWRT TIME-OUT

OST TIME-OUT

INTERNAL Reset

MCLR

TPWRT

TOST

VDD

INTERNAL POR

PWRT TIME-OUT

OST TIME-OUT

INTERNAL Reset

MCLR

VDD

MCLR

INTERNAL POR

PWRT TIME-OUT

OST TIME-OUT

INTERNAL Reset

TPWRT

TOST

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 121

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

17.3.1.1 POR with Long Crystal Start-up Time

(with FSCM Enabled)

The oscillator start-up circuitry is not linked to the POR

circuitry. Some crystal circuits (especially low fre-

quency crystals) will have a relatively long start-up

time. Therefore, one or more of the following conditions

is possible after the POR timer and the PWRT have

expired:

• The oscillator circuit has not begun to oscillate.

• The Oscillator Start-up Timer has not expired (if a

crystal oscillator is used).

• The PLL has not achieved a LOCK (if PLL is

used).

If the FSCM is enabled and one of the above conditions

is true, then a clock failure trap will occur. The device

will automatically switch to the FRC oscillator and the

user can switch to the desired crystal oscillator in the

trap ISR.

17.3.1.2 Operating without FSCM and PWRT

If the FSCM is disabled and the Power-up Timer

(PWRT) is also disabled, then the device will exit rap-

idly from Reset on power-up. If the clock source is

FRC, LPRC, EXTRC or EC, it will be active

immediately.

If the FSCM is disabled and the system clock has not

started, the device will be in a frozen state at the Reset

vector until the system clock starts. From the user’s

perspective, the device will appear to be in Reset until

a system clock is available.

17.3.2 BOR: PROGRAMMABLE

BROWN-OUT RESET

The BOR (Brown-out Reset) module is based on an

internal voltage reference circuit. The main purpose of

the BOR module is to generate a device Reset when a

brown-out condition occurs. Brown-out conditions are

generally caused by glitches on the AC mains (i.e.,

missing portions of the AC cycle waveform due to bad

power transmission lines, or voltage sags due to exces-

sive current draw when a large inductive load is turned

on).

The BOR module allows selection of one of the

following voltage trip points:

•2.0V

•2.7V

•4.2V

•4.5V

A BOR will generate a Reset pulse which will reset the

device. The BOR will select the clock source based on

the device configuration bit values (FOS<1:0> and

FPR<3:0>). Furthermore, if an Oscillator mode is

selected, the BOR will activate the Oscillator Start-up

Timer (OST). The system clock is held until OST

expires. If the PLL is used, then the clock will be held

until the LOCK bit (OSCCON<5>) is ‘1’.

Concurrently, the POR time-out (TPOR) and the PWRT

time-out (TPWRT) will be applied before the internal Reset

is released. If TPWRT = 0 and a crystal oscillator is being

used, then a nominal delay of TFSCM = 100 µs is applied.

The total delay in this case is (TPOR + TFSCM).

The BOR status bit (RCON<1>) will be set to indicate

that a BOR has occurred. The BOR circuit, if enabled,

will continue to operate while in Sleep or Idle modes

and will reset the device should VDD fall below the BOR

threshold voltage.

FIGURE 17-6: EXTERNAL POWER-ON

RESET CIRCUIT (FOR

SLOW VDD POWER-UP)

Note: The BOR voltage trip points indicated here

are nominal values provided for design

guidance only. Refer to the Electrical

Specifications in the specific device data

sheet for BOR voltage limit specifications.

Note: Dedicated supervisory devices, such as

the MCP1XX and MCP8XX, may also be

used as an external Power-on Reset

circuit.

Note 1: External Power-on Reset circuit is required

only if the VDD power-up slope is too slow.

The diode D helps discharge the capacitor

quickly when VDD powers down.

2: R should be suitably chosen so as to make

sure that the voltage drop across R does not

violate the device’s electrical specifications.

3: R1 should be suitably chosen so as to limit

any current flowing into MCLR from external

capacitor C, in the event of MCLR/VPP pin

breakdown due to Electrostatic Discharge

(ESD), or Electrical Overstress (EOS).

VDD

dsPIC30F

MCLR

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 122 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Table 17-5 shows the Reset conditions for the RCON

are R/W, the information in the table implies that all the

bits are negated prior to the action specified in the

condition column.

TABLE 17-5: INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER: CASE 1

Table 17-6 shows a second example of the bit

conditions for the RCON register. In this case, it is not

assumed the user has set/cleared specific bits prior to

action specified in the condition column.

TABLE 17-6: INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER: CASE 2

Condition Program

Counter TRAPR IOPUWR EXTR SWR WDTO IDLE SLEEP POR BOR

Power-on Reset 0x000000 000000011

Brown-out Reset 0x000000 000000001

MCLR Reset during normal

operation

0x000000 001000000

Software Reset during

normal operation

0x000000 000100000

MCLR Reset during Sleep 0x000000 001000100

MCLR Reset during Idle 0x000000 001001000

WDT Time-out Reset 0x000000 000010000

WDT Wake-up PC + 2 000010100

Interrupt Wake-up from

Sleep

PC + 2(1) 000000100

Clock Failure Trap 0x000004 000000000

Trap Reset 0x000000 100000000

Illegal Operation Trap 0x000000 010000000

Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’

Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an enabled interrupt, the PC is loaded with the corresponding interrupt vector.

Condition Program

Counter TRAPR IOPUWR EXTR SWR WDTO IDLE SLEEP POR BOR

Power-on Reset 0x000000 000000011

Brown-out Reset 0x000000 uuuuuuu01

MCLR Reset during normal

operation

0x000000 uu10000uu

Software Reset during

normal operation

0x000000 uu01000uu

MCLR Reset during Sleep 0x000000 uu1u001uu

MCLR Reset during Idle 0x000000 uu1u010uu

WDT Time-out Reset 0x000000 uu00100uu

WDT Wake-up PC + 2 uuuu1u1uu

Interrupt Wake-up from

Sleep

PC + 2(1) uuuuuu1uu

Clock Failure Trap 0x000004 uuuuuuuuu

Trap Reset 0x000000 1uuuuuuuu

Illegal Operation Reset 0x000000 u1uuuuuuu

Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’

Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an enabled interrupt, the PC is loaded with the corresponding interrupt vector.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 123

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

17.4 Watchdog Timer (WDT)

17.4.1 WATCHDOG TIMER OPERATION

The primary function of the Watchdog Timer (WDT) is

to reset the processor in the event of a software mal-

function. The WDT is a free-running timer which runs

off an on-chip RC oscillator, requiring no external com-

ponent. Therefore, the WDT timer will continue to oper-

ate even if the main processor clock (e.g., the crystal

oscillator) fails.

17.4.2 ENABLING AND DISABLING

THE WDT

The Watchdog Timer can be “Enabled” or “Disabled”

only through a configuration bit (FWDTEN) in the

Configuration register, FWDT.

Setting FWDTEN = 1 enables the Watchdog Timer. The

enabling is done when programming the device. By

default, after chip erase, FWDTEN bit = 1. Any device

programmer capable of programming dsPIC30F

devices allows programming of this and other

configuration bits.

If enabled, the WDT will increment until it overflows or

“times out”. A WDT time-out will force a device Reset

(except during Sleep). To prevent a WDT time-out, the

user must clear the Watchdog Timer using a CLRWDT

instruction.

If a WDT times out during Sleep, the device will wake-

up. The WDTO bit in the RCON register will be cleared

to indicate a wake-up resulting from a WDT time-out.

Setting FWDTEN = 0 allows user software to enable/

disable the Watchdog Timer via the SWDTEN

(RCON<5>) control bit.

17.5 Low Voltage Detect

The Low Voltage Detect (LVD) module is used to detect

when the VDD of the device drops below a threshold

value, VLVD, which is determined by the LVDL<3:0>

bits (RCON<11:8>) and is thus user programmable.

The internal voltage reference circuitry requires a nom-

inal amount of time to stabilize, and the BGST bit

(RCON<13>) indicates when the voltage reference has

stabilized.

In some devices, the LVD threshold voltage may be

applied externally on the LVDIN pin.

The LVD module is enabled by setting the LVDEN bit

(RCON<12>).

17.6 Power Saving Modes

There are two power saving states that can be entered

through the execution of a special instruction, PWRSAV;

these are Sleep and Idle.

The format of the PWRSAV instruction is as follows:

PWRSAV <parameter>, where ‘parameter’ defines

Idle or Sleep mode.

17.6.1 SLEEP MODE

In Sleep mode, the clock to the CPU and peripherals is

shutdown. If an on-chip oscillator is being used, it is

shutdown.

The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is not functional during

Sleep since there is no clock to monitor. However,

LPRC clock remains active if WDT is operational during

Sleep.

The brown-out protection circuit and the Low Voltage

Detect circuit, if enabled, will remain functional during

Sleep.

The processor wakes up from Sleep if at least one of

the following conditions has occurred:

• any interrupt that is individually enabled and

meets the required priority level

• any Reset (POR, BOR and MCLR)

• WDT time-out

On waking up from Sleep mode, the processor will

restart the same clock that was active prior to entry into

Sleep mode. When clock switching is enabled, bits

COSC<1:0> will determine the oscillator source that

will be used on wake-up. If clock switch is disabled,

then there is only one system clock.

If the clock source is an oscillator, the clock to the

device will be held off until OST times out (indicating a

stable oscillator). If PLL is used, the system clock is

held off until LOCK = 1 (indicating that the PLL is

stable). In either case, TPOR, TLOCK and TPWRT delays

are applied.

If EC, FRC, LPRC or EXTRC oscillators are used, then

a delay of TPOR (~ 10 µs) is applied. This is the smallest

delay possible on wake-up from Sleep.

Moreover, if LP oscillator was active during Sleep and

LP is the oscillator used on wake-up, then the start-up

delay will be equal to TPOR. PWRT delay and OST

timer delay are not applied. In order to have -the small-

est possible start-up delay when waking up from Sleep,

one of these faster wake-up options should be selected

before entering Sleep.

Note: If a POR or BOR occurred, the selection of

the oscillator is based on the FOS<1:0>

and FPR<3:0> configuration bits.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 124 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Any interrupt that is individually enabled (using the cor-

responding IE bit) and meets the prevailing priority level

will be able to wake-up the processor. The processor will

process the interrupt and branch to the ISR. The Sleep

status bit in the RCON register is set upon wake-up.

All Resets will wake-up the processor from Sleep

mode. Any Reset, other than POR, will set the Sleep

status bit. In a POR, the Sleep bit is cleared.

If the Watchdog Timer is enabled, then the processor

will wake-up from Sleep mode upon WDT time-out. The

Sleep and WDTO status bits are both set.

17.6.2 IDLE MODE

In Idle mode, the clock to the CPU is shutdown while

peripherals keep running. Unlike Sleep mode, the clock

source remains active.

Several peripherals have a control bit in each module

that allows them to operate during Idle.

LPRC Fail-Safe Clock remains active if clock failure

detect is enabled.

The processor wakes up from Idle if at least one of the

following conditions has occurred:

• any interrupt that is individually enabled (IE bit is

‘1’) and meets the required priority level

• any Reset (POR, BOR, MCLR)

• WDT time-out

Upon wake-up from Idle mode, the clock is re-applied

to the CPU and instruction execution begins immedi-

ately, starting with the instruction following the PWRSAV

instruction.

Any interrupt that is individually enabled (using IE bit)

and meets the prevailing priority level will be able to

wake-up the processor. The processor will process the

interrupt and branch to the ISR. The Idle status bit in

the RCON register is set upon wake-up.

Any Reset other than POR will set the Idle status bit.

On a POR, the Idle bit is cleared.

If Watchdog Timer is enabled, then the processor will

wake-up from Idle mode upon WDT time-out. The Idle

and WDTO status bits are both set.

Unlike wake-up from Sleep, there are no time delays

involved in wake-up from Idle.

17.7 Device Configuration Registers

The configuration bits in each device configuration reg-

ister specify some of the Device modes and are

programmed by a device programmer, or by using the

In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) feature of

the device. Each device configuration register is a

24-bit register, but only the lower 16 bits of each regis-

ter are used to hold configuration data. There are four

device configuration registers available to the user:

1. FOSC (0xF80000): Oscillator Configuration

2. FWDT (0xF80002): Watchdog Timer

Configuration Register

3. FBORPOR (0xF80004): BOR and POR

Configuration Register

4. FGS (0xF8000A): General Code Segment

Configuration Register

The placement of the configuration bits is automatically

handled when you select the device in your device

programmer. The desired state of the configuration bits

may be specified in the source code (dependent on the

language tool used), or through the programming

interface. After the device has been programmed, the

application software may read the configuration bit

values through the table read instructions. For addi-

tional information, please refer to the Programming

Specifications of the device.

Note: In spite of various delays applied (TPOR,

TLOCK and TPWRT), the crystal oscillator

(and PLL) may not be active at the end of

the time-out (e.g., for low frequency crys-

tals). In such cases, if FSCM is enabled,

then the device will detect this as a clock

failure and process the clock failure trap, the

FRC oscillator will be enabled and the user

will have to re-enable the crystal oscillator. If

FSCM is not enabled, then the device will

simply suspend execution of code until the

clock is stable and will remain in Sleep until

the oscillator clock has started.

Note: If the code protection configuration fuse

bits (FGS<GCP> and FGS<GWRP>)

have been programmed, an erase of the

entire code-protected device is only

possible at voltages VDD ≥ 4.5V.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 125

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

17.8 Peripheral Module Disable (PMD)

Registers

The Peripheral Module Disable (PMD) registers pro-

vide a method to disable a peripheral module by stop-

ping all clock sources supplied to that module. When a

peripheral is disabled via the appropriate PMD control

bit, the peripheral is in a minimum power consumption

state. The control and status registers associated with

the peripheral will also be disabled so writes to those

registers will have no effect and read values will be

invalid.

A peripheral module will only be enabled if both the

associated bit in the the PMD register is cleared and

the peripheral is supported by the specific dsPIC vari-

ant. If the peripheral is present in the device, it is

enabled in the PMD register by default.

17.9 In-Circuit Debugger

When MPLAB ICD2 is selected as a Debugger, the In-

Circuit Debugging functionality is enabled. This func-

tion allows simple debugging functions when used with

MPLAB IDE. When the device has this feature enabled,

some of the resources are not available for general

use. These resources include the first 80 bytes of Data

RAM and two I/O pins.

One of four pairs of Debug I/O pins may be selected by

the user using configuration options in MPLAB IDE.

These pin pairs are named EMUD/EMUC, EMUD1/

EMUC1, EMUD2/EMUC2 and EMUD3/EMUC3.

In each case, the selected EMUD pin is the Emulation/

Debug Data line, and the EMUC pin is the Emulation/

Debug Clock line. These pins will interface to the

MPLAB ICD 2 module available from Microchip. The

selected pair of Debug I/O pins is used by MPLAB

ICD 2 to send commands and receive responses, as

well as to send and receive data. To use the In-Circuit

Debugger function of the device, the design must

implement ICSP connections to MCLR, VDD, VSS,

PGC, PGD, and the selected EMUDx/EMUCx pin pair.

This gives rise to two possibilities:

1. If EMUD/EMUC is selected as the Debug I/O pin

pair, then only a 5-pin interface is required, as

the EMUD and EMUC pin functions are multi-

plexed with the PGD and PGC pin functions in

all dsPIC30F devices.

2. If EMUD1/EMUC1, EMUD2/EMUC2 or EMUD3/

EMUC3 is selected as the Debug I/O pin pair,

then a 7-pin interface is required, as the

EMUDx/EMUCx pin functions (x = 1, 2 or 3) are

not multiplexed with the PGD and PGC pin

functions.

Note: If a PMD bit is set, the corresponding mod-

ule is disabled after a delay of 1 instruction

cycle. Similarly, if a PMD bit is cleared, the

corresponding module is enabled after a

delay of 1 instruction cycle (assuming the

module control registers are already

configured to enable module operation).

Note: In the dsPIC30F2011, dsPIC30F3012 and

dsPIC30F2012 devices, the U2MD bit is

readable and writable and will be read as

‘1’ when set.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 126 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 17-7: SYSTEM INTEGRATION REGISTER MAP

TABLE 17-8: DEVICE CONFIGURATION REGISTER MAP

Note: Refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual (DS70046) for descriptions of register bit fields.

SFR

Name Addr. Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset State

RCON 0740 TRAPR IOPUWR BGST LVDEN LVDL<3:0> EXTR SWR SWDTEN WDTO SLEEP IDLE BOR POR (Note 1)

OSCCON 0742 — COSC<2:0> — NOSC<2:0> POST<1:0> LOCK —CF— LPOSCEN OSWEN (Note 2)

OSCTUN 0744 — — — — — — — — — — — — TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 (Note 2)

PMD1 0770 T5MD T4MD T3MD T2MD T1MD —— DCIMD I2CMD U2MD U1MD SPI2MD SPI1MD C2MD C1MD ADCMD 0000 0000 0000 0000

PMD2 0772 IC8MD IC7MD IC6MD IC5MD IC4MD IC3MD IC2MD IC1MD OC8MD OC7MD OC6MD OC5MD OC4MD OC3MD OC2MD OC1MD 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note 1: Reset state depends on type of Reset.

2: Reset state depends on configuration bits.

File Name Addr. Bits 23-16 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

FOSC F80000 — FCKSM<1:0> — — — FOS<2:0> — — — FPR<4:0>

FWDT F80002 — FWDTEN — — — — — — — — — FWPSA<1:0> FWPSB<3:0>

FBORPOR F80004 — MCLREN — — — — — — —BOREN— BORV<1:0> — — FPWRT<1:0>

FGS F8000A — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — GCP GWRP

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 127

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

18.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY

The dsPIC30F instruction set adds many

enhancements to the previous PICmicro® instruction

sets, while maintaining an easy migration from

PICmicro instruction sets.

Most instructions are a single program memory word

(24 bits). Only three instructions require two program

memory locations.

Each single word instruction is a 24-bit word divided

into an 8-bit opcode which specifies the instruction

type, and one or more operands which further specify

the operation of the instruction.

The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped

into five basic categories:

• Word or byte-oriented operations

• Bit-oriented operations

• Literal operations

• DSP operations

• Control operations

Table 18-1 shows the general symbols used in

describing the instructions.

The dsPIC30F instruction set summary in Table 18-2

lists all the instructions, along with the status flags

affected by each instruction.

Most word or byte-oriented W register instructions

(including barrel shift instructions) have three

operands:

• The first source operand which is typically a

• The second source operand which is typically a

• The destination of the result which is typically a

However, word or byte-oriented file register instructions

have two operands:

• The file register specified by the value ‘f’

• The destination, which could either be the file

‘WREG’

Most bit-oriented instructions (including simple rotate/

shift instructions) have two operands:

• The W register (with or without an address

modifier) or file register (specified by the value of

‘Ws’ or ‘f’)

• The bit in the W register or file register

(specified by a literal value or indirectly by the

contents of register ‘Wb’)

The literal instructions that involve data movement may

use some of the following operands:

• A literal value to be loaded into a W register or file

• The W register or file register where the literal

value is to be loaded (specified by ‘Wb’ or ‘f’)

However, literal instructions that involve arithmetic or

logical operations use some of the following operands:

• The first source operand which is a register ‘Wb’

without any address modifier

• The second source operand which is a literal

value

• The destination of the result (only if not the same

as the first source operand) which is typically a

The MAC class of DSP instructions may use some of the

following operands:

• The accumulator (A or B) to be used (required

operand)

• The W registers to be used as the two operands

• The X and Y address space pre-fetch operations

• The X and Y address space pre-fetch destinations

• The accumulator write back destination

The other DSP instructions do not involve any

multiplication, and may include:

• The accumulator to be used (required)

• The source or destination operand (designated as

Wso or Wdo, respectively) with or without an

address modifier

• The amount of shift specified by a W register ‘Wn’

or a literal value

The control instructions may use some of the following

operands:

• A program memory address

• The mode of the table read and table write

instructions

Note: This data sheet summarizes features of this group

of dsPIC30F devices and is not intended to be a complete

reference source. For more information on the CPU,

peripherals, register descriptions and general device

functionality, refer to the dsPIC30F Family Reference

Manual (DS70046). For more information on the device

instruction set and programming, refer to the dsPIC30F

Programmer’s Reference Manual (DS70030).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 128 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

All instructions are a single word, except for certain

double-word instructions, which were made double-

word instructions so that all the required information is

available in these 48 bits. In the second word, the

8 MSbs are ‘0’s. If this second word is executed as an

instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP.

Most single word instructions are executed in a single

instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the

program counter is changed as a result of the instruc-

tion. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction

cycles with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed

as a NOP. Notable exceptions are the BRA (uncondi-

tional/computed branch), indirect CALL/GOTO, all table

reads and writes, and RETURN/RETFIE instructions,

which are single word instructions but take two or three

cycles. Certain instructions that involve skipping over

the subsequent instruction require either two or three

cycles if the skip is performed, depending on whether

the instruction being skipped is a single word or two-

word instruction. Moreover, double-word moves

require two cycles. The double-word instructions

execute in two instruction cycles.

Note: For more details on the instruction set,

refer to the Programmer’s Reference

Manual.

TABLE 18-1: SYMBOLS USED IN OPCODE DESCRIPTIONS

Field Description

#text Means literal defined by “text”

(text) Means “content of text”

[text] Means “the location addressed by text”

{ } Optional field or operation

<n:m> Register bit field

.b Byte mode selection

.d Double-Word mode selection

.S Shadow register select

.w Word mode selection (default)

Acc One of two accumulators {A, B}

AWB Accumulator write back destination address register ∈ {W13, [W13]+=2}

bit4 4-bit bit selection field (used in word addressed instructions) ∈ {0...15}

C, DC, N, OV, Z MCU status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Negative, Overflow, Sticky Zero

Expr Absolute address, label or expression (resolved by the linker)

f File register address ∈ {0x0000...0x1FFF}

lit1 1-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0,1}

lit4 4-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...15}

lit5 5-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...31}

lit8 8-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...255}

lit10 10-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...255} for Byte mode, {0:1023} for Word mode

lit14 14-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...16384}

lit16 16-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...65535}

lit23 23-bit unsigned literal ∈ {0...8388608}; LSB must be 0

None Field does not require an entry, may be blank

OA, OB, SA, SB DSP status bits: AccA Overflow, AccB Overflow, AccA Saturate, AccB Saturate

PC Program Counter

Slit10 10-bit signed literal ∈ {-512...511}

Slit16 16-bit signed literal ∈ {-32768...32767}

Slit6 6-bit signed literal ∈ {-16...16}

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 129

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

Wb Base W register ∈ {W0..W15}

Wd Destination W register ∈ { Wd, [Wd], [Wd++], [Wd--], [++Wd], [--Wd] }

Wdo Destination W register ∈

{ Wnd, [Wnd], [Wnd++], [Wnd--], [++Wnd], [--Wnd], [Wnd+Wb] }

Wm,Wn Dividend, Divisor working register pair (direct addressing)

Wm*Wm Multiplicand and Multiplier working register pair for Square instructions ∈

{W4*W4,W5*W5,W6*W6,W7*W7}

Wm*Wn Multiplicand and Multiplier working register pair for DSP instructions ∈

{W4*W5,W4*W6,W4*W7,W5*W6,W5*W7,W6*W7}

Wn One of 16 working registers ∈ {W0..W15}

Wnd One of 16 destination working registers ∈ {W0..W15}

Wns One of 16 source working registers ∈ {W0..W15}

WREG W0 (working register used in file register instructions)

Ws Source W register ∈ { Ws, [Ws], [Ws++], [Ws--], [++Ws], [--Ws] }

Wso Source W register ∈

{ Wns, [Wns], [Wns++], [Wns--], [++Wns], [--Wns], [Wns+Wb] }

Wx X data space pre-fetch address register for DSP instructions

∈ {[W8]+=6, [W8]+=4, [W8]+=2, [W8], [W8]-=6, [W8]-=4, [W8]-=2,

[W9]+=6, [W9]+=4, [W9]+=2, [W9], [W9]-=6, [W9]-=4, [W9]-=2,

[W9+W12],none}

Wxd X data space pre-fetch destination register for DSP instructions ∈ {W4..W7}

Wy Y data space pre-fetch address register for DSP instructions

∈ {[W10]+=6, [W10]+=4, [W10]+=2, [W10], [W10]-=6, [W10]-=4, [W10]-=2,

[W11]+=6, [W11]+=4, [W11]+=2, [W11], [W11]-=6, [W11]-=4, [W11]-=2,

[W11+W12], none}

Wyd Y data space pre-fetch destination register for DSP instructions ∈ {W4..W7}

TABLE 18-1: SYMBOLS USED IN OPCODE DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)

Field Description

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 130 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 18-2: INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

Base

Instr

Assembly

Mnemonic Assembly Syntax Description # of

Words

# of

Cycles

Status Flags

Affected

1 ADD ADD Acc Add Accumulators 1 1 OA,OB,SA,SB

ADD f f = f + WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADD f,WREG WREG = f + WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADD #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 + Wd 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADD Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb + Ws 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADD Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb + lit5 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADD Wso,#Slit4,Acc 16-bit Signed Add to Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,SA,SB

2 ADDC ADDC f f = f + WREG + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADDC f,WREG WREG = f + WREG + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADDC #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 + Wd + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADDC Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb + Ws + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

ADDC Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb + lit5 + (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

3 AND AND f f = f .AND. WREG 1 1 N,Z

AND f,WREG WREG = f .AND. WREG 1 1 N,Z

AND #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 .AND. Wd 1 1 N,Z

AND Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb .AND. Ws 1 1 N,Z

AND Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb .AND. lit5 1 1 N,Z

4 ASR ASR f f = Arithmetic Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

ASR f,WREG WREG = Arithmetic Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

ASR Ws,Wd Wd = Arithmetic Right Shift Ws 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

ASR Wb,Wns,Wnd Wnd = Arithmetic Right Shift Wb by Wns 1 1 N,Z

ASR Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wnd = Arithmetic Right Shift Wb by lit5 1 1 N,Z

5 BCLR BCLR f,#bit4 Bit Clear f 1 1 None

BCLR Ws,#bit4 Bit Clear Ws 1 1 None

6 BRA BRA C,Expr Branch if Carry 1 1 (2) None

BRA GE,Expr Branch if greater than or equal 1 1 (2) None

BRA GEU,Expr Branch if unsigned greater than or equal 1 1 (2) None

BRA GT,Expr Branch if greater than 1 1 (2) None

BRA GTU,Expr Branch if unsigned greater than 1 1 (2) None

BRA LE,Expr Branch if less than or equal 1 1 (2) None

BRA LEU,Expr Branch if unsigned less than or equal 1 1 (2) None

BRA LT,Expr Branch if less than 1 1 (2) None

BRA LTU,Expr Branch if unsigned less than 1 1 (2) None

BRA N,Expr Branch if Negative 1 1 (2) None

BRA NC,Expr Branch if Not Carry 1 1 (2) None

BRA NN,Expr Branch if Not Negative 1 1 (2) None

BRA NOV,Expr Branch if Not Overflow 1 1 (2) None

BRA NZ,Expr Branch if Not Zero 1 1 (2) None

BRA OA,Expr Branch if Accumulator A overflow 1 1 (2) None

BRA OB,Expr Branch if Accumulator B overflow 1 1 (2) None

BRA OV,Expr Branch if Overflow 1 1 (2) None

BRA SA,Expr Branch if Accumulator A saturated 1 1 (2) None

BRA SB,Expr Branch if Accumulator B saturated 1 1 (2) None

BRA Expr Branch Unconditionally 1 2 None

BRA Z,Expr Branch if Zero 1 1 (2) None

BRA Wn Computed Branch 1 2 None

7 BSET BSET f,#bit4 Bit Set f 1 1 None

BSET Ws,#bit4 Bit Set Ws 1 1 None

8 BSW BSW.C Ws,Wb Write C bit to Ws<Wb> 1 1 None

BSW.Z Ws,Wb Write Z bit to Ws<Wb> 1 1 None

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 131

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

9 BTG BTG f,#bit4 Bit Toggle f 1 1 None

BTG Ws,#bit4 Bit Toggle Ws 1 1 None

10 BTSC BTSC f,#bit4 Bit Test f, Skip if Clear 1 1

(2 or 3)

None

BTSC Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws, Skip if Clear 1 1

(2 or 3)

None

11 BTSS BTSS f,#bit4 Bit Test f, Skip if Set 1 1

(2 or 3)

None

BTSS Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws, Skip if Set 1 1

(2 or 3)

None

12 BTST BTST f,#bit4 Bit Test f 1 1 Z

BTST.C Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to C 1 1 C

BTST.Z Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to Z 1 1 Z

BTST.C Ws,Wb Bit Test Ws<Wb> to C 1 1 C

BTST.Z Ws,Wb Bit Test Ws<Wb> to Z 1 1 Z

13 BTSTS BTSTS f,#bit4 Bit Test then Set f 1 1 Z

BTSTS.C Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to C, then Set 1 1 C

BTSTS.Z Ws,#bit4 Bit Test Ws to Z, then Set 1 1 Z

14 CALL CALL lit23 Call subroutine 2 2 None

CALL Wn Call indirect subroutine 1 2 None

15 CLR CLR f f = 0x0000 1 1 None

CLR WREG WREG = 0x0000 1 1 None

CLR Ws Ws = 0x0000 1 1 None

CLR Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Clear Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,SA,SB

16 CLRWDT CLRWDT Clear Watchdog Timer 1 1 WDTO,Sleep

17 COM COM f f = f 11 N,Z

COM f,WREG WREG = f 11 N,Z

COM Ws,Wd Wd = Ws 11 N,Z

18 CP CP f Compare f with WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

CP Wb,#lit5 Compare Wb with lit5 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

CP Wb,Ws Compare Wb with Ws (Wb - Ws) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

19 CP0 CP0 f Compare f with 0x0000 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

CP0 Ws Compare Ws with 0x0000 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

20 CP1 CP1 f Compare f with 0xFFFF 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

CP1 Ws Compare Ws with 0xFFFF 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

21 CPB CPB f Compare f with WREG, with Borrow 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

CPB Wb,#lit5 Compare Wb with lit5, with Borrow 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

CPB Wb,Ws Compare Wb with Ws, with Borrow

(Wb - Ws - C)

1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

22 CPSEQ CPSEQ Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if = 1 1

(2 or 3)

None

23 CPSGT CPSGT Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if > 1 1

(2 or 3)

None

24 CPSLT CPSLT Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if < 1 1

(2 or 3)

None

25 CPSNE CPSNE Wb, Wn Compare Wb with Wn, skip if ≠11

(2 or 3)

None

26 DAW DAW Wn Wn = decimal adjust Wn 1 1 C

27 DEC DEC f f = f -1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

DEC f,WREG WREG = f -1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

DEC Ws,Wd Wd = Ws - 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

28 DEC2 DEC2 f f = f -2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

DEC2 f,WREG WREG = f -2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

DEC2 Ws,Wd Wd = Ws - 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

TABLE 18-2: INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)

Base

Instr

Assembly

Mnemonic Assembly Syntax Description # of

Words

# of

Cycles

Status Flags

Affected

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 132 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

29 DISI DISI #lit14 Disable Interrupts for k instruction cycles 1 1 None

30 DIV DIV.S Wm,Wn Signed 16/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C,OV

DIV.SD Wm,Wn Signed 32/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C,OV

DIV.U Wm,Wn Unsigned 16/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C,OV

DIV.UD Wm,Wn Unsigned 32/16-bit Integer Divide 1 18 N,Z,C,OV

31 DIVF DIVF Wm,Wn Signed 16/16-bit Fractional Divide 1 18 N,Z,C,OV

32 DO DO #lit14,Expr Do code to PC+Expr, lit14+1 times 2 2 None

DO Wn,Expr Do code to PC+Expr, (Wn)+1 times 2 2 None

33 ED ED Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Euclidean Distance (no accumulate) 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

34 EDAC EDAC Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wy,Wxd Euclidean Distance 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

35 EXCH EXCH Wns,Wnd Swap Wns with Wnd 1 1 None

36 FBCL FBCL Ws,Wnd Find Bit Change from Left (MSb) Side 1 1 C

37 FF1L FF1L Ws,Wnd Find First One from Left (MSb) Side 1 1 C

38 FF1R FF1R Ws,Wnd Find First One from Right (LSb) Side 1 1 C

39 GOTO GOTO Expr Go to address 2 2 None

GOTO Wn Go to indirect 1 2 None

40 INC INC f f = f + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

INC f,WREG WREG = f + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

INC Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

41 INC2 INC2 f f = f + 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

INC2 f,WREG WREG = f + 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

INC2 Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 2 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

42 IOR IOR f f = f .IOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z

IOR f,WREG WREG = f .IOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z

IOR #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 .IOR. Wd 1 1 N,Z

IOR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb .IOR. Ws 1 1 N,Z

IOR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb .IOR. lit5 1 1 N,Z

43 LAC LAC Wso,#Slit4,Acc Load Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

44 LNK LNK #lit14 Link frame pointer 1 1 None

45 LSR LSR f f = Logical Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

LSR f,WREG WREG = Logical Right Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

LSR Ws,Wd Wd = Logical Right Shift Ws 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

LSR Wb,Wns,Wnd Wnd = Logical Right Shift Wb by Wns 1 1 N,Z

LSR Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wnd = Logical Right Shift Wb by lit5 1 1 N,Z

46 MAC MAC Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,

AWB

Multiply and Accumulate 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

MAC Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Square and Accumulate 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

47 MOV MOV f,Wn Move f to Wn 1 1 None

MOV f Move f to f 1 1 N,Z

MOV f,WREG Move f to WREG 1 1 N,Z

MOV #lit16,Wn Move 16-bit literal to Wn 1 1 None

MOV.b #lit8,Wn Move 8-bit literal to Wn 1 1 None

MOV Wn,f Move Wn to f 1 1 None

MOV Wso,Wdo Move Ws to Wd 1 1 None

MOV WREG,f Move WREG to f 1 1 N,Z

MOV.D Wns,Wd Move Double from W(ns):W(ns+1) to Wd 1 2 None

MOV.D Ws,Wnd Move Double from Ws to W(nd+1):W(nd) 1 2 None

48 MOVSAC MOVSAC Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,AWB Pre-fetch and store accumulator 1 1 None

TABLE 18-2: INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)

Base

Instr

Assembly

Mnemonic Assembly Syntax Description # of

Words

# of

Cycles

Status Flags

Affected

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 133

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

49 MPY MPY Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Multiply Wm by Wn to Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

MPY Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd Square Wm to Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

50 MPY.N MPY.N Wm*Wn,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd -(Multiply Wm by Wn) to Accumulator 1 1 None

51 MSC MSC Wm*Wm,Acc,Wx,Wxd,Wy,Wyd,

AWB

Multiply and Subtract from Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

52 MUL MUL.SS Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd+1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * signed(Ws) 1 1 None

MUL.SU Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd+1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(Ws) 1 1 None

MUL.US Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd+1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) * signed(Ws) 1 1 None

MUL.UU Wb,Ws,Wnd {Wnd+1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) *

unsigned(Ws)

1 1 None

MUL.SU Wb,#lit5,Wnd {Wnd+1, Wnd} = signed(Wb) * unsigned(lit5) 1 1 None

MUL.UU Wb,#lit5,Wnd {Wnd+1, Wnd} = unsigned(Wb) *

unsigned(lit5)

1 1 None

MUL f W3:W2 = f * WREG 1 1 None

53 NEG NEG Acc Negate Accumulator 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

NEG f f = f + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

NEG f,WREG WREG = f + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

NEG Ws,Wd Wd = Ws + 1 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

54 NOP NOP No Operation 1 1 None

NOPR No Operation 1 1 None

55 POP POP f Pop f from top-of-stack (TOS) 1 1 None

POP Wdo Pop from top-of-stack (TOS) to Wdo 1 1 None

POP.D Wnd Pop from top-of-stack (TOS) to

W(nd):W(nd+1)

1 2 None

POP.S Pop Shadow Registers 1 1 All

56 PUSH PUSH f Push f to top-of-stack (TOS) 1 1 None

PUSH Wso Push Wso to top-of-stack (TOS) 1 1 None

PUSH.D Wns Push W(ns):W(ns+1) to top-of-stack (TOS) 1 2 None

PUSH.S Push Shadow Registers 1 1 None

57 PWRSAV PWRSAV #lit1 Go into Sleep or Idle mode 1 1 WDTO,Sleep

58 RCALL RCALL Expr Relative Call 1 2 None

RCALL Wn Computed Call 1 2 None

59 REPEAT REPEAT #lit14 Repeat Next Instruction lit14+1 times 1 1 None

REPEAT Wn Repeat Next Instruction (Wn)+1 times 1 1 None

60 RESET RESET Software device Reset 1 1 None

61 RETFIE RETFIE Return from interrupt 1 3 (2) None

62 RETLW RETLW #lit10,Wn Return with literal in Wn 1 3 (2) None

63 RETURN RETURN Return from Subroutine 1 3 (2) None

64 RLC RLC f f = Rotate Left through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z

RLC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Left through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z

RLC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Left through Carry Ws 1 1 C,N,Z

65 RLNC RLNC f f = Rotate Left (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z

RLNC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Left (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z

RLNC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Left (No Carry) Ws 1 1 N,Z

66 RRC RRC f f = Rotate Right through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z

RRC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Right through Carry f 1 1 C,N,Z

RRC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Right through Carry Ws 1 1 C,N,Z

67 RRNC RRNC f f = Rotate Right (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z

RRNC f,WREG WREG = Rotate Right (No Carry) f 1 1 N,Z

RRNC Ws,Wd Wd = Rotate Right (No Carry) Ws 1 1 N,Z

TABLE 18-2: INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)

Base

Instr

Assembly

Mnemonic Assembly Syntax Description # of

Words

# of

Cycles

Status Flags

Affected

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 134 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

68 SAC SAC Acc,#Slit4,Wdo Store Accumulator 1 1 None

SAC.R Acc,#Slit4,Wdo Store Rounded Accumulator 1 1 None

69 SE SE Ws,Wnd Wnd = sign-extended Ws 1 1 C,N,Z

70 SETM SETM f f = 0xFFFF 1 1 None

SETM WREG WREG = 0xFFFF 1 1 None

SETM Ws Ws = 0xFFFF 1 1 None

71 SFTAC SFTAC Acc,Wn Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by (Wn) 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

SFTAC Acc,#Slit6 Arithmetic Shift Accumulator by Slit6 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

72 SL SL f f = Left Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

SL f,WREG WREG = Left Shift f 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

SL Ws,Wd Wd = Left Shift Ws 1 1 C,N,OV,Z

SL Wb,Wns,Wnd Wnd = Left Shift Wb by Wns 1 1 N,Z

SL Wb,#lit5,Wnd Wnd = Left Shift Wb by lit5 1 1 N,Z

73 SUB SUB Acc Subtract Accumulators 1 1 OA,OB,OAB,

SA,SB,SAB

SUB f f = f - WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUB f,WREG WREG = f - WREG 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUB #lit10,Wn Wn = Wn - lit10 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUB Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb - Ws 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUB Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb - lit5 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

74 SUBB SUBB f f = f - WREG - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBB f,WREG WREG = f - WREG - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBB #lit10,Wn Wn = Wn - lit10 - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBB Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb - Ws - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBB Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb - lit5 - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

75 SUBR SUBR f f = WREG - f 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBR f,WREG WREG = WREG - f 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Ws - Wb 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = lit5 - Wb 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

76 SUBBR SUBBR f f = WREG - f - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBBR f,WREG WREG = WREG -f - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBBR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Ws - Wb - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

SUBBR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = lit5 - Wb - (C) 1 1 C,DC,N,OV,Z

77 SWAP SWAP.b Wn Wn = nibble swap Wn 1 1 None

SWAP Wn Wn = byte swap Wn 1 1 None

78 TBLRDH TBLRDH Ws,Wd Read Prog<23:16> to Wd<7:0> 1 2 None

79 TBLRDL TBLRDL Ws,Wd Read Prog<15:0> to Wd 1 2 None

80 TBLWTH TBLWTH Ws,Wd Write Ws<7:0> to Prog<23:16> 1 2 None

81 TBLWTL TBLWTL Ws,Wd Write Ws to Prog<15:0> 1 2 None

82 ULNK ULNK Unlink frame pointer 1 1 None

83 XOR XOR f f = f .XOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z

XOR f,WREG WREG = f .XOR. WREG 1 1 N,Z

XOR #lit10,Wn Wd = lit10 .XOR. Wd 1 1 N,Z

XOR Wb,Ws,Wd Wd = Wb .XOR. Ws 1 1 N,Z

XOR Wb,#lit5,Wd Wd = Wb .XOR. lit5 1 1 N,Z

84 ZE ZE Ws,Wnd Wnd = Zero-extend Ws 1 1 C,Z,N

TABLE 18-2: INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (CONTINUED)

Base

Instr

Assembly

Mnemonic Assembly Syntax Description # of

Words

# of

Cycles

Status Flags

Affected

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 135

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

19.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT

The PICmicro® microcontrollers are supported with a

full range of hardware and software development tools:

• Integrated Development Environment

- MPLAB® IDE Software

• Assemblers/Compilers/Linkers

-MPASM

TM Assembler

- MPLAB C17 and MPLAB C18 C Compilers

-MPLINK

TM Object Linker/

MPLIBTM Object Librarian

- MPLAB C30 C Compiler

- MPLAB ASM30 Assembler/Linker/Library

• Simulators

- MPLAB SIM Software Simulator

- MPLAB dsPIC30 Software Simulator

• Emulators

- MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator

- MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator

• In-Circuit Debugger

- MPLAB ICD 2

• Device Programmers

-PRO MATE

® II Universal Device Programmer

- PICSTART® Plus Development Programmer

• Low-Cost Demonstration Boards

- PICDEMTM 1 Demonstration Board

- PICDEM.netTM Demonstration Board

- PICDEM 2 Plus Demonstration Board

- PICDEM 3 Demonstration Board

- PICDEM 4 Demonstration Board

- PICDEM 17 Demonstration Board

- PICDEM 18R Demonstration Board

- PICDEM LIN Demonstration Board

- PICDEM USB Demonstration Board

• Evaluation Kits

-K

EELOQ®

- PICDEM MSC

- microID®

-CAN

- PowerSmart®

-Analog

19.1 MPLAB Integrated Development

Environment Software

The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software

development previously unseen in the 8/16-bit micro-

controller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows®

based application that contains:

• An interface to debugging tools

- simulator

- programmer (sold separately)

- emulator (sold separately)

- in-circuit debugger (sold separately)

• A full-featured editor with color coded context

• A multiple project manager

• Customizable data windows with direct edit of

contents

• High-level source code debugging

• Mouse over variable inspection

• Extensive on-line help

The MPLAB IDE allows you to:

• Edit your source files (either assembly or C)

• One touch assemble (or compile) and download

to PICmicro emulator and simulator tools

(automatically updates all project information)

• Debug using:

- source files (assembly or C)

- absolute listing file (mixed assembly and C)

- machine code

MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a

single development paradigm, from the cost effective

simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to

full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning

curve when upgrading to tools with increasing flexibility

and power.

19.2 MPASM Assembler

The MPASM assembler is a full-featured, universal

macro assembler for all PICmicro MCUs.

The MPASM assembler generates relocatable object

files for the MPLINK object linker, Intel® standard HEX

files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol ref-

erence, absolute LST files that contain source lines and

generated machine code and COFF files for

debugging.

The MPASM assembler features include:

• Integration into MPLAB IDE projects

• User defined macros to streamline assembly code

• Conditional assembly for multi-purpose source

files

• Directives that allow complete control over the

assembly process

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 136 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

19.3 MPLAB C17 and MPLAB C18

C Compilers

The MPLAB C17 and MPLAB C18 Code Development

Systems are complete ANSI C compilers for

Microchip’s PIC17CXXX and PIC18CXXX family of

microcontrollers. These compilers provide powerful

integration capabilities, superior code optimization and

ease of use not found with other compilers.

For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide

symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE

debugger.

19.4 MPLINK Object Linker/

MPLIB Object Librarian

The MPLINK object linker combines relocatable

objects created by the MPASM assembler and the

MPLAB C17 and MPLAB C18 C compilers. It can link

relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using

directives from a linker script.

The MPLIB object librarian manages the creation and

modification of library files of precompiled code. When

a routine from a library is called from a source file, only

the modules that contain that routine will be linked in

with the application. This allows large libraries to be

used efficiently in many different applications.

The object linker/library features include:

• Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many

smaller files

• Enhanced code maintainability by grouping

related modules together

• Flexible creation of libraries with easy module

listing, replacement, deletion and extraction

19.5 MPLAB C30 C Compiler

The MPLAB C30 C compiler is a full-featured, ANSI

compliant, optimizing compiler that translates standard

ANSI C programs into dsPIC30F assembly language

source. The compiler also supports many command

line options and language extensions to take full

advantage of the dsPIC30F device hardware capabili-

ties and afford fine control of the compiler code

generator.

MPLAB C30 is distributed with a complete ANSI C

standard library. All library functions have been vali-

dated and conform to the ANSI C library standard. The

library includes functions for string manipulation,

dynamic memory allocation, data conversion, time-

keeping and math functions (trigonometric, exponential

and hyperbolic). The compiler provides symbolic

information for high-level source debugging with the

MPLAB IDE.

19.6 MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker

and Librarian

MPLAB ASM30 assembler produces relocatable

machine code from symbolic assembly language for

dsPIC30F devices. MPLAB C30 compiler uses the

assembler to produce it’s object file. The assembler

generates relocatable object files that can then be

archived or linked with other relocatable object files and

archives to create an executable file. Notable features

of the assembler include:

• Support for the entire dsPIC30F instruction set

• Support for fixed-point and floating-point data

• Command line interface

• Rich directive set

• Flexible macro language

• MPLAB IDE compatibility

19.7 MPLAB SIM Software Simulator

The MPLAB SIM software simulator allows code devel-

opment in a PC hosted environment by simulating the

PICmicro series microcontrollers on an instruction

level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be

examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from

a file, or user defined key press, to any pin. The execu-

tion can be performed in Single-Step, Execute Until

Break or Trace mode.

The MPLAB SIM simulator fully supports symbolic

debugging using the MPLAB C17 and MPLAB C18

C Compilers, as well as the MPASM assembler. The

software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and

debug code outside of the laboratory environment,

making it an excellent, economical software

development tool.

19.8 MPLAB SIM30 Software Simulator

The MPLAB SIM30 software simulator allows code

development in a PC hosted environment by simulating

the dsPIC30F series microcontrollers on an instruction

level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be

examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from

a file, or user defined key press, to any of the pins.

The MPLAB SIM30 simulator fully supports symbolic

debugging using the MPLAB C30 C Compiler and

MPLAB ASM30 assembler. The simulator runs in either

a Command Line mode for automated tasks, or from

MPLAB IDE. This high-speed simulator is designed to

debug, analyze and optimize time intensive DSP

routines.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 137

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

19.9 MPLAB ICE 2000

High-Performance Universal

In-Circuit Emulator

The MPLAB ICE 2000 universal in-circuit emulator is

intended to provide the product development engineer

with a complete microcontroller design tool set for

PICmicro microcontrollers. Software control of the

MPLAB ICE 2000 in-circuit emulator is advanced by

the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment,

which allows editing, building, downloading and source

debugging from a single environment.

The MPLAB ICE 2000 is a full-featured emulator sys-

tem with enhanced trace, trigger and data monitoring

features. Interchangeable processor modules allow the

system to be easily reconfigured for emulation of differ-

ent processors. The universal architecture of the

MPLAB ICE in-circuit emulator allows expansion to

support new PICmicro microcontrollers.

The MPLAB ICE 2000 in-circuit emulator system has

been designed as a real-time emulation system with

advanced features that are typically found on more

expensive development tools. The PC platform and

Microsoft® Windows 32-bit operating system were

chosen to best make these features available in a

simple, unified application.

19.10 MPLAB ICE 4000

High-Performance Universal

In-Circuit Emulator

The MPLAB ICE 4000 universal in-circuit emulator is

intended to provide the product development engineer

with a complete microcontroller design tool set for high-

end PICmicro microcontrollers. Software control of the

MPLAB ICE in-circuit emulator is provided by the

MPLAB Integrated Development Environment, which

allows editing, building, downloading and source

debugging from a single environment.

The MPLAB ICD 4000 is a premium emulator system,

providing the features of MPLAB ICE 2000, but with

increased emulation memory and high-speed perfor-

mance for dsPIC30F and PIC18XXXX devices. Its

advanced emulator features include complex triggering

and timing, up to 2 Mb of emulation memory and the

ability to view variables in real-time.

The MPLAB ICE 4000 in-circuit emulator system has

been designed as a real-time emulation system with

advanced features that are typically found on more

expensive development tools. The PC platform and

Microsoft Windows 32-bit operating system were

chosen to best make these features available in a

simple, unified application.

19.11 MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger

Microchip’s In-Circuit Debugger, MPLAB ICD 2, is a

powerful, low-cost, run-time development tool,

connecting to the host PC via an RS-232 or high-speed

USB interface. This tool is based on the Flash

PICmicro MCUs and can be used to develop for these

and other PICmicro microcontrollers. The MPLAB

ICD 2 utilizes the in-circuit debugging capability built

into the Flash devices. This feature, along with

Microchip’s In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM)

protocol, offers cost effective in-circuit Flash debugging

from the graphical user interface of the MPLAB

Integrated Development Environment. This enables a

designer to develop and debug source code by setting

breakpoints, single-stepping and watching variables,

CPU status and peripheral registers. Running at full

speed enables testing hardware and applications in

real-time. MPLAB ICD 2 also serves as a development

programmer for selected PICmicro devices.

19.12 PRO MATE II Universal Device

Programmer

The PRO MATE II is a universal, CE compliant device

programmer with programmable voltage verification at

VDDMIN and VDDMAX for maximum reliability. It features

an LCD display for instructions and error messages

and a modular detachable socket assembly to support

various package types. In Stand-Alone mode, the

PRO MATE II device programmer can read, verify and

program PICmicro devices without a PC connection. It

can also set code protection in this mode.

19.13 PICSTART Plus Development

Programmer

The PICSTART Plus development programmer is an

easy-to-use, low-cost, prototype programmer. It con-

nects to the PC via a COM (RS-232) port. MPLAB

Integrated Development Environment software makes

using the programmer simple and efficient. The

PICSTART Plus development programmer supports

most PICmicro devices up to 40 pins. Larger pin count

devices, such as the PIC16C92X and PIC17C76X,

may be supported with an adapter socket. The

PICSTART Plus development programmer is CE

compliant.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 138 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

19.14 PICDEM 1 PICmicro

Demonstration Board

The PICDEM 1 demonstration board demonstrates the

capabilities of the PIC16C5X (PIC16C54 to

PIC16C58A), PIC16C61, PIC16C62X, PIC16C71,

PIC16C8X, PIC17C42, PIC17C43 and PIC17C44. All

necessary hardware and software is included to run

basic demo programs. The sample microcontrollers

provided with the PICDEM 1 demonstration board can

be programmed with a PRO MATE II device program-

mer or a PICSTART Plus development programmer.

The PICDEM 1 demonstration board can be connected

to the MPLAB ICE in-circuit emulator for testing. A

prototype area extends the circuitry for additional appli-

cation components. Features include an RS-232

interface, a potentiometer for simulated analog input,

push button switches and eight LEDs.

19.15 PICDEM.net Internet/Ethernet

Demonstration Board

The PICDEM.net demonstration board is an Internet/

Ethernet demonstration board using the PIC18F452

microcontroller and TCP/IP firmware. The board

supports any 40-pin DIP device that conforms to the

standard pinout used by the PIC16F877 or

PIC18C452. This kit features a user friendly TCP/IP

stack, web server with HTML, a 24L256 Serial

EEPROM for Xmodem download to web pages into

Serial EEPROM, ICSP/MPLAB ICD 2 interface con-

nector, an Ethernet interface, RS-232 interface and a

16 x 2 LCD display. Also included is the book and

CD-ROM “TCP/IP Lean, Web Servers for Embedded

Systems,” by Jeremy Bentham

19.16 PICDEM 2 Plus

Demonstration Board

The PICDEM 2 Plus demonstration board supports

many 18, 28 and 40-pin microcontrollers, including

PIC16F87X and PIC18FXX2 devices. All the neces-

sary hardware and software is included to run the dem-

onstration programs. The sample microcontrollers

provided with the PICDEM 2 demonstration board can

be programmed with a PRO MATE II device program-

mer, PICSTART Plus development programmer, or

MPLAB ICD 2 with a Universal Programmer Adapter.

The MPLAB ICD 2 and MPLAB ICE in-circuit emulators

may also be used with the PICDEM 2 demonstration

board to test firmware. A prototype area extends the

circuitry for additional application components. Some

of the features include an RS-232 interface, a 2 x 16

LCD display, a piezo speaker, an on-board temperature

sensor, four LEDs and sample PIC18F452 and

PIC16F877 Flash microcontrollers.

19.17 PICDEM 3 PIC16C92X

Demonstration Board

The PICDEM 3 demonstration board supports the

PIC16C923 and PIC16C924 in the PLCC package. All

the necessary hardware and software is included to run

the demonstration programs.

19.18 PICDEM 4 8/14/18-Pin

Demonstration Board

The PICDEM 4 can be used to demonstrate the capa-

bilities of the 8, 14 and 18-pin PIC16XXXX and

PIC18XXXX MCUs, including the PIC16F818/819,

PIC16F87/88, PIC16F62XA and the PIC18F1320

family of microcontrollers. PICDEM 4 is intended to

showcase the many features of these low pin count

parts, including LIN and Motor Control using ECCP.

Special provisions are made for low-power operation

with the supercapacitor circuit and jumpers allow on-

board hardware to be disabled to eliminate current

draw in this mode. Included on the demo board are pro-

visions for Crystal, RC or Canned Oscillator modes, a

five volt regulator for use with a nine volt wall adapter

or battery, DB-9 RS-232 interface, ICD connector for

programming via ICSP and development with MPLAB

ICD 2, 2 x 16 liquid crystal display, PCB footprints for

H-Bridge motor driver, LIN transceiver and EEPROM.

Also included are: header for expansion, eight LEDs,

four potentiometers, three push buttons and a proto-

typing area. Included with the kit is a PIC16F627A and

a PIC18F1320. Tutorial firmware is included along with

the User’s Guide.

19.19 PICDEM 17 Demonstration Board

The PICDEM 17 demonstration board is an evaluation

board that demonstrates the capabilities of several

Microchip microcontrollers, including PIC17C752,

PIC17C756A, PIC17C762 and PIC17C766. A pro-

grammed sample is included. The PRO MATE II device

programmer, or the PICSTART Plus development pro-

grammer, can be used to reprogram the device for user

tailored application development. The PICDEM 17

demonstration board supports program download and

execution from external on-board Flash memory. A

generous prototype area is available for user hardware

expansion.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 139

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

19.20 PICDEM 18R PIC18C601/801

Demonstration Board

The PICDEM 18R demonstration board serves to assist

development of the PIC18C601/801 family of Microchip

microcontrollers. It provides hardware implementation

of both 8-bit Multiplexed/Demultiplexed and 16-bit

Memory modes. The board includes 2 Mb external

Flash memory and 128 Kb SRAM memory, as well as

serial EEPROM, allowing access to the wide range of

memory types supported by the PIC18C601/801.

19.21 PICDEM LIN PIC16C43X

Demonstration Board

The powerful LIN hardware and software kit includes a

series of boards and three PICmicro microcontrollers.

The small footprint PIC16C432 and PIC16C433 are

used as slaves in the LIN communication and feature

on-board LIN transceivers. A PIC16F874 Flash

microcontroller serves as the master. All three micro-

controllers are programmed with firmware to provide

LIN bus communication.

19.22 PICkitTM 1 Flash Starter Kit

A complete “development system in a box”, the PICkit

Flash Starter Kit includes a convenient multi-section

board for programming, evaluation and development of

8/14-pin Flash PIC® microcontrollers. Powered via

USB, the board operates under a simple Windows GUI.

The PICkit 1 Starter Kit includes the User’s Guide (on

CD ROM), PICkit 1 tutorial software and code for

various applications. Also included are MPLAB® IDE

(Integrated Development Environment) software,

software and hardware “Tips 'n Tricks for 8-pin Flash

PIC® Microcontrollers” Handbook and a USB interface

cable. Supports all current 8/14-pin Flash PIC

microcontrollers, as well as many future planned

devices.

19.23 PICDEM USB PIC16C7X5

Demonstration Board

The PICDEM USB Demonstration Board shows off the

capabilities of the PIC16C745 and PIC16C765 USB

microcontrollers. This board provides the basis for

future USB products.

19.24 Evaluation and

Programming Tools

In addition to the PICDEM series of circuits, Microchip

has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software

for these products.

•K

EELOQ evaluation and programming tools for

Microchip’s HCS Secure Data Products

• CAN developers kit for automotive network

applications

• Analog design boards and filter design software

• PowerSmart battery charging evaluation/

calibration kits

•IrDA

® development kit

• microID development and rfLabTM development

software

• SEEVAL® designer kit for memory evaluation and

endurance calculations

• PICDEM MSC demo boards for Switching mode

power supply, high-power IR driver, delta sigma

ADC and flow rate sensor

Check the Microchip web page and the latest Product

Selector Guide for the complete list of demonstration

and evaluation kits.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 140 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 141

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

20.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

This section provides an overview of dsPIC30F electrical characteristics. Additional information will be provided in future

revisions of this document as it becomes available.

For detailed information about the dsPIC30F architecture and core, refer to dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual

(DS70046).

Absolute maximum ratings for the dsPIC30F family are listed below. Exposure to these maximum rating conditions for

extended periods may affect device reliability. Functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions above

the parameters indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied.

Absolute Maximum Ratings(†)

Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................-40°C to +125°C

Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65°C to +150°C

Voltage on any pin with respect to VSS (except VDD and MCLR) ................................................... -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V)

Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ......................................................................................................... -0.3V to +5.5V

Voltage on MCLR with respect to VSS (Note 1) ......................................................................................... 0V to +13.25V

Total power dissipation (Note 2) ...............................................................................................................................1.0W

Maximum current out of VSS pin ...........................................................................................................................300 mA

Maximum current into VDD pin ..............................................................................................................................250 mA

Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VDD) ..........................................................................................................±20 mA

Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDD) ...................................................................................................±20 mA

Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin..........................................................................................................25 mA

Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin ....................................................................................................25 mA

Maximum current sunk by all ports .......................................................................................................................200 mA

Maximum current sourced by all ports ..................................................................................................................200 mA

Note 1:Power dissipation is calculated as follows:

Pdis = VDD x {IDD - ∑ IOH} + ∑ {(VDD - VOH) x IOH} + ∑(VOl x IOL)

2: Voltage spikes below VSS at the MCLR/VPP pin, inducing currents greater than 80 mA, may cause latchup.

Thus, a series resistor of 50-100Ω should be used when applying a “low” level to the MCLR/VPP pin, rather

than pulling this pin directly to VSS.

†NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the

device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those

indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for

extended periods may affect device reliability.

Note: All peripheral electrical characteristics are specified. For exact peripherals available on specific

devices, please refer the the Family Cross Reference Table.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 142 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

20.1 DC Characteristics

TABLE 20-1: OPERATING MIPS VS. VOLTAGE

VDD Range Temp Range

Max MIPS

dsPIC30FXXX-30I dsPIC30FXXX-20I dsPIC30FXXX-20E

4.5-5.5V -40°C to 85°C 30 20 —

4.5-5.5V -40°C to 125°C — — 20

3.0-3.6V -40°C to 85°C 15 10 —

3.0-3.6V -40°C to 125°C — — 10

2.5-3.0V -40°C to 85°C 10 7.5 —

TABLE 20-2: DC TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units Conditions

Operating Voltage(2)

DC10 VDD Supply Voltage 2.5 — 5.5 V Industrial temperature

DC11 VDD Supply Voltage 3.0 — 5.5 V Extended temperature

DC12 VDR RAM Data Retention Voltage(3) —1.5—V

DC16 VPOR VDD Start Voltage

to ensure internal

Power-on Reset signal

—VSS —V

DC17 SVDD VDD Rise Rate

to ensure internal

Power-on Reset signal

0.05 V/ms 0-5V in 0.1 sec

0-3V in 60 ms

Note 1: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

3: This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered without losing RAM data.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 143

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-3: DC CHARACTERISTICS: OPERATING CURRENT (IDD)

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Parameter

No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions

Operating Current (IDD)(2)

DC20 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

1 MIPS EC mode

DC20a TBD — mA 25°C

DC20b — — mA 85°C

DC20c — — mA 125°C

DC20d — — mA -40°C

DC20e TBD — mA 25°C

DC20f — — mA 85°C

DC20g — — mA 125°C

DC23 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

4 MIPS EC mode, 4X PLL

DC23a TBD — mA 25°C

DC23b — — mA 85°C

DC23c — — mA 125°C

DC23d — — mA -40°C

DC23e TBD — mA 25°C

DC23f — — mA 85°C

DC23g — — mA 125°C

DC24 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

10 MIPS EC mode, 4X PLL

DC24a TBD — mA 25°C

DC24b — — mA 85°C

DC24c — — mA 125°C

DC24d — — mA -40°C

DC24e TBD — mA 25°C

DC24f — — mA 85°C

DC24g — — mA 125°C

DC25 — — mA -40°C

8 MIPS EC mode, 8X PLL

DC25a TBD — mA 25°C

DC25b — — mA 85°C

DC25c — — mA 125°C

DC25d — — mA -40°C

DC25e TBD — mA 25°C

DC25f — — mA 85°C

DC25g — — mA 125°C

Note 1: Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only

and are not tested.

2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors such as I/O

pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature also have

an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements are as follows: OSC1

driven with external square wave from rail to rail. All I/O pins are configured as Inputs and pulled to VDD.

MCLR = VDD, WDT, FSCM, LVD and BOR are disabled. CPU, SRAM, Program Memory and Data

Memory are operational. No peripheral modules are operating.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 144 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

DC27 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

20 MIPS EC mode, 8X PLL

DC27a TBD — mA 25°C

DC27b — — mA 85°C

DC27c — — mA -40°C

DC27d TBD — mA 25°C

DC27e — — mA 85°C

DC27f — — mA 125°C

DC28 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

16 MIPS EC mode, 16X PLL

DC28a TBD — mA 25°C

DC28b — — mA 85°C

DC28c — — mA -40°C

DC28d TBD — mA 25°C

DC28e — — mA 85°C

DC28f — — mA 125°C

DC29 — — mA -40°C

5V 30 MIPS EC mode, 16X PLL

DC29a TBD — mA 25°C

DC29b — — mA 85°C

DC29c — — mA 125°C

DC30 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

FRC (~ 2 MIPS)

DC30a TBD — mA 25°C

DC30b — — mA 85°C

DC30c — — mA 125°C

DC30d — — mA -40°C

DC30e TBD — mA 25°C

DC30f — — mA 85°C

DC30g — — mA 125°C

DC31 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

LPRC (~ 512 kHz)

DC31a TBD — mA 25°C

DC31b — — mA 85°C

DC31c — — mA 125°C

DC31d — — mA -40°C

DC31e TBD — mA 25°C

DC31f — — mA 85°C

DC31g — — mA 125°C

TABLE 20-3: DC CHARACTERISTICS: OPERATING CURRENT (IDD) (CONTINUED)

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Parameter

No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions

Operating Current (IDD)(2)

Note 1: Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only

and are not tested.

2: The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors such as I/O

pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature also have

an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements are as follows: OSC1

driven with external square wave from rail to rail. All I/O pins are configured as Inputs and pulled to VDD.

MCLR = VDD, WDT, FSCM, LVD and BOR are disabled. CPU, SRAM, Program Memory and Data

Memory are operational. No peripheral modules are operating.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 145

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-4: DC CHARACTERISTICS: IDLE CURRENT (IIDLE)

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Parameter

No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions

Idle Current (IIDLE): Core OFF Clock ON Base Current(2)

DC40 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

1 MIPS EC mode

DC40a TBD — mA 25°C

DC40b — — mA 85°C

DC40c — — mA 125°C

DC40d — — mA -40°C

DC40e TBD — mA 25°C

DC40f — — mA 85°C

DC40g — — mA 125°C

DC43 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

4 MIPS EC mode, 4X PLL

DC43a TBD — mA 25°C

DC43b — — mA 85°C

DC43c — — mA 125°C

DC43d — — mA -40°C

DC43e TBD — mA 25°C

DC43f — — mA 85°C

DC43g — — mA 125°C

DC44 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

10 MIPS EC mode, 4X PLL

DC44a TBD — mA 25°C

DC44b — — mA 85°C

DC44c — — mA 125°C

DC44d — — mA -40°C

DC44e TBD — mA 25°C

DC44f — — mA 85°C

DC44g — — mA 125°C

DC45 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

8 MIPS EC mode, 8X PLL

DC45a TBD — mA 25°C

DC45b — — mA 85°C

DC45c — — mA 125°C

DC45d — — mA -40°C

DC45e TBD — mA 25°C

DC45f — — mA 85°C

DC45g — — mA 125°C

Note 1: Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only

and are not tested.

2: Base IIDLE current is measured with Core off, Clock on and all modules turned off.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 146 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

DC47 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

20 MIPS EC mode, 8X PLL

DC47a TBD — mA 25°C

DC47b — — mA 85°C

DC47c — — mA -40°C

DC47d TBD — mA 25°C

DC47e — — mA 85°C

DC47f — — mA 125°C

DC48 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

16 MIPS EC mode, 16X PLL

DC48a TBD — mA 25°C

DC48b — — mA 85°C

DC48c — — mA -40°C

DC48d TBD — mA 25°C

DC48e — — mA 85°C

DC48f — — mA 125°C

DC49 — — mA -40°C

5V 30 MIPS EC mode, 16X PLL

DC49a TBD — mA 25°C

DC49b — — mA 85°C

DC49c — — mA 125°C

DC50 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

FRC (~ 2 MIPS)

DC50a TBD — mA 25°C

DC50b — — mA 85°C

DC50c — — mA 125°C

DC50d — — mA -40°C

DC50e TBD — mA 25°C

DC50f — — mA 85°C

DC50g — — mA 125°C

DC51 — — mA -40°C

3.3V

LPRC (~ 512 kHz)

DC51a TBD — mA 25°C

DC51b — — mA 85°C

DC51c — — mA 125°C

DC51d — — mA -40°C

DC51e TBD — mA 25°C

DC51f — — mA 85°C

DC51g — — mA 125°C

TABLE 20-4: DC CHARACTERISTICS: IDLE CURRENT (IIDLE) (CONTINUED)

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Parameter

No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions

Idle Current (IIDLE): Core OFF Clock ON Base Current(2)

Note 1: Data in “Typical” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only

and are not tested.

2: Base IIDLE current is measured with Core off, Clock on and all modules turned off.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 147

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-5: DC CHARACTERISTICS: POWER-DOWN CURRENT (IPD)

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Parameter

No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions

Power Down Current (IPD)(2)

DC60 — — µA -40°C

3.3V

Base Power Down Current(3)

DC60a TBD — µA25°C

DC60b — — µA85°C

DC60c — — µA 125°C

DC60d — — µA -40°C

DC60e TBD — µA25°C

DC60f — — µA85°C

DC60g — — µA 125°C

DC61 — — µA -40°C

3.3V

Watchdog Timer Current: ∆IWDT(3)

DC61a TBD — µA25°C

DC61b — — µA85°C

DC61c — — µA 125°C

DC61d — — µA -40°C

DC61e TBD — µA25°C

DC61f — — µA85°C

DC61g — — µA 125°C

DC62 — — µA -40°C

3.3V

Timer 1 w/32 kHz Crystal: ∆ITI32(3)

DC62a TBD — µA25°C

DC62b — — µA85°C

DC62c — — µA 125°C

DC62d — — µA -40°C

DC62e TBD — µA25°C

DC62f — — µA85°C

DC62g — — µA 125°C

DC63 — — µA -40°C

3.3V

BOR On: ∆IBOR(3)

DC63a TBD — µA25°C

DC63b — — µA85°C

DC63c — — µA 125°C

DC63d — — µA -40°C

DC63e TBD — µA25°C

DC63f — — µA85°C

DC63g — — µA 125°C

Note 1: Data in the Typical column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance

only and are not tested.

2: Base IPD is measured with all peripherals and clocks shut down. All I/Os are configured as inputs and

pulled high. LVD, BOR, WDT, etc. are all switched off.

3: The ∆ current is the additional current consumed when the module is enabled. This current should be

added to the base IPD current.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 148 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

DC66 — — µA-40°C

3.3V

Low Voltage Detect: ∆ILVD(3)

DC66a TBD — µA 25°C

DC66b — — µA 85°C

DC66c — — µA125°C

DC66d — — µA-40°C

DC66e TBD — µA 25°C

DC66f — — µA 85°C

DC66g — — µA125°C

TABLE 20-5: DC CHARACTERISTICS: POWER-DOWN CURRENT (IPD) (CONTINUED)

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Parameter

No. Typical(1) Max Units Conditions

Power Down Current (IPD)(2)

Note 1: Data in the Typical column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance

only and are not tested.

2: Base IPD is measured with all peripherals and clocks shut down. All I/Os are configured as inputs and

pulled high. LVD, BOR, WDT, etc. are all switched off.

3: The ∆ current is the additional current consumed when the module is enabled. This current should be

added to the base IPD current.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 149

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-6: DC CHARACTERISTICS: I/O PIN INPUT SPECIFICATIONS

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units Conditions

VIL Input Low Voltage(2)

DI10 I/O pins:

with Schmitt Trigger buffer VSS —0.2VDD V

DI15 MCLR VSS —0.2VDD V

DI16 OSC1 (in XT, HS and LP modes) VSS —0.2VDD V

DI17 OSC1 (in RC mode)(3) VSS —0.3VDD V

DI18 SDA, SCL TBD — TBD V SM bus disabled

DI19 SDA, SCL TBD — TBD V SM bus enabled

VIH Input High Voltage(2)

DI20 I/O pins:

with Schmitt Trigger buffer 0.8 VDD —VDD V

DI25 MCLR 0.8 VDD —VDD V

DI26 OSC1 (in XT, HS and LP modes) 0.7 VDD —VDD V

DI27 OSC1 (in RC mode)(3) 0.9 VDD —VDD V

DI28 SDA, SCL TBD — TBD V SM bus disabled

DI29 SDA, SCL TBD — TBD V SM bus enabled

ICNPU CNXX Pull-up Current(2)

DI30 50 250 400 µAVDD = 5V, VPIN = VSS

DI31 TBD TBD TBD µAVDD = 3V, VPIN = VSS

IIL Input Leakage Current(2)(4)(5)

DI50 I/O ports — 0.01 ±1 µAVSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD,

Pin at hi-impedance

DI51 Analog input pins — 0.50 — µAV

SS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD,

Pin at hi-impedance

DI55 MCLR —0.05±5 µAVSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD

DI56 OSC1 — 0.05 ±5 µAVSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD, XT, HS

and LP Osc mode

Note 1: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

3: In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKl pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended that

the dsPIC30F device be driven with an external clock while in RC mode.

4: The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified

levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input

voltages.

5: Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 150 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-1: LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-7: DC CHARACTERISTICS: I/O PIN OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units Conditions

VOL Output Low Voltage(2)

DO10 I/O ports — — 0.6 V IOL = 8.5 mA, VDD = 5V

——TBDVI

OL = 2.0 mA, VDD = 3V

DO16 OSC2/CLKOUT — — 0.6 V IOL = 1.6 mA, VDD = 5V

(RC or EC Osc mode) — — TBD V IOL = 2.0 mA, VDD = 3V

VOH Output High Voltage(2)

DO20 I/O ports VDD – 0.7 — — V IOH = -3.0 mA, VDD = 5V

TBD — — V IOH = -2.0 mA, VDD = 3V

DO26 OSC2/CLKOUT VDD – 0.7 — — V IOH = -1.3 mA, VDD = 5V

(RC or EC Osc mode) TBD — — V IOH = -2.0 mA, VDD = 3V

Capacitive Loading Specs

on Output Pins(2)

DO50 COSC2 OSC2/SOSC2 pin — — 15 pF In XTL, XT, HS and LP modes

when external clock is used to

drive OSC1.

DO56 CIO All I/O pins and OSC2 — — 50 pF RC or EC Osc mode

DO58 CBSCL, SDA — — 400 pF In I2C mode

Note 1: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

LV10

LVDIF

VDD

(LVDIF set by hardware)

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 151

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-8: ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS: LVDL

FIGURE 20-2: BROWN-OUT RESET CHARACTERISTICS

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ Max Units Conditions

LV10 VPLVD LVDL Voltage on VDD transition

high to low

LVDL = 0000(2) ———V

LVDL = 0001(2) ———V

LVDL = 0010(2) ———V

LVDL = 0011(2) ———V

LVDL = 0100 2.50 — 2.65 V

LVDL = 0101 2.70 — 2.86 V

LVDL = 0110 2.80 — 2.97 V

LVDL = 0111 3.00 — 3.18 V

LVDL = 1000 3.30 — 3.50 V

LVDL = 1001 3.50 — 3.71 V

LVDL = 1010 3.60 — 3.82 V

LVDL = 1011 3.80 — 4.03 V

LVDL = 1100 4.00 — 4.24 V

LVDL = 1101 4.20 — 4.45 V

LVDL = 1110 4.50 — 4.77 V

LV15 VLVDIN External LVD input pin

threshold voltage

LVDL = 1111 ———V

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: These values not in usable operating range.

BO10

RESET (due to BOR)

VDD

(Device in Brown-out Reset)

(Device not in Brown-out Reset)

Power Up Time-out

BO15

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 152 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 20-9: ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS: BOR

TABLE 20-10: DC CHARACTERISTICS: PROGRAM AND EEPROM

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units Conditions

BO10 VBOR BOR Voltage(2) on

VDD transition high to

low

BORV = 00(3) — — — V Not in operating

range

BORV = 01 2.7 — 2.86 V

BORV = 10 4.2 — 4.46 V

BORV = 11 4.5 — 4.78 V

BO15 VBHYS —5—mV

Note 1: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

3: 00 values not in usable operating range.

DC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units Conditions

Data EEPROM Memory(2)

D120 EDByte Endurance 100K 1M — E/W -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C

D121 VDRW VDD for Read/Write VMIN — 5.5 V Using EECON to read/write

VMIN = Minimum operating

voltage

D122 TDEW Erase/Write Cycle Time — 2 — ms

D123 TRETD Characteristic Retention 40 100 — Year Provided no other specifications

are violated

D124 IDEW IDD During Programming — 10 30 mA Row Erase

Program Flash Memory(2)

D130 EPCell Endurance 10K 100K — E/W -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C

D131 VPR VDD for Read VMIN —5.5VVMIN = Minimum operating

voltage

D132 VEB VDD for Bulk Erase 4.5 — 5.5 V

D133 VPEW VDD for Erase/Write 3.0 — 5.5 V

D134 TPEW Erase/Write Cycle Time — 2 — ms

D135 TRETD Characteristic Retention 40 100 — Year Provided no other specifications

are violated

D136 TEB ICSP Block Erase Time — 4 — ms

D137 IPEW IDD During Programming — 10 30 mA Row Erase

D138 IEB IDD During Programming — 10 30 mA Bulk Erase

Note 1: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.

2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 153

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

20.2 AC Characteristics and Timing Parameters

The information contained in this section defines dsPIC30F AC characteristics and timing parameters.

TABLE 20-11: TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS – AC

FIGURE 20-3: LOAD CONDITIONS FOR DEVICE TIMING SPECIFICATIONS

FIGURE 20-4: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Operating voltage VDD range as described in DC Spec Section 20.0.

VDD/2

VSS

RL=464Ω

CL= 50 pF for all pins except OSC2

5 pF for OSC2 output

Load Condition 1 - for all pins except OSC2 Load Condition 2 - for OSC2

OSC1

CLKOUT

Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1

OS20

OS25

OS30 OS30

OS40 OS41

OS31 OS31

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 154 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 20-12: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ(1) Max Units Conditions

OS10 FOSC External CLKIN Frequency(2)

(External clocks allowed only

in EC mode)

—

7.5

MHz

EC with 4x PLL

EC with 8x PLL

EC with 16x PLL

Oscillator Frequency(2) DC

0.4

—

512

7.5

—

MHz

kHz

MHz

kHz

XTL

XT with 4x PLL

XT with 8x PLL

XT with 16x PLL

FRC internal

LPRC internal

OS20 TOSC TOSC = 1/FOSC — — — — See parameter OS10

for FOSC value

OS25 TCY Instruction Cycle Time(2)(3) 33 — DC ns See Table 20-14

OS30 TosL,

Tos H

External Clock(2) in (OSC1)

High or Low Time

.45 x TOSC ——nsEC

OS31 TosR,

Tos F

External Clock(2) in (OSC1)

Rise or Fall Time

— — 20 ns EC

OS40 TckR CLKOUT Rise Time(2)(4) — 6 10 ns

OS41 TckF CLKOUT Fall Time(2)(4) — 6 10 ns

Note 1: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

3: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time-base period. All specified values

are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions

with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator

operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min.”

values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLKI pin. When an external clock input is used, the

“Max.” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices.

4: Measurements are taken in EC or ERC modes. The CLKOUT signal is measured on the OSC2 pin.

CLKOUT is low for the Q1-Q2 period (1/2 TCY) and high for the Q3-Q4 period (1/2 TCY).

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 155

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-14: INTERNAL CLOCK TIMING EXAMPLES

TABLE 20-13: PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 2.5 TO 5.5 V)

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

OS50 FPLLI PLL Input Frequency Range(2) 4 — 10 MHz EC, XT modes with PLL

OS51 FSYS On-chip PLL Output(2) 16 — 120 MHz EC, XT modes with PLL

OS52 TLOC PLL Start-up Time (Lock Time) — 20 50 µs

OS53 DCLK CLKOUT Stability (Jitter) TBD 1 TBD % Measured over 100 ms

period

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

Clock

Oscillator

Mode

FOSC

(MHz)(1) TCY (µsec)(2) MIPS(3)

w/o PLL

MIPS(3)

w PLL x4

MIPS(3)

w PLL x8

MIPS(3)

w PLL x16

EC 0.200 20.0 0.05 — — —

4 1.0 1.0 4.0 8.0 16.0

10 0.4 2.5 10.0 20.0 —

25 0.16 25.0 — — —

XT 4 1.0 1.0 4.0 8.0 16.0

10 0.4 2.5 10.0 20.0 —

Note 1: Assumption: Oscillator Postscaler is divide by 1.

2: Instruction Execution Cycle Time: TCY = 1 / MIPS.

3: Instruction Execution Frequency: MIPS = (FOSC * PLLx) / 4 [since there are 4 Q clocks per instruction

cycle].

TABLE 20-15: INTERNAL RC ACCURACY

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions

FRC @ Freq = 8 MHz(1)

F16 TBD — TBD % -40°C to +85°C VDD =3.3V

F19 TBD — TBD % -40°C to +85°C VDD =5V

LPRC @ Freq = 512 kHz(2)

F20 TBD — TBD % -40°C to +85°C VDD =3V

F21 TBD — TBD % -40°C to +85°C VDD =5V

Note 1: Frequency calibrated at 25°C and 5V. TUN bits can be used to compensate for temperature drift.

2: LPRC frequency after calibration.

3: Change of LPRC frequency as VDD changes.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 156 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-5: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-16: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1)(2)(3) Min Typ(4) Max Units Conditions

DO31 TIOR Port output rise time — 10 25 ns —

DO32 TIOF Port output fall time — 10 25 ns —

DI35 TINP INTx pin high or low time (output) 20 — — ns —

DI40 TRBP CNx high or low time (input) 2 TCY — — ns —

Note 1: These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges

2: Measurements are taken in RC mode and EC mode where CLKOUT output is 4 x TOSC.

3: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

4: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

I/O Pin

(Input)

I/O Pin

(Output)

DI35

Old Value New Value

DI40

DO31

DO32

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 157

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 20-6: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP

TIMER TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

VDD

MCLR

Internal

POR

PWRT

Time-out

OSC

Time-out

Internal

RESET

Watchdog

Timer

RESET

SY11

SY10

SY20

SY13

I/O Pins

SY13

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

FSCM

Delay

SY35

SY30

SY12

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 158 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 20-17: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER

AND BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING REQUIREMENTS

FIGURE 20-7: BAND GAP START-UP TIME CHARACTERISTICS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

SY10 TmcL MCLR Pulse Width (low) 2 — — µs -40°C to +85°C

SY11 TPWRT Power-up Timer Period TBD

TBD

ms -40°C to +85°C

User programmable

SY12 TPOR Power On Reset Delay 3 10 30 µs -40°C to +85°C

SY13 TIOZ I/O Hi-impedance from MCLR

Low or Watchdog Timer Reset

——100ns

SY20 TWDT1 Watchdog Timer Time-out Period

(No Prescaler)

1.8 2.0 2.2 ms VDD = 5V, -40°C to +85°C

TWDT2 1.9 2.1 2.3 ms VDD = 3V, -40°C to +85°C

SY25 TBOR Brown-out Reset Pulse Width(3) 100 — — µsVDD ≤ VBOR (D034)

SY30 TOST Oscillation Start-up Timer Period — 1024 TOSC ——TOSC = OSC1 period

SY35 TFSCM Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Delay — 100 — µs -40°C to +85°C

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.

3: Refer to Figure 20-2 and Table 20-9 for BOR.

VBGAP

Enable Band Gap

Band Gap

(see Note)

Stable

Note: Set LVDEN bit (RCON<12>) or FBORPOR<7>set.

SY40

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 159

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-18: BAND GAP START-UP TIME REQUIREMENTS

FIGURE 20-8: TYPE A, B AND C TIMER EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

SY40 TBGAP Band Gap Start-up Time — 20 50 µs Defined as the time between the

instant that the band gap is enabled

and the moment that the band gap

reference voltage is stable.

RCON<13>Status bit

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated.

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

Tx11

Tx15

Tx10

Tx20

TMRX

OS60

TxCK

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 160 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 20-19: TYPE A TIMER (TIMER1) EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions

TA10 TTXH TxCK High Time Synchronous,

no prescaler

0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet

parameter TA15

Synchronous,

with prescaler

10 — — ns

Asynchronous 10 — — ns

TA11 TTXL TxCK Low Time Synchronous,

no prescaler

0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet

parameter TA15

Synchronous,

with prescaler

10 — — ns

Asynchronous 10 — — ns

TA15 TTXP TxCK Input Period Synchronous,

no prescaler

TCY + 10 — — ns

Synchronous,

with prescaler

Greater of:

20 ns or

(TCY + 40)/N

— — — N = prescale

value

(1, 8, 64, 256)

Asynchronous 20 — — ns

OS60 Ft1 SOSC1/T1CK oscillator input

frequency range (oscillator enabled

by setting bit TCS (T1CON, bit 1))

DC — 50 kHz

TA20 TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TQCK Clock

Edge to Timer Increment

2 TOSC 6 TOSC —

Note: Timer1 is a Type A.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 161

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-20: TYPE B TIMER (TIMER2 AND TIMER4) EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS

TABLE 20-21: TYPE C TIMER (TIMER3 AND TIMER5) EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions

TB10 TtxH TxCK High Time Synchronous,

no prescaler

0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet

parameter TB15

Synchronous,

with prescaler

10 — — ns

TB11 TtxL TxCK Low Time Synchronous,

no prescaler

0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet

parameter TB15

Synchronous,

with prescaler

10 — — ns

TB15 TtxP TxCK Input Period Synchronous,

no prescaler

TCY + 10 — — ns N = prescale

value

(1, 8, 64, 256)

Synchronous,

with prescaler

Greater of:

20 ns or

(TCY + 40)/N

TB20 TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TQCK Clock

Edge to Timer Increment

2 TOSC —6 TOSC —

Note: Timer2 and Timer4 are Type B.

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions

TC10 TtxH TxCK High Time Synchronous 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet

parameter TC15

TC11 TtxL TxCK Low Time Synchronous 0.5 TCY + 20 — — ns Must also meet

parameter TC15

TC15 TtxP TxCK Input Period Synchronous,

no prescaler

TCY + 10 — — ns N = prescale

value

(1, 8, 64, 256)

Synchronous,

with prescaler

Greater of:

20 ns or

(TCY + 40)/N

TC20 TCKEXTMRL Delay from External TQCK Clock

Edge to Timer Increment

2 TOSC —6 TOSC —

Note: Timer3 and Timer5 are Type C.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 162 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-9: INPUT CAPTURE (CAPx) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-22: INPUT CAPTURE TIMING REQUIREMENTS

FIGURE 20-10: OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE (OCx) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-23: OUTPUT COMPARE MODULE TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Max Units Conditions

IC10 TccL ICx Input Low Time No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns

With Prescaler 10 — ns

IC11 TccH ICx Input High Time No Prescaler 0.5 TCY + 20 — ns

With Prescaler 10 — ns

IC15 TccP ICx Input Period (2 TCY + 40)/N — ns N = prescale

value (1, 4, 16)

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

OC10 TccF OCx Output Fall Time — 10 25 ns —

OC11 TccR OCx Output Rise Time — 10 25 ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

ICX

IC10 IC11

IC15

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

OCx

OC11 OC10

(Output Compare

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

or PWM Mode)

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 163

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 20-11: OC/PWM MODULE TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-24: SIMPLE OC/PWM MODE TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

OC15 TFD Fault Input to PWM I/O

Change

— — 25 ns VDD = 3V -40°C to +85°C

TBD ns VDD = 5V

OC20 TFLT Fault Input Pulse Width — — 50 ns VDD = 3V -40°C to +85°C

TBD ns VDD = 5V

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

OCFA/OCFB

OCx

OC20

OC15

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 164 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-12: DCI MODULE (MULTICHANNEL, I2S MODES) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

COFS

CSCK

(SCKE =

)

CSCK

(SCKE =

)

CSDO

CSDI

CS11 CS10

CS40 CS41

CS21

CS20

CS35

CS21

MSb LSb

MSb IN LSb IN

CS31

HIGH-Z HIGH-Z

CS30

CS51 CS50

CS55

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

CS20

CS56

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 165

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-25: DCI MODULE (MULTICHANNEL, I2S MODES) TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

CS10 TcSCKL CSCK Input Low Time

(CSCK pin is an input)

TCY / 2 + 20 — — ns —

CSCK Output Low Time(3)

(CSCK pin is an output)

30 — — ns —

CS11 TcSCKH CSCK Input High Time

(CSCK pin is an input)

TCY / 2 + 20 — — ns —

CSCK Output High Time(3)

(CSCK pin is an output)

30 — — ns —

CS20 TcSCKF CSCK Output Fall Time(4)

(CSCK pin is an output)

—1025ns —

CS21 TcSCKR CSCK Output Rise Time(4)

(CSCK pin is an output)

—1025ns —

CS30 TcSDOF CSDO Data Output Fall Time(4) —1025ns —

CS31 TcSDOR CSDO Data Output Rise Time(4) —1025ns —

CS35 TDV Clock edge to CSDO data valid — — 10 ns —

CS36 TDIV Clock edge to CSDO tri-stated 10 — 20 ns —

CS40 TCSDI Setup time of CSDI data input to

CSCK edge (CSCK pin is input

or output)

20 — — ns —

CS41 THCSDI Hold time of CSDI data input to

CSCK edge (CSCK pin is input

or output)

20 — — ns —

CS50 TcoFSF COFS Fall Time

(COFS pin is output)

—1025nsNote 1

CS51 TcoFSR COFS Rise Time

(COFS pin is output)

—1025nsNote 1

CS55 TscoFS Setup time of COFS data input to

CSCK edge (COFS pin is input)

20 — — ns —

CS56 THCOFS Hold time of COFS data input to

CSCK edge (COFS pin is input)

20 — — ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

3: The minimum clock period for CSCK is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in Master mode must not

violate this specification.

4: Assumes 50 pF load on all DCI pins.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 166 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-13: DCI MODULE (AC-LINK MODE) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-26: DCI MODULE (AC-LINK MODE) TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1)(2) Min Typ(3) Max Units Conditions

CS60 TBCLKL BIT_CLK Low Time 36 40.7 45 ns —

CS61 TBCLKH BIT_CLK High Time 36 40.7 45 ns —

CS62 TBCLK BIT_CLK Period — 81.4 — ns Bit clock is input

CS65 TSACL Input Setup Time to

Falling Edge of BIT_CLK

— — 10 ns —

CS66 THACL Input Hold Time from

Falling Edge of BIT_CLK

— — 10 ns —

CS70 TSYNCLO SYNC Data Output Low Time — 19.5 — µsNote 1

CS71 TSYNCHI SYNC Data Output High Time — 1.3 — µsNote 1

CS72 TSYNC SYNC Data Output Period — 20.8 — µsNote 1

CS75 TRACL Rise Time, SYNC, SDATA_OUT — 10 25 ns CLOAD = 50 pF, VDD = 5V

CS76 TFACL Fall Time, SYNC, SDATA_OUT — 10 25 ns CLOAD = 50 pF, VDD = 5V

CS77 TRACL Rise Time, SYNC, SDATA_OUT — TBD TBD ns CLOAD = 50 pF, VDD = 3V

CS78 TFACL Fall Time, SYNC, SDATA_OUT — TBD TBD ns CLOAD = 50 pF, VDD = 3V

CS80 TOVDACL Output valid delay from rising

edge of BIT_CLK

— — 15 ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: These values assume BIT_CLK frequency is 12.288 MHz.

3: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

SYNC

BIT_CLK

SDO

SDI

CS61 CS60

CS65 CS66

CS80

CS21

MSb IN

CS75

LSb

CS76

(COFS)

(CSCK)

LSb

MSb

CS72

CS71 CS70

CS76 CS75

(CSDO)

(CSDI)

CS62 CS20

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 167

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 20-14: SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-27: SPI MASTER MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

SP10 TscL SCKX Output Low Time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns —

SP11 TscH SCKX Output High Time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns —

SP20 TscF SCKX Output Fall Time(4 —1025ns —

SP21 TscR SCKX Output Rise Time(4) —1025ns —

SP30 TdoF SDOX Data Output Fall Time(4) —1025ns —

SP31 TdoR SDOX Data Output Rise Time(4) —1025ns —

SP35 TscH2doV,

TscL2doV

SDOX Data Output Valid after

SCKX Edge

— — 30 ns —

SP40 TdiV2scH,

TdiV2scL

Setup Time of SDIX Data Input

to SCKX Edge

20 — — ns —

SP41 TscH2diL,

TscL2diL

Hold Time of SDIX Data Input

to SCKX Edge

20 — — ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

3: The minimum clock period for SCK is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in Master mode must not

violate this specification.

4: Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.

SCKx

(CKP = 0)

SCKx

(CKP = 1)

SDOx

SDIx

SP11 SP10

SP40 SP41

SP21

SP20

SP35

SP20

SP21

MSb LSb

BIT14 - - - - - -1

MSb IN LSb IN

BIT14 - - - -1

SP30

SP31

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 168 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-15: SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE =1) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-28: SPI MODULE MASTER MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

SP10 TscL SCKX output low time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns —

SP11 TscH SCKX output high time(3) TCY / 2 — — ns —

SP20 TscF SCKX output fall time(4) —1025ns —

SP21 TscR SCKX output rise time(4) —1025ns —

SP30 TdoF SDOX data output fall time(4) —1025ns —

SP31 TdoR SDOX data output rise time(4) —1025ns —

SP35 TscH2doV,

TscL2doV

SDOX data output valid after

SCKX edge

— — 30 ns —

SP36 TdoV2sc,

TdoV2scL

SDOX data output setup to

first SCKX edge

30 — — ns —

SP40 TdiV2scH,

TdiV2scL

Setup time of SDIX data input

to SCKX edge

20 — — ns —

SP41 TscH2diL,

TscL2diL

Hold time of SDIX data input

to SCKX edge

20 — — ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

3: The minimum clock period for SCK is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in master mode must not

violate this specification.

4: Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.

SCKX

(CKP = 0)

SCKX

(CKP = 1)

SDOX

SDIX

SP36

SP30,SP31

SP35

MSb

MSb IN

BIT14 - - - - - -1

LSb IN

BIT14 - - - -1

LSb

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

SP11 SP10 SP20

SP21

SP20

SP40

SP41

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 169

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 20-16: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-29: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 0) TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

SP70 TscL SCKX Input Low Time 30 — — ns —

SP71 TscH SCKX Input High Time 30 — — ns —

SP20 TscF SCKX Output Fall Time(3) —1025ns —

SP21 TscR SCKX Output Rise Time(3) —1025ns —

SP30 TdoF SDOX Data Output Fall Time(3) —1025ns —

SP31 TdoR SDOX Data Output Rise Time(3) —1025ns —

SP35 TscH2doV,

TscL2doV

SDOX Data Output Valid after

SCKX Edge

— — 30 ns —

SP40 TdiV2scH,

TdiV2scL

Setup Time of SDIX Data Input

to SCKX Edge

20 — — ns —

SP41 TscH2diL,

TscL2diL

Hold Time of SDIX Data Input

to SCKX Edge

20 — — ns —

SP50 TssL2scH,

TssL2scL

SSX↓ to SCKX↑ or SCKX↓ Input 120 — — ns —

SP51 TssH2doZ SSX↑ to SDOX Output

Hi-Impedance(3)

10 — 50 ns —

SP52 TscH2ssH

TscL2ssH

SSX after SCK Edge 1.5 TCY +40 — — ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

3: Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.

SCK

(CKP =

)

SCK

(CKP =

)

SDO

SDI

SP50

SP40

SP41

SP30,SP31 SP51

SP35

SDI

MSb LSb

BIT14 - - - - - -1

MSb IN BIT14 - - - -1 LSb IN

SP52

SP21

SP20

SP21

SP20

SP71 SP70

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 170 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-17: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

SSX

SCKX

(CKP = 0)

SCKX

(CKP = 1)

SDOX

SDI

SP50

SP60

SDIX

SP30,SP31

MSb BIT14 - - - - - -1 LSb

SP51

MSb IN BIT14 - - - -1 LSb IN

SP35

SP52

SP21

SP20

SP21

SP20

SP71 SP70

SP40

SP41

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 171

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-30: SPI MODULE SLAVE MODE (CKE = 1) TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

SP70 TscL SCKX Input Low Time 30 — — ns —

SP71 TscH SCKX Input High Time 30 — — ns —

SP20 TscF SCKX Output Fall Time(3) —1025ns —

SP21 TscR SCKX Output Rise Time(3) —1025ns —

SP30 TdoF SDOX Data Output Fall Time(3) —1025ns —

SP31 TdoR SDOX Data Output Rise Time(3) —1025ns —

SP35 TscH2doV,

TscL2doV

SDOX Data Output Valid after

SCKX Edge

— — 30 ns —

SP40 TdiV2scH,

TdiV2scL

Setup Time of SDIX Data Input

to SCKX Edge

20 — — ns —

SP41 TscH2diL,

TscL2diL

Hold Time of SDIX Data Input

to SCKX Edge

20 — — ns —

SP50 TssL2scH,

TssL 2 s c L

SSX↓ to SCKX↓ or SCKX↑ input 120 — — ns —

SP51 TssH2doZ SS↑ to SDOX Output

Hi-Impedance(4)

10 — 50 ns —

SP52 TscH2ssH

TscL 2 s s H

SSX↑ after SCKX Edge 1.5 TCY + 40 — — ns —

SP60 TssL2doV SDOX Data Output Valid after

SCKX Edge

— — 50 ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

3: The minimum clock period for SCK is 100 ns. Therefore, the clock generated in master mode must not

violate this specification.

4: Assumes 50 pF load on all SPI pins.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 172 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-18: I2C BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (MASTER MODE)

FIGURE 20-19: I2C BUS DATA TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (MASTER MODE)

IM31 IM34

SCL

SDA

Start

Condition

Stop

Condition

IM30 IM33

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

IM11 IM10 IM33

IM11

IM10

IM20

IM26 IM25

IM40 IM40 IM45

IM21

SCL

SDA

Out

Note: Refer to Figure 20-3 for load conditions.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 173

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-31: I2C BUS DATA TIMING REQUIREMENTS (MASTER MODE)

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min(1) Max Units Conditions

IM10 TLO:SCL Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms —

400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms —

1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms —

IM11 THI:SCL Clock High Time 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms —

400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms —

1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms —

IM20 TF:SCL SDA and SCL

Fall Time

100 kHz mode — 300 ns CB is specified to be

from 10 to 400 pF

400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB300 ns

1 MHz mode(2) —100ns

IM21 TR:SCL SDA and SCL

Rise Time

100 kHz mode — 1000 ns CB is specified to be

from 10 to 400 pF

400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB300 ns

1 MHz mode(2) —300ns

IM25 TSU:DAT Data Input

Setup Time

100 kHz mode 250 — ns —

400 kHz mode 100 — ns

1 MHz mode(2) TBD — ns

IM26 THD:DAT Data Input

Hold Time

100 kHz mode 0 — ns —

400 kHz mode 0 0.9 ms

1 MHz mode(2) TBD — ns

IM30 TSU:STA Start Condition

Setup Time

100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms Only relevant for

repeated Start

condition

400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms

1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms

IM31 THD:STA Start Condition

Hold Time

100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms After this period the

first clock pulse is

generated

400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms

1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms

IM33 TSU:STO Stop Condition

Setup Time

100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms —

400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms

1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ms

IM34 THD:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ns —

Hold Time 400 kHz mode TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ns

1 MHz mode(2) TCY / 2 (BRG + 1) — ns

IM40 TAA:SCL Output Valid

From Clock

100 kHz mode — 3500 ns —

400 kHz mode — 1000 ns —

1 MHz mode(2) ——ns —

IM45 TBF:SDA Bus Free Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — ms Time the bus must be

free before a new

transmission can start

400 kHz mode 1.3 — ms

1 MHz mode(2) TBD — ms

IM50 CBBus Capacitive Loading — 400 pF

Note 1: BRG is the value of the I2C Baud Rate Generator. Refer to Section 21 “Inter-Integrated Circuit™ (I2C)”

in the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual.

2: Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C pins (for 1 MHz mode only).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 174 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-20: I2C BUS START/STOP BITS TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (SLAVE MODE)

FIGURE 20-21: I2C BUS DATA TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (SLAVE MODE)

IS31 IS34

SCL

SDA

Start

Condition

Stop

Condition

IS30 IS33

IS30 IS31 IS33

IS11

IS10

IS20

IS26 IS25

IS40 IS40 IS45

IS21

SCL

SDA

Out

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 175

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-32: I2C BUS DATA TIMING REQUIREMENTS (SLAVE MODE)

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min Max Units Conditions

IS10 TLO:SCL Clock Low Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — µs Device must operate at a

minimum of 1.5 MHz

400 kHz mode 1.3 — µs Device must operate at a

minimum of 10 MHz.

1 MHz mode(1) 0.5 — µs—

IS11 THI:SCL Clock High Time 100 kHz mode 4.0 — µs Device must operate at a

minimum of 1.5 MHz

400 kHz mode 0.6 — µs Device must operate at a

minimum of 10 MHz

1 MHz mode(1) 0.5 — µs—

IS20 TF:SCL SDA and SCL

Fall Time

100 kHz mode — 300 ns CB is specified to be from

10 to 400 pF

400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB300 ns

1 MHz mode(1) —100ns

IS21 TR:SCL SDA and SCL

Rise Time

100 kHz mode — 1000 ns CB is specified to be from

10 to 400 pF

400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1 CB300 ns

1 MHz mode(1) —300ns

IS25 TSU:DAT Data Input

Setup Time

100 kHz mode 250 — ns —

400 kHz mode 100 — ns

1 MHz mode(1) 100 — ns

IS26 THD:DAT Data Input

Hold Time

100 kHz mode 0 — ns —

400 kHz mode 0 0.9 µs

1 MHz mode(1) 00.3µs

IS30 TSU:STA Start Condition

Setup Time

100 kHz mode 4.7 — µs Only relevant for repeated

Start condition

400 kHz mode 0.6 — µs

1 MHz mode(1) 0.25 — µs

IS31 THD:STA Start Condition

Hold Time

100 kHz mode 4.0 — µs After this period the first

clock pulse is generated

400 kHz mode 0.6 — µs

1 MHz mode(1) 0.25 — µs

IS33 TSU:STO Stop Condition

Setup Time

100 kHz mode 4.7 — µs—

400 kHz mode 0.6 — µs

1 MHz mode(1) 0.6 — µs

IS34 THD:STO Stop Condition 100 kHz mode 4000 — ns —

Hold Time 400 kHz mode 600 — ns

1 MHz mode(1) 250 ns

IS40 TAA:SCL Output Valid From

Clock

100 kHz mode 0 3500 ns —

400 kHz mode 0 1000 ns

1 MHz mode(1) 0350ns

IS45 TBF:SDA Bus Free Time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — µs Time the bus must be free

before a new transmission

can start

400 kHz mode 1.3 — µs

1 MHz mode(1) 0.5 — µs

IS50 CBBus Capacitive

— 400pF —

Note 1: Maximum pin capacitance = 10 pF for all I2C pins (for 1 MHz mode only).

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 176 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

FIGURE 20-22: CAN MODULE I/O TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

TABLE 20-33: CAN MODULE I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic(1) Min Typ(2) Max Units Conditions

CA10 TioF Port Output Fall Time — 10 25 ns —

CA11 TioR Port Output Rise Time — 10 25 ns —

CA20 Tcwf Pulse Width to Trigger

CAN Wakeup Filter

500 ns —

Note 1: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

2: Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. Parameters are for design guidance only and

are not tested.

CXTX Pin

(output)

CA10 CA11

Old Value New Value

CA20

CXRX Pin

(input)

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 177

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

TABLE 20-34: 12-BIT A/D MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions

Device Supply

AD01 AVDD Module VDD Supply Greater of

VDD - 0.3

or 2.7

— Lesser of

VDD + 0.3

or 5.5

V—

AD02 AVSS Module VSS Supply VSS - 0.3 — VSS + 0.3 V —

Reference Inputs

AD05 VREFH Reference Voltage High AVSS + 2.7 — AVDD V—

AD06 VREFL Reference Voltage Low AVSS —AVDD - 2.7 V —

AD07 VREF Absolute Reference

Voltage

AVSS - 0.3 — AVDD + 0.3 V —

AD08 IREF Current Drain — 200

.001

300

µA

A/D operating

A/D off

Analog Input

AD10 VINH-VINL Full-Scale Input Span VREFL VREFH VSee Note

AD11 VIN Absolute Input Voltage AVSS - 0.3 AVDD + 0.3 V —

AD12 — Leakage Current — ±0.001 ±0.610 µAV

INL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V

Source Impedance =

2.5 kΩ

AD13 — Leakage Current — ±0.001 ±0.610 µAV

INL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V

Source Impedance =

2.5 kΩ

AD15 RSS Switch Resistance — 3.2K — Ω—

AD16 CSAMPLE Sample Capacitor — 18 pF —

AD17 RIN Recommended Impedance

of Analog Voltage Source

——2.5KΩ—

DC Accuracy

AD20 Nr Resolution 12 data bits bits

AD21 INL Integral Nonlinearity — ±0.75 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V

AD21A INL Integral Nonlinearity — ±0.75 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V

AD22 DNL Differential Nonlinearity — ±0.5 < ±1 LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V

AD22A DNL Differential Nonlinearity — ±0.5 < ±1 LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V

AD23 GERR Gain Error — ±1.25 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V

AD23A GERR Gain Error — ±1.25 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V

Note 1: The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage, and has no missing

codes.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 178 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

AD24 EOFF Offset Error — ±1.25 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 5V

AD24A EOFF Offset Error — ±1.25 TBD LSb VINL = AVSS = VREFL =

0V, AVDD = VREFH = 3V

AD25 — Monotonicity(1) — — — — Guaranteed

AD26 CMRR Common-Mode Rejection — TBD — dB —

AD27 PSRR Power Supply Rejection

Ratio

—TBD— dB —

AD28 CTLK Channel to Channel

Crosstalk

—TBD— dB —

Dynamic Performance

AD30 THD Total Harmonic Distortion — — — dB —

AD31 SINAD Signal to Noise and

Distortion

—TBD— dB —

AD32 SFDR Spurious Free Dynamic

Range

—TBD— dB —

AD33 FNYQ Input Signal Bandwidth — — 50 kHz —

AD34 ENOB Effective Number of Bits — TBD TBD bits —

TABLE 20-34: 12-BIT A/D MODULE SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED)

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.5V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions

Note 1: The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage, and has no missing

codes.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 179

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

FIGURE 20-23: 12-BIT A/D CONVERSION TIMING CHARACTERISTICS

(ASAM = 0, SSRC = 000)

AD55

TSAMP

Clear SAMPSet SAMP

AD61

ADCLK

Instruction

SAMP

ch0_dischrg

ch0_samp

AD60

DONE

ADIF

ADRES(0)

1 2 3 4 5 6 87

1- Software sets ADCON. SAMP to start sampling.

2- Sampling starts after discharge period.

3- Software clears ADCON. SAMP to start conversion.

4- Sampling ends, conversion sequence starts.

5- Convert bit 11.

9- One TAD for end of conversion.

AD50

eoc

6- Convert bit 10.

7- Convert bit 1.

8- Convert bit 0.

Execution

TSAMP is described in the dsPIC30F Family Reference Manual, Section 18.

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 180 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

TABLE 20-35: 12-BIT A/D CONVERSION TIMING REQUIREMENTS

AC CHARACTERISTICS

Standard Operating Conditions: 2.7V to 5.5V

(unless otherwise stated)

Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for Industrial

-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +125°C for Extended

Param

No. Symbol Characteristic Min. Typ Max. Units Conditions

Clock Parameters

AD50 T

AD A/D Clock Period — 667 — ns VDD = 3-5.5V (Note 1)

AD51 tRC A/D Internal RC Oscillator Period 1.2 1.5 1.8 µs—

Conversion Rate

AD55 tCONV Conversion Time — 14 TAD —ns —

AD56 FCNV Throughput Rate — — 100 ksps VDD = VREF = 5V

AD57 T

SAMP Sampling Time — 1 TAD —nsVDD = 3-5.5V source

resistance

RS = 0-2.5 kΩ

Timing Parameters

AD60 tPCS Conversion Start from Sample

Trigger

——TAD ns —

AD61 tPSS Sample Start from Setting

Sample (SAMP) Bit

0.5 TAD —1.5 TAD ns —

AD62 tCSS Conversion Completion to

Sample Start (ASAM = 1)

——TBDns —

AD63 tDPU Time to Stabilize Analog Stage

from A/D Off to A/D On

——TBDµs—

Note 1: Because the sample caps will eventually lose charge, clock rates below 10 kHz can affect linearity

performance, especially at elevated temperatures.

2: These parameters are characterized but not tested in manufacturing.

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 181

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

21.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION

21.1 Package Marking Information

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

YYWWNNN

28-Lead SPDIP Example

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

18-Lead PDIP Example

18-Lead SOIC Example

0348017

dsPIC30F2012-30I/SP

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

YYWWNNN

dsPIC30F3012-30I/P

0348017

YYWWNNN

XXXXXXXXXXXX

0348017

-30I/SO

dsPIC30F2011

Legend: XX...X Customer specific information*

Y Year code (last digit of calendar year)

YY Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year)

WW Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’)

NNN Alphanumeric traceability code

Note: In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will

be carried over to the next line thus limiting the number of available characters

for customer specific information.

*Standard device marking consists of Microchip part number, year code, week code, and traceability code.

For device marking beyond this, certain price adders apply. Please check with your Microchip Sales Office.

For QTP devices, any special marking adders are included in QTP price.

28-Lead SOIC (.300”)

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

YYWWNNN

Example

PIC30F3013-30I/SO

0310017

XXXXXXXXXX

YYWWNNN

44-Lead QFN Example

dsPIC30F

3013-30I/ML

0348017

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 182 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

18-Lead Plastic Dual In-line (P) – 300 mil (PDIP

1510515105

Mold Draft Angle Bottom

1510515105

Mold Draft Angle Top

10.929.407.87.430.370.310

Overall Row Spacing §

0.560.460.36.022.018.014BLower Lead Width

1.781.461.14.070.058.045

Upper Lead Width

0.380.290.20.015.012.008

Lead Thickness

3.433.303.18.135.130.125LTip to Seating Plane

22.9922.8022.61.905.898.890DOverall Length

6.606.356.10.260.250.240E1Molded Package Width

8.267.947.62.325.313.300EShoulder to Shoulder Width

0.38.015A1Base to Seating Plane

3.683.302.92.145.130.115

Molded Package Thickness

4.323.943.56.170.155.140ATop to Seating Plane

2.54.100

Pitch

1818

Number of Pins

MAXNOMMINMAXNOMMINDimension Limits

MILLIMETERSINCHES*Units

* Controlling Parameter

Notes:

Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed

.010” (0.254mm) per side.

JEDEC Equivalent: MS-001

Drawing No. C04-007

§ Significant Characteristic

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 183

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

18-Lead Plastic Small Outline (SO) – Wide, 300 mil (SOIC)

Foot Angle φ048048

1512015120

Mold Draft Angle Bottom

1512015120

Mold Draft Angle Top

0.510.420.36.020.017.014BLead Width

0.300.270.23.012.011.009

Lead Thickness

1.270.840.41.050.033.016LFoot Length

0.740.500.25.029.020.010hChamfer Distance

11.7311.5311.33.462.454.446DOverall Length

7.597.497.39.299.295.291

Molded Package Width

10.6710.3410.01.420.407.394EOverall Width

0.300.200.10.012.008.004A1Standoff §

2.392.312.24.094.091.088A2Molded Package Thickness

2.642.502.36.104.099.093AOverall Height

1.27.050

Pitch

1818

Number of Pins

MAXNOMMINMAXNOMMINDimension Limits

MILLIMETERSINCHES*Units

45°

* Controlling Parameter

Notes:

Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed

.010” (0.254mm) per side.

JEDEC Equivalent: MS-013

Drawing No. C04-051

§ Significant Characteristic

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 184 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

28-Lead Skinny Plastic Dual In-Line (P) - 300 mil (PDIP)

Drawing No. C04-070

1510515105

Mold Draft Angle Bottom

1510515105

Mold Draft Angle Top

10.928.898.13.430.350.320

Overall Row Spacing

0.560.480.41.022.019.016BLower Lead Width

1.651.331.02.065.053.040B1Upper Lead Width

0.380.290.20.015.012.008

Lead Thickness

3.433.303.18.135.130.125LTip to Seating Plane

35.1834.6734.161.3851.3651.345DOverall Length

8.517.807.09.335.307.279E1Molded Package Width

8.267.947.62.325.313.300EShoulder to Shoulder Width

0.38.015

Base to Seating Plane

3.433.303.18.135.130.125A2Molded Package Thickness

4.063.813.56.160.150.140ATop to Seating Plane

2.54.100

Pitch

2828

Number of Pins

MAXNOMMINMAXNOMMINDimension Limits

MILLIMETERSINCHESUnits

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 185

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

28-Lead Plastic Small Outline (SO) - Wide, 300 mil Body (SOIC)

Drawing No. C04-052

Foot Angle Top f048048

1512015120

Mold Draft Angle Bottom

1512015120

Mold Draft Angle Top

0.510.420.36.020.017.014BLead Width

0.330.280.23.013.011.009

Lead Thickness

1.270.840.41.050.033.016LFoot Length

0.740.500.25.029.020.010hChamfer Distance

18.0817.8717.65.712.704.695DOverall Length

7.597.497.32.299.295.288E1Molded Package Width

10.6710.3410.01.420.407.394EOverall Width

0.300.200.10.012.008.004A1Standoff

2.392.312.24.094.091.088A2Molded Package Thickness

2.642.502.36.104.099.093AOverall Height

1.27.050

Pitch

2828

Number of Pins

MAXNOMMINMAXNOMMINDimension Limits

MILLIMETERSINCHESUnits

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 186 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

44-Lead Plastic Quad Flat No Lead Package (ML) 8x8 mm Body (QFN)

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 187

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

INDEX

Numerics

12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) Module .............. 105

A/D .................................................................................... 105

Aborting a Conversion .............................................. 107

ADCHS Register ....................................................... 105

ADCON1 Register..................................................... 105

ADCON2 Register..................................................... 105

ADCON3 Register..................................................... 105

ADCSSL Register ..................................................... 105

ADPCFG Register..................................................... 105

Configuring Analog Port Pins.............................. 54, 109

Connection Considerations....................................... 109

Conversion Operation ............................................... 106

Effects of a Reset...................................................... 108

Operation During CPU Idle Mode ............................. 108

Operation During CPU Sleep Mode.......................... 108

Output Formats ......................................................... 108

Power-down Modes .................................................. 108

Programming the Sample Trigger............................. 107

Result Buffer ............................................................. 106

Sampling Requirements............................................ 107

Selecting the Conversion Clock ................................ 107

Selecting the Conversion Sequence......................... 106

AC Characteristics ............................................................ 153

Load Conditions ........................................................ 153

AC Temperature and Voltage Specifications .................... 153

Address Generator Units .................................................... 37

Alternate Vector Table ........................................................ 63

Analog-to-Digital Converter. See A/D.

Assembler

MPASM Assembler................................................... 135

Automatic Clock Stretch...................................................... 92

During 10-bit Addressing (STREN = 1)....................... 92

During 7-bit Addressing (STREN = 1)......................... 92

Receive Mode ............................................................. 92

Transmit Mode ............................................................ 92

Bandgap Start-up Time

Requirements............................................................ 159

Timing Characteristics .............................................. 158

Barrel Shifter ....................................................................... 21

Bit-Reversed Addressing .................................................... 40

Example ...................................................................... 40

Implementation ........................................................... 40

Modifier Values Table ................................................. 41

Sequence Table (16-Entry)......................................... 41

Block Diagrams

12-bit A/D Functional ................................................ 105

16-bit Timer1 Module .................................................. 67

16-bit Timer2............................................................... 73

16-bit Timer3............................................................... 73

32-bit Timer2/3............................................................ 72

DSP Engine ................................................................ 18

dsPIC30F2011/2012 ..................................................... 6

dsPIC30F3012/3013 ................................................. 7, 9

External Power-on Reset Circuit............................... 121

I2C............................................................................... 90

Input Capture Mode .................................................... 77

Oscillator System ...................................................... 115

Output Compare Mode ............................................... 81

Reset System ........................................................... 119

Shared Port Structure................................................. 53

SPI.............................................................................. 85

SPI Master/Slave Connection..................................... 86

UART Receiver........................................................... 98

UART Transmitter....................................................... 97

BOR Characteristics ......................................................... 152

BOR. See Brown-out Reset.

Brown-out Reset

Characteristics.......................................................... 151

Timing Requirements ............................................... 158

C Compilers

MPLAB C17.............................................................. 136

MPLAB C18.............................................................. 136

MPLAB C30.............................................................. 136

CAN Module

I/O Timing Characteristics ........................................ 176

I/O Timing Requirements.......................................... 176

CLKOUT and I/O Timing

Characteristics.......................................................... 156

Requirements ........................................................... 156

Code Examples

Data EEPROM Block Erase ....................................... 50

Data EEPROM Block Write ........................................ 52

Data EEPROM Read.................................................. 49

Data EEPROM Word Erase ....................................... 50

Data EEPROM Word Write ........................................ 51

Erasing a Row of Program Memory ........................... 45

Initiating a Programming Sequence ........................... 46

Loading Write Latches................................................ 46

Code Protection................................................................ 113

Control Registers................................................................ 44

NVMADR .................................................................... 44

NVMADRU ................................................................. 44

NVMCON.................................................................... 44

NVMKEY .................................................................... 44

Core Architecture

Overview..................................................................... 13

CPU Architecture Overview................................................ 13

Data Accumulators and Adder/Subtractor .......................... 19

Data Space Write Saturation ...................................... 21

Overflow and Saturation ............................................. 19

Round Logic ............................................................... 20

Write Back .................................................................. 20

Data Address Space........................................................... 29

Alignment.................................................................... 32

Alignment (Figure) ...................................................... 32

Effect of Invalid Memory Accesses (Table) ................ 32

MCU and DSP (MAC Class) Instructions Example .... 31

Memory Map......................................................... 29, 30

Near Data Space ........................................................ 33

Software Stack ........................................................... 33

Spaces........................................................................ 32

Width .......................................................................... 32

Data EEPROM Memory...................................................... 49

Erasing ....................................................................... 50

Erasing, Block............................................................. 50

Erasing, Word............................................................. 50

Protection Against Spurious Write.............................. 52

Reading ...................................................................... 49

Write Verify ................................................................. 52

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 188 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Writing......................................................................... 51

Writing, Block .............................................................. 51

Writing, Word .............................................................. 51

DC Characteristics ............................................................ 142

BOR .......................................................................... 152

Brown-out Reset ....................................................... 151

I/O Pin Input Specifications....................................... 149

I/O Pin Output Specifications .................................... 150

Idle Current (IIDLE) .................................................... 145

Low-Voltage Detect................................................... 150

LVDL ......................................................................... 151

Operating Current (IDD)............................................. 143

Power-Down Current (IPD) ........................................ 147

Program and EEPROM............................................. 152

Temperature and Voltage Specifications .................. 142

DCI Module

Timing Characteristics

AC-Link Mode ................................................... 166

Multichannel, I2S Modes ................................... 164

Timing Requirements

AC-Link Mode ................................................... 166

Multichannel, I2S Modes ................................... 165

Demonstration Boards

PICDEM 1 ................................................................. 138

PICDEM 17 ............................................................... 138

PICDEM 18R ............................................................ 139

PICDEM 2 Plus ......................................................... 138

PICDEM 3 ................................................................. 138

PICDEM 4 ................................................................. 138

PICDEM LIN ............................................................. 139

PICDEM USB............................................................ 139

PICDEM.net Internet/Ethernet .................................. 138

Development Support ....................................................... 135

Device Configuration

Device Configuration Registers

FBORPOR ................................................................ 124

FGS........................................................................... 124

FOSC ........................................................................ 124

FWDT........................................................................ 124

Device Overview ................................................................... 5

Disabling the UART............................................................. 99

Divide Support..................................................................... 16

Instructions (Table) ..................................................... 16

DSP Engine......................................................................... 17

Multiplier...................................................................... 19

Dual Output Compare Match Mode .................................... 82

Continuous Pulse Mode.............................................. 82

Single Pulse Mode ...................................................... 82

Electrical Characteristics

AC ............................................................................. 153

DC............................................................................. 142

Enabling and Setting Up UART

Alternate I/O................................................................ 99

Setting Up Data, Parity and Stop Bit Selections ......... 99

Enabling the UART ............................................................. 99

Equations

A/D Conversion Clock............................................... 107

Baud Rate ................................................................. 101

Serial Clock Rate ........................................................ 94

Errata .................................................................................... 4

Evaluation and Programming Tools .................................. 139

Exception Sequence

Trap Sources .............................................................. 61

External Clock Timing Characteristics

Type A, B and C Timer ............................................. 159

External Clock Timing Requirements ............................... 154

Type A Timer ............................................................ 160

Type B Timer ............................................................ 161

Type C Timer............................................................ 161

External Interrupt Requests ................................................ 64

Fast Context Saving ........................................................... 64

Flash Program Memory ...................................................... 43

I/O Pin Specifications

Input.......................................................................... 149

Output....................................................................... 150

I/O Ports

Parallel (PIO) .............................................................. 53

I2C 10-bit Slave Mode Operation........................................ 91

Reception ................................................................... 92

Transmission .............................................................. 92

I2C 7-bit Slave Mode Operation.......................................... 91

Reception ................................................................... 91

Transmission .............................................................. 91

I2C Master Mode Operation................................................ 93

Baud Rate Generator ................................................. 94

Clock Arbitration ......................................................... 94

Multi-Master Communication, Bus Collision and

Bus Arbitration .................................................... 94

Reception ................................................................... 94

Transmission .............................................................. 93

I2C Master Mode Support ................................................... 93

I2C Module

Addresses................................................................... 91

Bus Data Timing Characteristics

Master Mode..................................................... 172

Slave Mode....................................................... 174

Bus Data Timing Requirements

Master Mode..................................................... 173

Slave Mode....................................................... 175

Bus Start/Stop Bits Timing Characteristics

Master Mode..................................................... 172

Slave Mode....................................................... 174

General Call Address Support .................................... 93

Interrupts .................................................................... 93

IPMI Support............................................................... 93

Operating Function Description .................................. 89

Operation During CPU Sleep and Idle Modes............ 94

Pin Configuration ........................................................ 89

Programmer’s Model .................................................. 89

Registers .................................................................... 89

Slope Control.............................................................. 93

Software Controlled Clock Stretching (STREN = 1) ... 92

Various Modes............................................................ 89

Idle Current (IIDLE) ............................................................ 145

In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP)......................... 43, 113

Input Capture (CAPX) Timing Characteristics .................. 162

Input Capture Module ......................................................... 77

Interrupts .................................................................... 78

Input Capture Operation During Sleep and Idle Modes...... 78

CPU Idle Mode ........................................................... 78

CPU Sleep Mode........................................................ 78

Input Capture Timing Requirements................................. 162

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 189

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

Input Change Notification Module....................................... 57

dsPIC30F5011 Register Map (Bits 7-0) ...................... 57

dsPIC30F5013 Register Map (Bits 7-0) ...................... 57

Instruction Addressing Modes............................................. 37

File Register Instructions ............................................ 37

Fundamental Modes Supported.................................. 37

MAC Instructions......................................................... 38

MCU Instructions ........................................................ 37

Move and Accumulator Instructions............................ 38

Other Instructions........................................................ 38

Instruction Set

Overview ................................................................... 130

Summary................................................................... 127

Internal Clock Timing Examples ....................................... 155

Interrupt Controller

Interrupt Priority .................................................................. 60

Traps........................................................................... 61

Interrupt Sequence ............................................................. 63

Interrupt Stack Frame ................................................. 63

Interrupts............................................................................. 59

Load Conditions ................................................................ 153

Low Voltage Detect (LVD) ................................................ 123

Low-Voltage Detect Characteristics.................................. 150

LVDL Characteristics ........................................................ 151

Memory Organization............................................................ 1

Core Register Map...................................................... 34

Modulo Addressing ............................................................. 38

Applicability ................................................................. 40

Incrementing Buffer Operation Example..................... 39

Start and End Address................................................ 39

W Address Register Selection .................................... 39

MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian ................... 136

MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger ................................... 137

MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance Universal

In-Circuit Emulator .................................................... 137

MPLAB ICE 4000 High-Performance Universal

In-Circuit Emulator .................................................... 137

MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software .. 135

MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ................ 136

NVM

OC/PWM Module Timing Characteristics.......................... 163

Operating Current (IDD)..................................................... 143

Operating Frequency vs Voltage

dsPIC30FXXXX-20 (Extended)................................. 142

Oscillator

Configurations........................................................... 116

Fail-Safe Clock Monitor .................................... 118

Fast RC (FRC).................................................. 117

Initial Clock Source Selection ........................... 116

Low Power RC (LPRC)..................................... 117

LP Oscillator Control......................................... 117

Phase Locked Loop (PLL) ................................ 117

Start-up Timer (OST) ........................................ 116

Operating Modes (Table) .......................................... 114

System Overview ...................................................... 113

Oscillator Selection ........................................................... 113

Oscillator Start-up Timer

Timing Characteristics .............................................. 157

Timing Requirements ............................................... 158

Output Compare Interrupts................................................. 83

Output Compare Module .................................................... 81

Timing Characteristics .............................................. 162

Timing Requirements ............................................... 162

Output Compare Operation During CPU Idle Mode ........... 83

Output Compare Sleep Mode Operation ............................ 83

Packaging Information...................................................... 181

Marking..................................................................... 181

Peripheral Module Disable (PMD) Registers .................... 125

PICkit 1 Flash Starter Kit .................................................. 139

PICSTART Plus Development Programmer..................... 137

Pinout Descriptions............................................................. 10

PLL Clock Timing Specifications ...................................... 155

POR. See Power-on Reset.

Port Write/Read Example ................................................... 54

PORTB

PORTC

PORTD

PORTF

Power Saving Modes........................................................ 123

Idle............................................................................ 124

Sleep ........................................................................ 123

Sleep and Idle........................................................... 113

Power-Down Current (IPD)................................................ 147

Power-up Timer

Timing Characteristics .............................................. 157

Timing Requirements ............................................... 158

PRO MATE II Universal Device Programmer ................... 137

Program Address Space..................................................... 23

Construction ............................................................... 25

Data Access from Program Memory Using

Program Space Visibility..................................... 27

Data Access From Program Memory Using

Table Instructions ............................................... 26

Data Access from, Address Generation ..................... 25

Data Space Window into Operation ........................... 28

Data Table Access (LS Word) .................................... 26

Data Table Access (MS Byte) .................................... 27

Memory Map............................................................... 24

Table Instructions

TBLRDH ............................................................. 26

TBLRDL.............................................................. 26

TBLWTH............................................................. 26

TBLWTL ............................................................. 26

Program and EEPROM Characteristics............................ 152

Program Counter ................................................................ 14

Programmable .................................................................. 113

Programmer’s Model .......................................................... 14

Diagram ...................................................................... 15

Programming Operations.................................................... 45

Algorithm for Program Flash....................................... 45

Erasing a Row of Program Memory ........................... 45

Initiating the Programming Sequence ........................ 46

Loading Write Latches................................................ 46

Protection Against Accidental Writes to OSCCON........... 118

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 190 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

Reset......................................................................... 113, 119

BOR, Programmable................................................. 121

Brown-out Reset (BOR) ............................................ 113

Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ................................ 113

POR

Operating without FSCM and PWRT ................ 121

With Long Crystal Start-up Time....................... 121

POR (Power-on Reset) ............................................. 119

Power-on Reset (POR) ............................................. 113

Power-up Timer (PWRT) .......................................... 113

Reset Sequence.................................................................. 61

Reset Sources ............................................................ 61

Reset Sources

Brown-out Reset (BOR) .............................................. 61

Illegal Instruction Trap................................................. 61

Trap Lockout ............................................................... 61

Uninitialized W Register Trap ..................................... 61

Watchdog Time-out..................................................... 61

Reset Timing Characteristics ............................................ 157

Reset Timing Requirements.............................................. 158

Run-Time Self-Programming (RTSP) ................................. 43

Simple Capture Event Mode ............................................... 77

Buffer Operation.......................................................... 78

Hall Sensor Mode ....................................................... 78

Prescaler..................................................................... 77

Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode............................ 78

Simple OC/PWM Mode Timing Requirements.................. 163

Simple Output Compare Match Mode................................. 82

Simple PWM Mode ............................................................. 82

Input Pin Fault Protection............................................ 82

Period.......................................................................... 83

Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM)..................................... 136

Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM30)................................. 136

Software Stack Pointer, Frame Pointer............................... 14

CALL Stack Frame...................................................... 33

SPI Module.......................................................................... 85

Framed SPI Support ................................................... 86

Operating Function Description .................................. 85

Operation During CPU Idle Mode ............................... 87

Operation During CPU Sleep Mode............................ 87

SDOx Disable ............................................................. 86

Slave Select Synchronization ..................................... 87

SPI1 Register Map...................................................... 88

Timing Characteristics

Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 167

Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 168

Slave Mode (CKE = 1) .............................. 169, 170

Timing Requirements

Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 167

Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 168

Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ...................................... 169

Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ...................................... 171

Word and Byte Communication .................................. 86

Status Bits, Their Significance and the Initialization

Condition for RCON Register, Case 1 ...................... 122

Status Bits, Their Significance and the Initialization

Condition for RCON Register, Case 2 ...................... 122

Status Register.................................................................... 14

Symbols Used in Opcode Descriptions............................. 128

System Integration

Table Instruction Operation Summary ................................ 43

Temperature and Voltage Specifications

AC............................................................................. 153

DC ............................................................................ 142

Timer1 Module

16-bit Asynchronous Counter Mode ........................... 67

16-bit Synchronous Counter Mode............................. 67

16-bit Timer Mode....................................................... 67

Gate Operation ........................................................... 68

Interrupt ...................................................................... 68

Operation During Sleep Mode .................................... 68

Prescaler .................................................................... 68

Real-Time Clock ......................................................... 68

Interrupts ............................................................ 69

Oscillator Operation............................................ 69

Timer2 and Timer3 Selection Mode.................................... 82

Timer2/3 Module

16-bit Timer Mode....................................................... 71

32-bit Synchronous Counter Mode............................. 71

32-bit Timer Mode....................................................... 71

ADC Event Trigger...................................................... 74

Gate Operation ........................................................... 74

Interrupt ...................................................................... 74

Operation During Sleep Mode .................................... 74

Timer Prescaler .......................................................... 74

Timing Characteristics

A/D Conversion

Low-speed (ASAM = 0, SSRC = 000) .............. 179

Bandgap Start-up Time............................................. 158

CAN Module I/O........................................................ 176

CLKOUT and I/O ...................................................... 156

DCI Module

AC-Link Mode................................................... 166

Multichannel, I2S Modes................................... 164

External Clock........................................................... 153

I2C Bus Data

Master Mode..................................................... 172

Slave Mode....................................................... 174

I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits

Master Mode..................................................... 172

Slave Mode....................................................... 174

Input Capture (CAPX)............................................... 162

OC/PWM Module...................................................... 163

Oscillator Start-up Timer........................................... 157

Output Compare Module .......................................... 162

Power-up Timer ........................................................ 157

Reset ........................................................................ 157

SPI Module

Master Mode (CKE = 0).................................... 167

Master Mode (CKE = 1).................................... 168

Slave Mode (CKE = 0)...................................... 169

Slave Mode (CKE = 1)...................................... 170

Type A, B and C Timer External Clock..................... 159

Watchdog Timer ....................................................... 157

Timing Diagrams

PWM Output ............................................................... 83

Time-out Sequence on Power-up

(MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 1 ..................... 120

Time-out Sequence on Power-up

(MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 2 ..................... 120

Time-out Sequence on Power-up

(MCLR Tied to VDD) ......................................... 120

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 191

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

Timing Diagrams and Specifications

DC Characteristics - Internal RC Accuracy............... 155

Timing Diagrams.See Timing Characteristics

Timing Requirements

A/D Conversion

Low-speed ........................................................ 180

Bandgap Start-up Time............................................. 159

Brown-out Reset ....................................................... 158

CAN Module I/O........................................................ 176

CLKOUT and I/O....................................................... 156

DCI Module

AC-Link Mode ................................................... 166

Multichannel, I2S Modes................................... 165

External Clock........................................................... 154

I2C Bus Data (Master Mode)..................................... 173

I2C Bus Data (Slave Mode)....................................... 175

Input Capture ............................................................ 162

Oscillator Start-up Timer ........................................... 158

Output Compare Module........................................... 162

Power-up Timer ........................................................ 158

Reset......................................................................... 158

Simple OC/PWM Mode............................................. 163

SPI Module

Master Mode (CKE = 0) .................................... 167

Master Mode (CKE = 1) .................................... 168

Slave Mode (CKE = 0) ...................................... 169

Slave Mode (CKE = 1) ...................................... 171

Type A Timer External Clock .................................... 160

Type B Timer External Clock .................................... 161

Type C Timer External Clock .................................... 161

Watchdog Timer........................................................ 158

Timing Specifications

PLL Clock.................................................................. 155

Trap Vectors ....................................................................... 63

UART Module

Address Detect Mode ............................................... 101

Auto Baud Support ................................................... 102

Baud Rate Generator ............................................... 101

Enabling and Setting Up............................................. 99

Framing Error (FERR) .............................................. 101

Idle Status................................................................. 101

Loopback Mode ........................................................ 101

Operation During CPU Sleep and Idle Modes.......... 102

Overview..................................................................... 97

Parity Error (PERR) .................................................. 101

Receive Break .......................................................... 101

Receive Buffer (UxRXB)........................................... 100

Receive Buffer Overrun Error (OERR Bit) ................ 100

Receive Interrupt ...................................................... 100

Receiving Data ......................................................... 100

Receiving in 8-bit or 9-bit Data Mode ....................... 100

Reception Error Handling ......................................... 100

Transmit Break ......................................................... 100

Transmit Buffer (UxTXB) ............................................ 99

Transmit Interrupt ..................................................... 100

Transmitting Data ....................................................... 99

Transmitting in 8-bit Data Mode ................................. 99

Transmitting in 9-bit Data Mode ................................. 99

UART1 Register Map ............................................... 103

UART2 Register Map ............................................... 103

UART Operation

Idle Mode.................................................................. 102

Sleep Mode .............................................................. 102

Unit ID Locations .............................................................. 113

Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter

(UART) Module........................................................... 97

Wake-up from Sleep......................................................... 113

Wake-up from Sleep and Idle ............................................. 64

Watchdog Timer

Timing Characteristics .............................................. 157

Timing Requirements ............................................... 158

Watchdog Timer (WDT)............................................ 113, 123

Enabling and Disabling............................................. 123

Operation.................................................................. 123

WWW, On-Line Support ....................................................... 4

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 192 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

NOTES:

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 193

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

ON-LINE SUPPORT

Microchip provides on-line support on the Microchip

World Wide Web site.

The web site is used by Microchip as a means to make

files and information easily available to customers. To

view the site, the user must have access to the Internet

and a web browser, such as Netscape® or Microsoft®

Internet Explorer. Files are also available for FTP

download from our FTP site.

Connecting to the Microchip Internet

Web Site

The Microchip web site is available at the following

URL:

www.microchip.com

The file transfer site is available by using an FTP ser-

vice to connect to:

ftp://ftp.microchip.com

The web site and file transfer site provide a variety of

services. Users may download files for the latest

Development Tools, Data Sheets, Application Notes,

User's Guides, Articles and Sample Programs. A vari-

ety of Microchip specific business information is also

available, including listings of Microchip sales offices,

distributors and factory representatives. Other data

available for consideration is:

• Latest Microchip Press Releases

• Technical Support Section with Frequently Asked

Questions

• Design Tips

• Device Errata

• Job Postings

• Microchip Consultant Program Member Listing

• Links to other useful web sites related to

Microchip Products

• Conferences for products, Development Systems,

technical information and more

• Listing of seminars and events

SYSTEMS INFORMATION AND

UPGRADE HOT LINE

The Systems Information and Upgrade Line provides

system users a listing of the latest versions of all of

Microchip's development systems software products.

Plus, this line provides information on how customers

can receive the most current upgrade kits.The Hot Line

Numbers are:

1-800-755-2345 for U.S. and most of Canada, and

1-480-792-7302 for the rest of the world.

042003

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

DS70139A-page 194 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

READER RESPONSE

It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip prod-

uct. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation

can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150.

Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document.

To: Technical Publications Manager

RE: Reader Response

Total Pages Sent ________

From: Name

Company

Address

City / State / ZIP / Country

Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________

Application (optional):

Would you like a reply? Y N

Device: Literature Number:

Questions:

FAX: (______) _________ - _________

DS70139AdsPIC30F2011, dsPIC30F2012,

dsPIC30F3012, dsPIC30F3013

1. What are the best features of this document?

2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs?

3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why?

4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject?

5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness?

6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)?

7. How would you improve this document?

 2004 Microchip Technology Inc. Advance Information DS70139A-page 195

dsPIC30F2011/2012/3012/3013

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM

To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office.

dsPIC30F3013AT-30I/SP-ES

Example:

dsPIC30F3013AT-30I/SP = 30 MIPS, Industrial temp., SPDIP package, Rev. A

Trademark

Architecture

Flash

E = Extended High Temp -40°C to +125°C

I = Industrial -40°C to +85°C

Temperature

Device ID

Package

P=DIP

SO = SOIC

SP = SPDIP

ML = QFN (8x8)

Memory Size in Bytes

0 = ROMless

1 = 1K to 6K

2 = 7K to 12K

3 = 13K to 24K

4 = 25K to 48K

5 = 49K to 96K

6 = 97K to 192K

7 = 193K to 384K

8 = 385K to 768K

9 = 769K and Up

Custom ID (3 digits) or

T = Tape and Reel

A,B,C… = Revision Level

Engineering Sample (ES)

Speed

20 = 20 MIPS

30 = 30 MIPS

DS70139A-page 196 Advance Information  2004 Microchip Technology Inc.

AMERICAS

Corporate Office

2355 West Chandler Blvd.

Chandler, AZ 85224-6199

Tel: 480-792-7200

Fax: 480-792-7277

Technical Support:

480-792-7627

Web Address:

www.microchip.com

Atlanta

Alpharetta, GA

Tel: 770-640-0034

Fax: 770-640-0307

Boston

Westford, MA

Tel: 978-692-3848

Fax: 978-692-3821

Chicago

Itasca, IL

Tel: 630-285-0071

Fax: 630-285-0075

Dallas

Addison, TX

Tel: 972-818-7423

Fax: 972-818-2924

Detroit

Farmington Hills, MI

Tel: 248-538-2250

Fax: 248-538-2260

Kokomo

Kokomo, IN

Tel: 765-864-8360

Fax: 765-864-8387

Los Angeles

Mission Viejo, CA

Tel: 949-462-9523

Fax: 949-462-9608

San Jose

Mountain View, CA

Tel: 650-215-1444

Fax: 650-961-0286

Toronto

Mississauga, Ontario,

Canada

Tel: 905-673-0699

Fax: 905-673-6509

ASIA/PACIFIC

Australia - Sydney

Tel: 61-2-9868-6733

Fax: 61-2-9868-6755

China - Beijing

Tel: 86-10-8528-2100

Fax: 86-10-8528-2104

China - Chengdu

Tel: 86-28-8676-6200

Fax: 86-28-8676-6599

China - Fuzhou

Tel: 86-591-750-3506

Fax: 86-591-750-3521

China - Hong Kong SAR

Tel: 852-2401-1200

Fax: 852-2401-3431

China - Shanghai

Tel: 86-21-6275-5700

Fax: 86-21-6275-5060

China - Shenzhen

Tel: 86-755-8290-1380

Fax: 86-755-8295-1393

China - Shunde

Tel: 86-757-2839-5507

Fax: 86-757-2839-5571

China - Qingdao

Tel: 86-532-502-7355

Fax: 86-532-502-7205

ASIA/PACIFIC

India - Bangalore

Tel: 91-80-2229-0061

Fax: 91-80-2229-0062

India - New Delhi

Tel: 91-11-5160-8632

Fax: 91-11-5160-8632

Japan - Kanagawa

Tel: 81-45-471- 6166

Fax: 81-45-471-6122

Korea - Seoul

Tel: 82-2-554-7200

Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or

82-2-558-5934

Singapore

Tel: 65-6334-8870

Fax: 65-6334-8850

Taiwan - Kaohsiung

Tel: 886-7-536-4816

Fax: 886-7-536-4817

Taiwan - Taipei

Tel: 886-2-2500-6610

Fax: 886-2-2508-0102

Taiwan - Hsinchu

Tel: 886-3-572-9526

Fax: 886-3-572-6459

EUROPE

Austria - Weis

Tel: 43-7242-2244-399

Fax: 43-7242-2244-393

Denmark - Ballerup

Tel: 45-4420-9895

Fax: 45-4420-9910

France - Massy

Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20

Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79

Germany - Ismaning

Tel: 49-89-627-144-0

Fax: 49-89-627-144-44

Italy - Milan

Tel: 39-0331-742611

Fax: 39-0331-466781

Netherlands - Drunen

Tel: 31-416-690399

Fax: 31-416-690340

England - Berkshire

Tel: 44-118-921-5869

Fax: 44-118-921-5820

WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE

08/24/04